Compo om pone nent ntss and and Syste ys tems ms Best Quality - Made in Germany
LiftEquip Training Center
More than you expect ...
The details quoted in this Product Information can only be viewed as binding when conrmed expressly
in writing. Reproduction, reprint and storage only with authorisation of the editor.
2
Issue 09/2015
Table of Contents
Page Preface and Company Presentation
Drive Units and Frequency Inverter
Safety- and Elevator Elevator Components
Doors
Kits
Home Lift
Safety
www.liftequip.com
4
Inquiry Sheet , for Components and Systems
16
LEKalk , the tool for drive design and component selection
17
Homepage LiftEquip, Your information platform for components and systems
20
LiftEquip, Customer and training centre
21
Geared Machine, TW- and W-Series
27
Gearless Machinen, PMC- and DAF-Series
47
MO61, Solutions with PMC Gearless
67
Compact Gearless, SC-Series
77
External Rotor Gearless, DAB-Series
81
Drive Accessories, Brake Control, UCM-Modul
85
Frequency Inverter MFC and MFR with regeneration
93
Car Sling TCS, the Flexible One for Medium Loads
103
Counterw terwe eigh ight GTK, tth he Variab riable Solutio lution n for for many Ins Installa tallato ton n Situa ituation tions
107
Progressive Safety/Braking System
111
Overspeed Governor and Accessories
115
Oil and Spring Buffers, Telescopic Buffer Uprights
123
Roller Guides and Sliding Guides
131
Rope Pulleys and Accessories
143
Comfort Door S8A/K8A
147
Modernisation for Door Drive F9
167
LEA®
169
- Family
LEA®
173
LEA® - Flexible
185
LEA® - Comfort
189
LEA® - Cargo
193
LEA® - Home
209
LEMoS®, the Modular Modernisation Solution
219
Basic Safety Practices for Lifts
247
Calendar
289
Standards and guidelines
290
The TEAM of LiftEquip
294
3
Preface
Dear Sir/Madam, The complexity of t he lift business is steadily increasing. To enable you to nd the appropriate solution with the right specic ations for your project, we have now grouped all of our components,
kits and other solutions clearly in a general catalogue. True to our motto “ More than you expect... LiftEquip” you can nd all of our products here, fr om the
simple, but reliable-and-tested sliding guide shoes and the complete range of safety technology to all kinds of mechanical kits in the LEA family. LiftEquip also supplies the fast growing home lift market. We offer you the Gulliver and Orion as complete solutions under the heading “LEA Home" - not just for the private use. A large part of the catalogue is taken taken up by the eld of drive unit solutions: solutions: geared machines machines from the tried-and-tested
TW45C and TW63B to the heavy duty W332C. TW130 and TW160 effectively supplement the power ranges. Many drives are also optionally suitable for higher protection classes or explosion-risk areas or can be supplied with the successful NBS system for fast and safe A3 retrotting. In our gearless drives the smallest is the new star: the t he PMC125. PMC125. Economic, reliable and extremely smooth in opera tion, it is the perfect entry to the successful PMC series. Additional efcient drives are available for the higher perfor -
mance range in the form of the DAF and SC series. The importance we attach to sustainability is for example shown by our MFR inverter with integrated energy regeneration. It makes an active contribution to environmental protection during every journey – and this every day for many years. This will denitely also pay off for your customers!
We are aware from our day-to-day work how much safety is a concern for all of us and a constant companion in what we do. The optimally coordinated chain of development, planning, design, manufacture, assembly, maintenance and monitoring as well as repair and modernisation later on, is what make lifts one of the safest modes of transport there is. Despite all this, accidents can unfortunately still happen. This is why we have decided to include the brochure “Basic safety rules” in full as an annex, published by the European Lift Association (ELA) and in this way help to distribute these vital safety rules and prevent accidents. I greatly appreciate your interest and now wish you success in looking for the solution that ts you best. The LiftEquip team would be pleased to advise you. You You can nd our contact
data on the cover page at the end of the catalogue. We look forward to working with you. Best regards Thorsten Elsaesser
4
Issue 09/2015
Location and International Alignment Alw Alwa ays where you need us
Europe
Nort No rth h Ameri America ca
●
As A sia
Afr A fric ica a
South America Au A ustr tra alilia a
What occurs to you when you think of elevators? What do you consider particularly important when you are choosing a provider of elevators? No doubt you expect safety and reliability, and want products you can trust. After all, you are deciding on an investment that you do not want to regret in future. As LiftEquip, the renowned provider of components for elevators, we know your requirements and expectations very precisely. Our products and services, in the same way as our company and actions, have been aligned to these requirements and expectations. You receive full support where you need it. Our international alignment means that we know
the national legal and technical requirements in your country. Thousands of highly satised customers have been placing their trust in us for many decades. Alongside the „big
players“ in the industry, many small and medium-sized elevator companies and service operations are among our customers. What they appreciate is that we know more about elevators than almost anyone else!
www.liftequip.com
5
Range of Products
Whether you are planning a low-cost standard elevator or a premium installation that will be subjected to high loads, and whether your elevator is to run in a closed shaft or as a representative panorama system: we cover the entire range of
applications from passenger to freight elevators, and deliver all the important components for your elevator. Drives With our elevator drives, you can choose between the energy-efcient, gearless drives or the legendary gear drives for
virtually any range of speed and rated load. A balanced system with matching frequency control ensures outstanding running performance on every drive.
Gears
6
Gearless
Control system
Issue 09/2015
High-Quality Components for your Elevator From the Component to the Complete Assemblies
Solutions for modernisation
We have developed very special solutions for the modernisation of existing elevator systems. Variable in dimensions, our compact and highly modern drives can be easily adapted to almost any circumstances. With a modication, you
reliably bring your installation up to date with regard to safety, comfort and energy consumption.
Modernisation
A S L 5 5 5 - 7 6 5
ModKit MO61 S
m m
ModKit MO61 D4 LEMoS
®
www.liftequip.com
7
Range of Products
Safety
Doors
Safety gear frames and safety technology
Another centrepiece is the safety gear frame in which your elevator car is mounted to insulate it. Our safety technology components are space-saving and easily accessible, integrated in the safety gear frame. It goes without saying that the comprehensive range of products also includes all other safety devices. Doors
The comfort elevator doors S8A / K8A be in people - employed and freight elevators with high demands on quiet running, lifting height and comfort. The shaft doors are 81-58 brand tested for re resistance in accordance with DIN EN. The extensive range of options
(SA - special designs) the door is suitable for use under special requirements.
8
Issue 09/2015
High-Quality Components for your Elevator From the Component to the Complete Assemblies
Kits The LEA® - Family
®
LEA
Flexible
®
LEA
®
LEA
Comfort
Home Lift
Overall system in f ocus All of our products meet the applicable requirements of European regulations and are certied for many countries. They
are designed and built according to the state of the art, have long service lives and are very reliable. We pay particular attention to the function, co-ordination and availability of the entire elevator on designing our components. This is why you also get components in nely graded construction sizes, each of which has the optimal perfor mance and price for your elevator. Whether for a new installation or for a modernisation: with our components, you establish the basis for an outstanding elevator and always make a good decision in favour of an economical investment!
www.liftequip.com
9
Consulting for our Customers
Every elevator is individual and must be adapted to the type of use in the building and the requirements of the operator. The elevator should t into the building harmoniously and ensure smooth transport of passengers and freight. This is why the choice of the appropriate components is of particular signicance. Here, too, we support you as a partner.
Personal consul ting
In a personal discussion, we are glad to advise you on the telephone or on site, naturally also in your national language. Together we nd the optimal solution for your use case. Our aim at all times is to work with you to create an
elevator system with optimised technology and economy. Conguration program Our conguration program contains all of our experience from theory and practice. The relevant criteria are queried to
ensure a reliable selection of products and construction sizes. Alongside the performance data such as rated load and speed, the so-called handling capacity has a decisive inuence. The programs deliver you planning data and also the
complete documentation that you require for registration and approval of the elevator system.
10
Issue 09/2015
The Human Factor for Success Expertise in Elevators Guarantees you have made the right decision
What makes a company good and how does a good company differ from others? We are convinced that the m a jor factor is the workforce! Their qualications and ideas have made us one of the best providers on the market.
This is to remain so in future. Elevator expertise
Our specialists have the elevator expertise that enables them to adapt to your individual ideas and wishes. This is the basis for being able to provide you as a customer with skilled and superior support, above all when older elevator systems or delivery capabilities with respect to spare parts are involved. In the case of an elevator that is to continue running safely after ten, twenty or more years, our expertise is a great advantage. Continuous re-qualication This is why outstanding in-house training and continuous re-qualication are particularly important to us. We
want our employees to know our customers and understand their needs and expectations. Our customers place high demands on us with respect to safe and reliable elevators. And they are right to do so – after all, a long-term investment decision is involved!
www.liftequip.com
11
High-End Technology Production with top technology - at an attractive price for you
12
Issue 09/2015
High-Quality Components for your Elevator Alongside the people and their know-how, the technology in production has a decisive inuence on the quality of our products. This is why we
invest in the latest processes, machines and systems. Certied quality We guarantee the high quality level with certied processes. Quality assu -
rance checks are performed at each work step.. In our o wn test laboratory, we use a highly precise 3-D measuring unit. Nothing is left to chance. Our certications document this impressively: - Quality management complying with DIN EN ISO 9001
- Environmental management complying with ISO 14001 - Occupational health and safety management complying with ISO 18001. Production at the elevator specialist
One important aspect of an elevator is good preparation of the components for installation in the shaft. The metal plate parts must not be sharpedged. This is why we use a laser to cut them without burrs. The exact tting accuracy of the parts is achieved with a modern bending centre.
Excessive tolerances can only be balanced out on the construction site very laboriously. The drive is the component in the elevator that is subjected to the highest
stress. A long service life and reliability for gears are only achieved with precise production of the gear teeth. We do this with special machines and by exploiting our extensive experience. The same applies to the motors of the gearless drives. The electrical and thermal conguration and the insu lation of the windings are the decisive quality characteristics here. If only metal had no „natural enemies“ such as corrosion ... To counteract
this, we use sheets made of stainless steel or with galvanised surfaces. Other surfaces are covered with a high-quality powder coating. Attractive price-performance ratio
Alongside quality, you naturally also expect an affordable product. The deployment of technologically and economically optimised processes means that our products are very attractive as regards the price-performance ratio. Our production can react exibly when individual wishes or very short
delivery times have to be complied with. Perfection all the way to delivery
Before our components leave our plant, we test the function of all products and the completeness of every delivery. Our customers on the construction site receive correctly adjusted and tested products at all times. This is what we demand of ourselves!
www.liftequip.com
13
Reliable Delivery Tested products punctually at your elevator system
You order from us and want the products „immediately“? We can‘t quite manage „immediately“, but we deliver the components to your construction site within a few days!
How do w e manage that?
The common products such as drives, frequency controls and components for modernisation are in stock in our warehouse. Our production plant is also very well situated for road, rail and air transport. We maintain other warehouses at central locations within Europe. This is an unbeatable advantage when a matter becomes urgent!
What awaits you at the constr uction s ite?
We deliver the products safely and suitably packaged for transpo rt to the construction site and prepared for installation in line with the needs of the site. Our own installation specialists check and improve this continuously. We offer soluti ons The short-term availability of major components rounds off our service and together we nd the right solution for your project. Safely – quickly – reliably.
We make every effort to manufacture the best products for you – so they should also arrive at your site in faultless condition and punctually!
14
Issue 09/2015
Service and Customer Proximity Full support until you are fully satised
For such a sophisticated and long-term investment as an elevator, we offer not only the product itself but also a comprehensive range of services. We assure you: you always get our full support! Consulting and telephone hotline
On our telephone hotline, we advise you with regard to our products and the best way to deploy them. You talk
to specialists with practical experience who do their best to answer your questions at all times. We clear up most of these questions quickly and reliably by telephone, email or fax. You can also talk to our employees in many
languages. Proximity to our customers
Close contact to our customers and the practitioners on the construction site provide us with valuable feedback. We use this acquired knowledge to continuously adapt the products and their documentation to the requirements of our customers to an even greater degree. Prot from this
wealth of experience from elevator construction and from our close relationship to our customers. On-site support
For each product, you receive detailed documentation with all technical details, connection values, installation instructions and many valuable tips. The safe and errorfree installation of the products is our number one priority. Should you ever need on-site support, we will send one of our specialists directly to you and your elevator as quickly as possible. Trade fairs and visiti ng you Allow us to convince you of our services: we are repre-
sented at many trade fairs within Europe. There, you can inspect our products and have them explained in detail. We will also be glad to visit you to present our components directly on site. Place your trust in the attitude of our employees: „We are only satised when your elevator runs perfectly and reliably and your wishes have been fullled!“
www.liftequip.com
15
Inquiry Sheet
Inquiry Sheet For components and systems t e e h S y r i u q n I
2.1 Drive Unit s Inquiry/Order
Customer
Inquiry
Order ____________________________
To
Company
Since only you know your project, we need your
LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components
Contact person Phone
+49 (7158) 12-2929 +49 (7158) 12-2971
[email protected]
Fax E-Mail
Systems have interfaces to the building and components have interfaces to the neighbouring assemblies.
input in order to be able to submit a tailor-made offer to you, which takes all your requirements into account.
Date
Machine type
Gear
Controller type
Fr equency
VVVF inverter
MFC
Gearless
regulated
20/21
1:1
Rated load Q [kg]
2:1
3:1
You can nd the enquiry forms for downloading on
4:1
our home page or contact our sales.
___________
Car weight [kg]
You will not only assist us in designing your com ponents, but also benet from our serving you as
___________
incl. Car sling Counterweight [kg]
___________
Travel height [m]
quickly as possible.
___________
Compensation rope / chain
Yes
Machine located
Above
(MR) Below (MR)
Depth of machine [m]
No Above Below
beside beside
Above Below
(HR) (SP)
If it is very urgent, use LEKalk and assemble the components needed.
___________
(if machine not above) Gear Gearless Documentation
qualied offer.
30/31 Others
___________
Rated speed v N [m/s]
Machine type
2-speed MFC
MFR
Suspension r
We have produced enquiry forms for all of our products, covering the parameters we need for a
TW
TW
TW
TW
45 C 160 PMC 145-2 PMC 170
W
W
German
63 B 263 C DAF 210 DAF 270 English
French*
130 332 C SC 300 SC 400 Russian**
When you place the order, we will once again check the technology with you so that you can be sure of having selected the best product for your needs.
Notes:
Page 1 of 2
16
Issue: 12/2014
Issue 09/2015
LEKalk
LEKalk The tool for drive design and component selection k l a K E L
The LEkalk tool is a design and planning instrument for customers and planners with which a gearless or gear drive can be quickly and efciently calculated with the matching inverter, with or without energy
feedback. As a result, it is also very easy to calculate different lift congurations – comparing gearless or gear drive or designs with or without energy
feedback for lift planning and evaluation and in this way work out the best solution for each application. The drive design, traction capacity and rope detection can be used as calculation for your registration documents at the body mentioned. The programme is a local application, which you can download from our homepage www.liftequip.de after the corresponding registration. Please contact us in this regard. Below there is a short overview of the LEKalk tool options:
LEKalk suggests possible motors on the basis of the lift data and selection of the gear drive. Here you can for example also indicate whether energy feedback is desired.
After selecting the motor and type of frequency control (here with feedback), a selection of possible inverters is suggested. Power consumption and power reserves are likewise stated.
www.liftequip.com
17
LEKalk
LEKalk The tool for drive design and component selection k l a K E L
LEKalk shows possible suitable inverters. Power reserves are stated.
LEKalk calculates the traction capacity on the basis of the relevant parameters.
You can add even more compo -
nents via the catalogue function, such as the base frame, ropes, car frame and the entire spectrum of safety technology.
18
Issue 09/2015
LEKalk
LEKalk The tool for drive design and component selection
In this way you can create your own offer independently with price and delivery information at any time.
k l a K E L
The design is for submission to the responsible monitoring bodies.
An employee of LiftEquip would be pleased to assist you with queries and training courses regarding LEkalk and with technical advice.
www.liftequip.com
19
www.liftequip.com
www.liftequip.com Your information platform for components and systems e g a p e m o H p i u q E t f i L
Always online, always up-to-date Here you can nd all the information on
LiftEquip’s products. Register as a customer and the following additional documents and tools will be available to you: • LEKalk • product catalogues • operating manuals • type approval certicates • CAD data • 3D models • ….
LiftEquip newsletter
To ensure you are always up-to-date, please register via the home page for our newsletter. https://www.liftequip.com/newsletter.html
Modernisation lift car LEMoS ® LiftEquip has provided a modular solution for lift modernisations for rated loads up to 1050 kg at speeds of 1 m/s in the form of LEMoS®.
Flexible means you can keep the parts of your lift whose replacement is not technically necessary and would make little economic sense. This exibility with the exible LEMoS® lift car, which can be combined with the doors of different manufacturers, is
this solution’s USP. Customised modernisation solutions, which make allowance for technical as well as economic considerations, can be put together here irrespective of the old lift’s manufacturer. You can nd more advantages of the LEMoS® system below or on our homepage: www.liftequip.com/products/systems/lemos.html
LEMoS® - in a nutshell: • The lift car width and depth can be congured in millimetre steps – hence optimal use of the existing shaft. • Very compact. Micrometer: car width + 40 mm. • Short standstill times thanks to short installation and delivery times. • Prepared for doors of many different well-known markt manufacturers. As a result, it is possible to react with the exibility required to all kinds of demands.
• Modern lift car design and high quality appearance. LEMoS® arose out of modernisation for modernisation! Modernisation can be this easy! Find out from us today with the question sheet.
Machine base frame ModKit MO61 S Extremely exible and economic! We would like to present another LiftEquip modernisation solution – our new ModKit MO61S machine base frame. It is a pre-installed machine base frame, specially developed for our gearless PMC145-2 M/XL and L/XL for 1:1 suspension, rated load
up to 675 kg and 1.0 m/s. The ASL dimension (distance of lift car suspension to the counterweight suspension) can be set exibly from 555 to 765 mm and is delivered with rope guard. A hand
release and hand wheel are optionally available. The frame is pre-installed and can be supplied from stock with the drive. www.liftequip.com/products/systems/modkit-mo61s.html
20
Issue 09/2015
Customer and Training Centre
LiftEquip - Customer and Training Centre e r t n e C g n i n i a r T d n a r e m o t s u C
In the new LiftEquip customer centre we will soon be offering you the following training courses. • LEKalk course: Here you learn how to handle LEKalk like a professional. The goal of this course is to learn the ner points of the programme and then use it in everyday work. Course duration: one day • MFC/MFR inverter course: In the theoretical part you learn the basics of inverter technology and the correct ins-
tallation and fast start-up of the MFC and MFR inverters. In the practical section you work on our training lift (1000 kg, 17m, 1.6 m/s) to implement what you have learned with exercises and get practical tips and tricks. You must
bring your own work clothing and personal protective equipment. Course duration: one-and-a-half days
*For assistance during commissioning, you can contact our hotline (+49172735 2020). • Home lif ts Gulliver and Orion co urse: Learn the installation and start-up of the home lift on our Gulliver training model. You must bring your work clothing and safety shoes. Course duration: one day • Maintenance and service on LiftEquip motors: You learn the basics of gear drive and gearless drive technology
as well as everything needed to maintain and correctly set the drives of LiftEquip and replacing the rotary encoder and traction sheave. You must bring your work clothing and safety shoes. Course duration: one day • LEA assembly course: You learn how to assemble the LiftEquip LEA MRL building kit in real lif t shafts. We show
you the version of frameless assembly. The focus here in particular is on the installation of the machine base frame. You must bring your own work clothing and personal protective equipment. Course duration: one-and-a-half days
Please contact us if you are interested in one of t he courses.
www.liftequip.com
21
22
Issue 09/2015
Technical Report
Technical Report LiftEquip - From components to home lifts
LiftEquip – from components to home lifts
UK
a matching rope drum for two ropes for the familiar TW63, TW130 and TW160 gear systems. These can be used to move rated loads of 450 to 1200 kg and, in accordance with EN 81-1, speeds of up to 0.63 m/s can be achieved. This is a clever alternative if other drive system can only be installed with high overhead or, in accordance with EN 81-70, a larger eleva tor car has to be installed.
The legendary gear systems
Clearly structured trade fair booth: gear systems and door (front), gearless and frequency converters (back), system parts (left) and home lift (right)
LiftEquip was present for the 11th time at the largest elevator trade fair interlift 2013 in Augsburg. Once again this year, interesting innovations awaited the visitors: the drum drive for elevators without counterweight; the gearless for "adjacent" with traction sheave in the shaft; the wide range of balanced components conforming with EN 81-1/2:A3; the h ome lift for retrofitting inside and outside of buildings. LiftEquip is consistently pointing the way as component supplier and solution provider.
The drum drive is back Even today, drum drive elevators are still in operation in numerous buildings. For these elevators and for older installations with small car floor areas, the drum drive using modern technology is a good modernisation solution. The fact that there is no counterweight enables better use of the shaft cross section and a larger elevator car can be installed. Even hydraulic systems can easily be converted to a frequencycontrolled drum drive. LiftEquip offers
From the small TW45 all the way to the mighty W332, LiftEquip offers a very wide range of gear systems, unsurpassed by any other provider. "Above all during modernisation, the optional horizontal or vertical design of smaller gear systems means they can be adapted to almost any spatial circumstances," says sales expert Thomas Bäzner. At LiftEquip, the continuous enhancement of the gear systems means that they are a genuine alternative to modern gearless drives from a technical and economic perspective. Their high efficiency enables energyefficient operation. The gear systems of the TW model series are optionally available with an emergency brake system conforming with EN 81-1:A3. The large gear systems of the W model series move high rated loads of up to 6 metric tonnes.
s t f i l e m o h o t s t n e n o p m o c m o r F t r o p e R l a c i n h c e T
Uniform colour assignment for all drives Trade fair visitors to Hall 1 found the well-known exhibitors in their usual places. In line with tradition, LiftEquip Elevator Components from Neuhausen near Stuttgart could be found on the right-hand side with a clearly structured booth layout. It was conspicuous and well received that all gear and gearless drives are now painted with an environmentally friendly and rugged water-based paint in a noble blackgrey. This has provided the high-quality drive components from LiftEquip with a uniform colour assignment, from the reliable drives all the way to the progressive frequency converters.
78
www.liftequip.com
The modern gear systems with high efficiency are still very much in demand, above all for modernisation
LIFT-REPORT
39. Jahrg. (2013)
Heft 6
23
Technical Report
Technical Report LiftEquip - From components to home lifts s t f i l e m o h o t s t n e n o p m o c m o r F t r o p e R l a c i n h c e T
The gearless range encounters substantial interest: filigree model series PMC145 (front) and strong Compact Gearless (left)
Gearless drives remain first choice Arranged in a circle were the impressively filigree gearless drives of the PMC145 model series in the construction sizes from "S" (rated load 275 kg / suspension 1:1) to "XL" (1000 kg / 2:1). On request, these and the larger PMC170 are available together w ith the modernisation solution ModKit MO61. This enables very simple conversion of existing elevators with gear systems to a gearless drive. The options range from suspension 1:1 up to 1000 kg / 1.0 m/s and/or in 2:1 up to 1000 kg / 1.6 m/s. Under the key words "Geared to Gearless", another modernisation solution with DAF210 and/or DAF270 was presented as a new product. The system is suitable for upward or downward rope departure and for the traction sheave in the shaft or in the machine room. In all cases, secure support in relation to the building, protected from vibration, is ensured. The highlight: existing circumstances such as wall openings, rope pulleys, safety gear frame and counterweight do not have to be changed. As could be expected, many expert visitors were very interested. Upwards, the range of products is rounded off by the Compact Gearless SC300/400 using synchronous technology.
Frequency converters from 5 to more than 50 kW LiftEquip offers a wide range of frequency converters for motor outputs of 5 to 50 kW or more, for asynchronous or synchronous drives. They are characterised by simple parameter input, quick initial operation and safe evacuation and maintenance. The modern
80
24
generations of converters in black housings are configured to conform with EN 81-1:A3 and do not require contactors, which makes them very quiet. In addition to many options, they include an integrated brake control, power filter, interface cards, as well as a display. Connection per plug&play makes commissioning very simple. The MFC model series has been extended to include the construction sizes 100R, 155R and 310R with nominal output power of up to 140 kVA. The devices of the MFR model series for synchronous drives have an integrated energy recovery unit and are available in the performance classes from 5.5 to 18.5 kW.
Solutions for all drive types with A3 conformity Under the key safety concept UCM (Unintended Car Movement), LiftEquip provides solutions in accordance with EN 81-1/2:A3 for all kinds of drives ranging from the hydraulic installation to the geared drive to the gearless elevator. A brochure provides a clearly arranged overview of which certified components can be used for each drive system. This can be seen at www. EN81-A3.com.
High-quality S8A comfort door with glass door panels and sturdy TW160 gear with emergency braking device
nents was exhibited on a large shelf within the main trade fair booth: safety gears, overspeed governors, buffers, guides and elevator car LED lighting system. Markus Bruckmeyer, Sales Manager for Germany: "These important components and many other small parts concerning every aspect of elevators can also be ordered directly from LiftEquip. Our customers appreciate this, as it rounds off our range of products perfectly."
New: Gulliver home lift To date, LiftEquip has aligned its offering to components and drive products for traction elevators. Brand new in the
The S8A / K8A comfort door for sophisticated applications On the other side of the trade fair booth, LiftEquip exhibited the S8A landing door for the matching K8A car door. Günter Stoll, Sales Manager for Export North / East: "This door series has been developed for deployment in high-quality elevator systems. The design is very solid and the frequencycontrolled door drive is very quiet. The incredibly wide range of version options enables adaptation of the door to virtually any customer requirement. This door series clearly stands out from the broad mass of standard doors." It was only possible to exhibit a few variants on the trade fair booth. The entire performance capability of the comfort door is shown in the new door brochure.
System components and small parts It was presented on a separate trade fair booth two years ago, but this year a small selection of system compo-
New product: Gulliver home lift in a free-standing shaft, ideal for retrofitting and setup indoors or outdoors. Picture: LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components
LIFT-REPORT
39. Jahrg. (2013)
Heft 6
Issue 09/2015
Technical Report
Technical Report LiftEquip - From components to home lifts range is the Gulliver home lift: a freestanding elevator with its own shaft and a travel height of up to 15 metres with a maximum of 5 landings. The system is configured in accordance with EN 81-41 and Machines Directive 2006/42/EC. The hydraulic drive enables a rated load of 300 or 400 kg with a speed of 0.15 m/s. Only 10 cm is required as the floor recess; alternatively, an access ramp can be installed. The shaft head height is only 2350 mm. The doors can be arranged on three sides. "Gulliver is suitable for setting up indoors and outdoors," explains
82
www.liftequip.com
Norbert Blum. "This makes Gulliver an ideal retrofit solution in the private and public sector. This is confirmed by many trade fair visitors. We are very excited about the way the market will develop."
Skil ls in development, production and system application What are the special features of LiftEquip and the offered products? Managing Director Andreas Hönnige provides some insight: "The products of LiftEquip have been developed in-
house and are made in Germany. They are configured with the extensive experience of a system provider and optimised in relation to one another. Our customers appreciate the ability of our salespeople to provide useful information alongside their commitment, also where special wishes may be involved. To ensure long-term customer loyalty, we attach high value to skilled consulting, and reliable service, all the way to rapid spare parts supply." On request, interested customers are very welcome to tour one of the largest production locations for elevators in Europe.
LIFT-REPORT
39. Jahrg. (2013)
s t f i l e m o h o t s t n e n o p m o c m o r F t r o p e R l a c i n h c e T
Heft 6
25
26
Issue 09/2015
Gears
TW- and W-Series s r a e G
www.liftequip.com
Product description
29
Performance Matrix Gears 1:1 / 2:1
30
TW45C
32
TW63B
34
TW130
36
TW160
38
W263C
40
W332C
42
Drum drives
44
Emergency Brake System NBS
45
Colouring for all Drives
84
27
Gears
TW- and W-Series
EN81-
20/ -50
Product Description s r a e G
All gear drives are designed with
-conform
Machine base frame
VVVF motors in B5 conguration with A series of base frames are availabexible coupling and as result provide
le in connection with the gear drives,
maximum travel comfort. Depending on your space requirements, these gear drives are available with a vertically or horizontally installed motor (TW160, W263C und W332C only horizontal). Pole-changing (AC2) motors are also optionally available for the geared machine TW63B. One- to three-stage worm gears ensure continuous smooth running. Tight production tolerances and the use of high quality materials preserve smooth running. Synthetic transmission oil ensures optimal lubrication and
e.g. with and without diverting pulleys,
high efciency.
Optimal adjustment to your lift
The hardened, low-wear traction sheave has a long service life.
Traction sheaves in all directions are
for 2:1 or 1:1 rope suspensions, in left or right designs and in general for downward traction sheaves. The rope distance dimension can be chosen exibly according to the circumstan ces on the spot as a result of suitable
Emergency brake system NBS
perforation patterns for the attachment
optional
of the drive and diverting pulley. The
TW45C to TW160: as single-circuit
base frame design left / right can be
spring-operated disc brake it permits
chosen irrespective of the left / right
upward braking and complies with EN
traction sheave.
81-1/9.10. Certication according to
The machines base frames are moun-
EN81-1: Amendment 3 is available.
ted on anti-vibration elements.
possible, but must be ordered as custom-build.
The service brake keeps the lift safe as dual-circuit disc brake in the Also optionally as Ex part TW45C and from the TW63B as dual- An extended traction sheave shaft with circuit external contracting shoe bra- wall bearing, vapour-proof shaft duct and the optional accompanying base ke, even if a pitch circle fails.
EN81 20/-50
Our drives meet all requirements with regard to the above standards, in particular the approval of safety brakes and the rope guard.
frame permit the use of standard machines for Ex areas.
28
Issue 09/2015
Gears
TW- and W-Series Product Description
TW45C up to 1000 kg*
• Horizontal/vertical version • Right or left hand • Emergency braking system optional
TW160 up to 4000 kg*
• Horizontal version • Right or left hand • Emergency braking system optiona l
TW63B up to 2000 kg*
• Horizontal/vertical version • Right or left hand • Emergency braking system optiona l • pole changing
W263C up to 5000 kg*
• Horizontal version • Right or left hand • Worm gear with combined plained bearings
TW130 up to 3500 kg*
s r a e G
• Horizontal/vertical version • Right or left hand • Emergency braking system optiona l • pole changing
W332C up to 6000 kg*
• Horizontal version • Right or left hand • Worm gear with combined plained bearings
*Representation of the drives: horizontal right, 2:1 suspension
www.liftequip.com
29
Gears
TW- and W-Series Performance Matrix Gears 1:1 s r a e G
Travel heigh t 25 m
Operating speed 0,63 m/s
0,8 m/s
1 m/s
1,2 m/s
1,6 m/s
2 m/s
Q= 450kg F= 950kg
TW45C, 46:1, TS440 TW45C,46:1,TS520
*TW45C,32:1,TS440 TW45C,32:1,TS590
TW45C, 41:2, TS440 TW63B, 48:2, TS 675
2726 kJ/h, 3,8 kW 6,5 A / 10,1 A 1258 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
3366 kJ/h, 3,8 kW 8,3 A / 12,3 A 1352 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
3630 kJ/h, 3.8 kW 8,9 A / 13,9 A 1389 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
4872 kJ/h, 5,2 kW 12,9 A / 21,5 A 1243 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
5513 kJ/h, 7 kW 13,8A / 21,5 A 1424 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
Q= 630kg F= 1000kg
TW45C, 32:1,TS360
TW45C, 32:1,TS440
TW45C, 32:1,TS440
TW45C, 41:2, TS360 TW63B, 48:2, TS 590 TW63B, 48:2, TS 675
3595 kJ/h, 3,6 kW 8,6 A / 13,3 A 1070 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
4593 kJ/h, 4,6 kW 12,8 A / 19 A 1111 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
5310 kJ/h, 7,0 kW 12,9 A / 17,9 A 1389 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
5686 kJ/h, 7,0 kW 13,7 A / 20 A 1305 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
Q= 800kg F=1050kg
TW45C,32:1,TS320
TW45C,32:1,TS320
*TW63B, 33:1, TS 510 *TW63B, 33:1, TS 510 TW63B, 48:2, TS 510 TW63B, 43:3, TS 450
4407 kJ/h, 5,0 kW 11,7 A / 17,2 A 1203 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
5176 kJ/h, 7,0 kW 12,8 A / 15,2 A 1528 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
6305 kJ/h, 6,9 kW 14,6 A / 22,5 A 1236 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
Q= 1000kg F= 1200kg
TW63B, 48:1, TS 450 TW63B, 33:1, TS 450 TW63B, 33:1, TS 450 TW63B, 48:2, TS 450 TW130, 45:2,TS 540
TW130, 45:2, TS 640
5277 kJ/h, 7 kW 12,5 A / 18 A 1283 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
15039 kJ/h, 20,5 kW 38,2 A / 57 A 1343 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
Q= 1200kg F= 1400kg
*TW130, 52:1, TS 540 TW130, 52:1, TS 640 TW130, 42:1, TS 640 TW130, 35:1, TS 640 TW130, 45:2, TS 540 TW130, 45:2, TS 640
Q= 1600kg F= 1800kg
TW130, 52:1, TS 540 TW130, 42:1, TS 540 TW130, 35:1, TS 540 TW130, 35:1, TS 540 TW130, 45:2, TS 540 TW160, 45:2,TS 640
Q= 1800kg F= 2000kg
TW130, 52:1, TS 540 TW130, 42:1, TS 540 TW130, 35:1, TS 540 TW1301, 45:2, TS 540 TW160, 51:2, TS 640 *TW160, 45:2, TS 640
Q= 2000kg F= 2200kg
TW130, 42:1, TS 540 TW130, 35:1, TS 540 TW160, 41:1, TS 640 TW160, 35:1, TS 640 TW160, 51:2, TS640
W263C, 41:2, TS 640
11336 kJ/h, 18,5 kW 24,3 A / 33,6 A 936 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
13544 kJ/h, 18,5 kW 30 A / 39,7 A 990 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
31384 kJ/h, 36,2 kW 73,7 A / 113,2 A 1224 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
Q= 2200kg F= 2400kg
TW160, 50:1, TS640
TW160, 50:1, TS 640 TW160, 41:1, TS 640 TW160, 35:1, TS 640 W263C, 41:2, TS 540 W263C, 41:2, TS 540
12777 kJ/h, 18,5 kW 26,9 A / 36,6 A 940 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
14737 kJ/h, 15,3 kW 36,4 A / 51,1 A 1194 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
27506 kJ/h, 31,1 kW 70,3 A / 107,1 A 1160 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
31658 kJ/h, 42,0 kW 80,6 A / 130,9 A 1450 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
Q= 2400kg F= 2600kg
TW160, 50:1, TS 640 TW160, 41:1, TS 640 TW160, 35:1, TS 640 W263C, 40:1, TS640 W263C,41:2,TS540
W332C, 46:2,TS700
13885 kJ/h, 18,5 kW 29,2 A / 39,2 A 940 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
16645 kJ/h, 18,5 kW 36,1 A / 46,9 A 979 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
36143 kJ/h, 45,4 kW 93,6 A / 176,7 A 1255 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
Q= 2600kg F= 2800kg
W332C, 63:1,TS640
W263C, 40:1, TS 540 W263C, 40:1, TS 540 W332C, 47:1, TS 800 W332C, 59:2, TS 700 *W332C, 46:2,TS640
16046 kJ/h, 26,1 kW 38,3 A / 87,4 A 1184 1/min MFC 20-60 V1
18431 kJ/h, 24,9 kW 46,5 A / 70,5 A 1132 1/min MFC 20-48 V1
20833 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 52,6 A / 75,4 A 1415 1/min MFC 20-60 V1
26872 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 65,1 A / 121 A 1347 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
34660 kJ/h, 42 kW 82 A / 166,7 A 1288 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
Q= 2800kg F= 3000kg
*W332C, 63:1,TS640 W332C, 63:1,TS700
W332C, 47:1,TS640
W332C, 47:1,TS800
W332C, 59:2, TS 700 W332C, 46:2, TS 640
16622 kJ/h, 26,1 kW 37,9 A / 87,9 A 1184 1/min MFC 20-60 V1
23550 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 58,1 A / 101,9 A 1403 1/min MFC 20-60 V1
28833 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 69,7 A / 126,6 A 1347 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
37186 kJ/h, 42 kW 87,8 A / 175,8 A 1288 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
7099 kJ/h, 10,4 kW 17 A / 26,6 A 1159 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1 9737 kJ/h, 10,4 kW 23,9 A / 34,2 A 1159 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1 10891 kJ/h, 10,4 kW 26,6 A / 37,4 A 1159 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
The calculations are examples, alterations are possible
30
40 m
6370 kJ/h, 9 kW 20,4 A / 30,5 A 1121 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1 9179 kJ/h, 11,1 kW 21,7 A / 33 A 1241 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1 10563 kJ/h, 15,2 kW 26,8 A / 39,2 A 1188 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1 11791 kJ/h, 15,2 kW 29,9 A / 43 A 1188 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
19808 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 47,9 A / 101,2 A 1375 1/min MFC 20-60 V1
7422 kJ/h, 10 kW 22,9 A / 32,3 A 1401 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1 10762 kJ/h, 11,2 kW 25,5 A / 38,5 A 1253 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1 12597 kJ/h, 15,8 kW 31,3 A / 46,1 A 1238 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1 14086 kJ/h, 15,8 kW 35 A / 50,7 A 1238 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1 16063 kJ/h, 20,1 kW 39,1 A / 57,6 A 1225 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1 17637 kJ/h, 20,1 kW 42,9 A / 62,4 A 1224 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1 18262 kJ/h, 23,0 kW 50,5 A / 71,2 A 1045 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1
* 50% compensation of rated load Machine type, Ratio, TS-Ø [mm] Heat dissipated [kJ/h], Motor perf. [kW] at RPM Req. motor current [A] / Req. start up current [A] Motor RPM [1/min], (NBS possible) Inverter type.
6692 kJ/h, 10 kW 20,5 A / 29,5 A 1483 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1 8939 kJ/h, 9,8 kW 27 A /42,4 A 1222 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1 11494 kJ/h, 16,0 kW 28,6 A / 43,9 A 1253 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1 14244 kJ/h, 20,5 kW 36,9 A / 49,9 A 1485 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1 17041 kJ/h, 18,5 kW 38,3 A / 53,3 A 955 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1 18412 kJ/h, 20,5 kW 44,7 A / 66,8 A 1253 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1 18903 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 46,7 A / 70 A 1253 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1 22661 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 57,3 A / 82 A 1432 1/min MFC 20-60 V1
7779 kJ/h, 9,9 kW 23,5 A / 40,2 A 1243 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1 8914 kJ/h, 10 kW 27,2 A / 39 A 1438 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1 12198 kJ/h, 16 kW 30,8 A / 46,8 A 1273 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1 14917 kJ/h, 20,5 kW 37,4 A / 56,4 A 1273 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1 18007 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 45,8 A / 68,2 A 1273 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1 20881 kJ/h, 26,8 kW 52,9 A / 78,8 A 1218 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1 23266 kJ/h, 26,8 kW 59 A / 87 A 1217 1/min, (NBS) MFC20-60 V1
29694 kJ/h, 34,3 kW 71,3 A / 107,9 A 1160 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
7091 kJ/h, 10 kW 22,1 A / 38,8 A 1358 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1 9499 kJ/h, 13,0 kW 25,7 A / 40,8 A 1358 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1 11005 kJ/h, 12,7 kW 29,3 A / 46,5 A 1217 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
18395 kJ/h, 20,5 kW 46,8 A / 67,6 A 1343 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1 22441 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 57,3 A / 81,8 A 1343 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1 23805 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 59,8 A / 87,9 A 1343 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1
36445 kJ/h, 45,4 kW 95,3 A / 173,6 A 1373 1/min MFC 20-105 V1 38059 kJ/h, 45,4 kW 97,2 A / 178,3 A 1373 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
Q = Rated load, F = Maximum mass of car, TS = Traction sheave diameter, (NBS) = Compatible with emergency brake system. 1) stronger brake
Issue 09/2015
Gears
TW- and W-Series Performance Matrix Gears 2:1 Travel heig ht 25 m
40 m
Operating speed 0,63 m/s
0,8 m/s
1 m/s
1,2 m/s
1,6 m/s
Q= 630kg F= 1000kg
TW45C, 41:2, TS 440 3234 kJ/h, 3,8 kW 7,9 A / 12,3 A 1121 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
TW45C, 41:2, TS 440 3969 kJ/h, 5,2 kW 11 A / 14,5 A 1424 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
TW45C, 41:2, TS 590 5039 kJ/h, 7 kW 12,4 A / 17,8 A 1327 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
TW45C, 40:3, TS440 5555 kJ/h, 7 kW 13,8 A / 19,7 A 1389 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
TW63B, 43:3, TS 675 8150 kJ/h, 10 kW 25,1 A / 40,4 A 1298 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
Q= 1000kg F= 1500kg
TW45C, 32:1, TS 520 5388 kJ/h, 7 kW 13,4 A / 16,1 A 1481 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
TW45C, 40:3, TS 360 5956 kJ/h, 6,3 kW 15,8 A / 22,2 A 1132 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
*TW45C, 40:3,TS 360 6597 kJ/h, 7 kW 15,9 A / 21,9 A 1415 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
TW63B, 43:3, TS 510 9060 kJ/h, 10 kW 27,7 A / 43,4 A 1288 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
*TW63B, 43:3, TS 675 11370 kJ/h, 13 kW 30,2 A / 47,9 A 1298 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
Q= 1600kg F= 1800kg
TW63B, 33:1, TS 590 7744 kJ/h, 10 kW 23,7 A / 31,8 A 1346 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW63B, 48:2, TS 590 9716 kJ/h, 12,9 kW 25,6 A / 37,4 A 1243 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW63B, 43:3, TS 450 11577 kJ/h, 12,7 kW 31,1 A / 45,1 A 1217 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW130, 43:3, TS 540 14134 kJ/h, 15,6 kW 35,9 A / 53,4 A 1217 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW130, 43:3, TS 640 17993 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 46,8 A / 65,6 A 1369 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
Q= 2000kg F= 2200kg
TW63B, 48:2, TS 450 9333 kJ/h, 10 kW 28 A / 38,1 A 1283 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW130, 45:2, TS540 11736 kJ/h, 16 kW 29,3 A / 42,1 A 1273 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
*TW130, 45:2, TS640 13668 kJ/h, 16 kW 34 A / 48,1 A 1343 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW130, 43:3, TS 540 17425 kJ/h, 20 kW 43,9 A / 65,2 A 1217 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW 1301, 43:3, TS 640 21916 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 56,8 A / 77,8 A 1369 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1
Q= 2500kg F= 2500kg
TW130, 35:1, TS 640 12048 kJ/h, 16 kW 30,2 A / 40,8 A 1316 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW130, 45:2, TS 540 14447 kJ/h, 16 kW 36 A / 49,4 A 1273 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW130, 45:2, TS 640 17805 kJ/h, 20,5 kW 44,6 A / 60,4 A 1343 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
*TW1301, 43:3, TS 540 TW 1301, 43:3, TS 540 18859 kJ/h, 26,8 kW 25128 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 47,2 A / 71,3 A 67 A / 80,3 A 1217 1/min, (NBS) 1622 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1 MFC 20-105 V1
Q= 3000kg F= 2800kg
TW130, 35:1, TS 640 14468 kJ/h, 16 kW 36,2 A / 47 A 1316 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW130, 45:2, TS 540 17357 kJ/h, 20,5kW 42,8 A / 58,5 A 1273 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW130, 45:2, TS 540 19078 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 50,9 A / 61,1 A 1592 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1
TW1301, 43:3, TS 540 23444 kJ/h, 32,6 kW 59,5 A / 86,1 A 1217 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1
TW160, 41:3, TS 640 31911 kJ/h, 42 kW 79,4 A / 129 A 1305 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-105 V1
Q= 3500kg F= 3200kg
TW130, 45:2, TS 540 16973 kJ/h, 18,5 kW 38,6 A / 46,4 A 1003 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW160, 57:2, TS 640 19171 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 48,2 A / 63,6 A 1361 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW160, 45:2, TS 640 23354 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 58,8 A / 77,4 A 1343 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1
TW160, 45:2, TS 640 26088 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 68,6 A / 81,8 A 1611 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-105 V1
*W 332C, 57:3, TS 800 36107 kJ/h, 45,4 kW 97,9 A / 179,1 A 1452 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
Q= 4000kg F= 3500kg
TW160, 35:1, TS 640 18719 kJ/h, 20,5 kW 45,8 A / 59,2 A 1316 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW160, 51:2, TS 640 22169 kJ/h, 26,8 kW 55,4 A / 75 A 1218 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1
TW160, 45:2, TS 640 25900 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 64,7 A / 85,7 A 1343 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-105 V1
W263C, 41:2, TS 640 34038 kJ/h, 42 kW 86,6 A / 131,6 A 1468 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
Q= 4500kg F= 4000kg
TW160, 35:1, TS 640 19722 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 49,2 A / 64,3 A 1316 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
W263C, 50:2, TS 540 25747 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 64,8 A / 87,9 A 1415 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
W263C, 41:2, TS 540 31046 kJ/h, 42 kW 78 A / 120 A 1450 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
*W 332C,57:3,TS640 36192 kJ/h, 42 kW 86,3 A / 172,4 A 1361 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
Q= 5000kg F= 4500kg
W263C, 50:2, TS 540 24781 kJ/h, 29,9 kW 63,4 A / 88,6 A 1114 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
W263C 41:2, TS 540 30548 kJ/h, 34,3 kW 72,9 A / 101,1 A 1160 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
W332C, 46:2,TS640 35725 kJ/h, 45,4 kW 95,8 A / 177,5 A 1373 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
Q= 5500kg F= 5000kg
W332C, 47:1, TS 800 28731 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 70,8 A / 123,9 A 1414 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
W332C, 59:2, TS 640 34694 kJ/h, 42 kW 85 A / 163,1 A 1409 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
*W332C, 46:2,TS640 37993 kJ/h, 45,4 kW 98,7 A / 176,3 A 1373 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
W332C, 47:1, TS800 31916 kJ/h, 37 kW 74,6 A / 124,8 A 1414 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
W332C, 59:2, TS640 36111 kJ/h, 45,4 kW 97 A / 175,3 A 1409 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
Q= 6000kg F= 5500kg
s r a e G
* 50% compensation of rated load Machine type, Ratio, TS-Ø [mm] Heat dissipated [kJ/h], Motor perf. [kW] at RPM Req. motor current [A] / Req. start up current [A] Motor RPM [1/min], (NBS possible) Inverter type. Q = Rated load, F = Maximum mass of car, TS = Traction sheave d iameter, (NBS) = Compatible with emergency brake system. 1) stronger brake
The calculations are examples, alterations are possible
www.liftequip.com
31
TW-Drives
TW45C
With NBS this geared machine is conform to EN81-A3
The ideal solution f or light loads • VVVF-motor (5,2 and 7 kW) controlled accurately • Emergency braking system NBS: braking upwards, EN81-1/9.10, optional • Brake monitoring switch, manual brake release • Low-wear traction sheave, available in Ø 320, 360, 440, 520 or 590 mm • Gear, motor, traction sheave: approx. 250 kg Special designs are possible
s r a e G
TW45C horizontal right
Technical Data Gear type Axle distance Load on shaft (Ft) Ratios Oil lling
Type of oil Backlash Weight Type of protection - Motor Hand wheel Actual Value Sensor (standard) Actual Value Sensor (special) Operational Brake Type Braking Torque Operational Voltage Traction Sheave Diameter Traction Sheave Rim width max. Numerbrs of grooves (z x d) Weight
TW45C 120
mm kN
≤ 30 46:1 / 32:1 / 41:2 / 40:3
L
5,5 synthetic gear oil 0,03 - 0,07 ca. 105 IP54 D270 (plastic) WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL WDG100-38-1024 HTL WDG100-38-1024 Sinus/Cosinus
° kg mm
Robastop RSZ 60 2 x 50 180 - overexitation // 90 - retentive voltage
Nm VDC mm mm
kg
320 102
360 77
7x8
5x8
30
25
440 7 x 8 / 6 x 10 6 x 11 45
520 590 115 7 x 8 / 6 x 10 6 x 11 / 5 x 12 55 60
Subject to modications
32
Issue 09/2015
TW-Drives
TW45C s r a e G
PERFORMANCE DATA
Rated Load Q [kg]
Operational Speed v [m/s]
Suspension r
320 450 630 900 1000 1300
0,63 - 1,20 0,5 - 1,25 0,5 - 1,0 0,4 - 0,63 0,4 - 1,0 0,4
1:1 1:1 1:1 2:1 2:1 2:1
TW45C on machine base frame
Motor position horizontal (pictured with traction sheave on left and with emergency brake system NBS, optional) Brake release lever (plug-in type
Bolt connection 4xM16
Motor position vertical (pictured with traction sheave on left)
DT = 320 WT = 102
360 77
440 115
* Dimensions applicable to D T = 360 mm
520 115
590 115
Bolt connection 4xM16 Brake release lever (plug-in type t ype))
www.liftequip.com
33
TW-Drives
TW63B
With NBS this geared machine is conform to EN81-A3
The machine for middle loads • VVVF-motor (5,2 up to 13 kW) controlled accurately • Emergency braking system NBS: braking upwards, EN81-1/9.10, optional • Brake monitoring onitoring switch, ma manual nual brake release • Traction Traction sheave in shaft with extended traction traction sheave shaft and pedestal bearing (SA 9) • Gear according according to ATEX • Brake Brake magnets, Ex-proof Ex-proof (SA (SA 15) • Low-wear traction traction sheave, sheave, available available in Ø 450, 450, 510, 520, 590 or 675 mm • Gear, Gear, motor, traction traction sheave: approx. 350 kg Special designs are possible
s r a e G
TW63B horizontal right
Technical Data Gear type Axle distance Load on shaft (Ft) Ratios Oil lling
Type of oil Backlash Weight Motor Hand wheel Actual Value Sensor (standard) Actual Value Sensor (special)
TW63B 155
mm kN
≤ 43 (rope departure direction downwards) 54:1 / 48:1 / 33:1 / 48:2 / 43:3
L
vertical: ca.11 / horizontal: ca. 9
° kg pole changing ywheel rim
WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL without
Operational Brake Ty Type Braking Brakin g Torque Operational Voltage Traction Sheave Diameter Traction Sheave Rim width max. Numerbrs of grooves (z x d) We Weight
synthetic gear oil 0,025 - 0,07 ca. 190 frequency-controlled IP54 D270 (plastic)
TW63B max. 2 x 90 180 - overexitation // 90 - retentive voltage
Nm VDC mm mm
450 132 8x8 7 x 10/11
kg
WDG100-38-1024 HTL WDG100-38-1024 Sin/Cos
50
510 132 8x8 7 x 10/11 6 x 12 60
520 110 5 x 13 50
590 132 8x8 7 x 10/11 6 x 12
675 96 6x8 5 x 10/11 4 x 12 70
Subject to modications
34
Issue 09/2015
TW-Drives
TW63B s r a e G
PERFORMANCE DATA
Rated Load Q [kg]
Operational Speed v [m/s]
Suspension r
800 1000 1000 1600 2000
0,63 - 2,0 0,63 - 1,2 0,4 - 1,6 0,4 - 1,2 0,4 - 0,63
1:1 1:1 2:1 2:1 2:1
TW63B, vertical left hand on machine base frame down beside
1 Machine centre of gravity 2 Mount of machine on machine base frame 3 Operation lever for manual brake release (plug-in) kproj. = see product catalog catalog
www.liftequip.com
35
TW-Drives
TW130 With NBS this geared machine is conform to EN81-A3
The ideal solution for higher loads • VVVF-motor (11 up to 42 kW) controlled accurately • Emergency braking system NBS, optional • Brake monitoring switch, manual brake release • Traction sheave sheave in shaft with extended traction traction sheave shaft and pedestal bearing (SA 9) • Part-Ex proof: wall bearing with vapour-proof shaft duct, extended drive shaft and suitable machine base frame (SA4) • Reinforced machine mounting for rope pull resultant - horizontal or vertical pointing upwards (SA1) • Additi Additiona onall terminal terminal block for intermediate intermediate term terminal inal connection (SA12) • Gear according to ATEX • Brake magnets, Ex-proof (SA 15) • Low-wear traction sheave, available in Ø 540, 640, 720 or 900 mm • Gear, Gear, motor, traction traction sheave: approx. 560 kg Special designs are possible
s r a e G
TW130 horizontal right
Technical Data Gear type Axle distance Load on shaft (Ft) Ratios Oil lling
Type of oil Backlash Weight Motor Motor Type of protection - Motor Hand wheel Actual Value Sensor (standard) Actual Value Sensor (special)
TW130 191
mm kN
≤ 77 (rope departure direction downwards) 52:1 / 42:1 / 35:1 / 45:2 / 43:3
L
vertical: ca. 25 / horizontal: ca. 20
° kg
synthetic gear oil 0,02 - 0,06 430 frequency-controlled IP 21 D270 / 360 (plastic)
WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL WDG100-38-1024 HTL WDG100-38-1024 Sin/Cos
Operational brake Type Braking Torque Operational Voltage Traction Sheave Diameter Traction Sheave Rim width max. Numerbrs of grooves (z x d) Weight
IP 55 D270 / 360 (plastic)
TW130 max. 2 x 125 / max. 2 x 200 max. 2 x 125 180 - overexitation // 90 - retentive voltage
Nm V DC mm mm
540
640
720 150
5 x 16 7 x 12/13, 8 x 10/11, 10 x 8, 9 x 9 kg
900
75
90
140
6 x 12/13, 7 x 10/11 150
Subject to modications
36
Issue 09/2015
TW-Drives
TW130 s r a e G
PERFORMANCE DATA
Rated Load Q [kg]
Operational Speed v [m/s]
Suspension r
1000 1300 1600 1300 2200 3000
0,63 - 2,5 0,63 - 2,5 0,63 - 1,0 0,5 - 2,0 0,5 - 1,75 0,5 - 0,8
1:1 1:1 1:1 2:1 2:1 2:1
TW130 on machine base frame
kproj. = see product catalog catalog
www.liftequip.com
37
TW-Drives
TW160
With NBS this geared machine is conform to EN81-A3
The cart horse for higher loads • VVF-motor VVF-motor (11 up to 42 kW) controll controlled ed accurately • Emergency braking system NBS: braking upwards, EN81-1/9.10, optional • Brake monitoring switch, manual brake release • Traction sheave sheave in shaft with extended traction traction sheave shaft and pedestal bearing (SA 9) • Part-Ex proof: wall bearing with vapour-proof shaft duct, extended drive shaft and suitable machine base frame (SA4) • Gear according to ATEX • Brake magnets, Ex-proof (SA 15) • Low-wear traction sheave, available in Ø 640, 720 or 800 mm • Gear, Gear, motor, traction traction sheave: approx. 925 kg Special designs are possible
s r a e G
TW160 horizontal right
Technical Data Gear type Axle distance Load on shaft (Ft) Ratios Oil lling
Type of oil Backlash Weight Motor Type of protection - Motor Hand wheel Actual Value Sensor (standard) Actual Value Sensor (special) Operational Brake Type Braking Torque Operational Voltage Trachtion Sheave Type Diameter Traction Sheave Rim width max. Numerbrs of grooves (z x d) We Weight
TW160 225
mm kN
≤ 97 (rope departure direction downwards) 50:1 / 42:1 / 35:1 / 57:2 / 51:2 / 41:3
L
ca. 16,5 synthetic gear oil 0,015 - 0,06 ca. 540 frequency-controlled IP21 D360 (plastic)
° kg
IP55
WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL WDG100-38-1024 HTL WDG100-38-1024 Sin/Cos
TW160 max. 2 x 245 180 - overexitation // 90 - retentive voltage
Nm V DC
mm mm
640
Standard 720 180
800
640
8 x 13, 7 x 16 kg
140
160
SA 4/9 720 160
800
7 x 13, 6 x 16 190
130
150
180
Subject to modications
38
Issue 09/2015
TW-Drives
TW160 s r a e G
PERFORMANCE DATA
Rated Load Q [kg]
Operational Speed v [m/s]
Suspension r
1800 2000 2500 3000 3500
0,8 - 2,0 0,8 - 1,2 0,63 - 1,6 0,63 - 1,2 0,63 - 1,0
1:1 1:1 2:1 2:1 2:1
TW160 on machine base frame
kproj. = see product catalog
www.liftequip.com
39
W-Drives
W263C For big travel heights & high loads • VVVF-motor (16 up tp 75 kW) controlled accurately • Horizontal rope departure (SA1) • Brake monitoring switch, manual brake release • Traction sheave in shaft with extended traction sheave shaft and pedestal bearing (SA 9) • Part-Ex proof: wall bearing with vapour-proof shaft duct, extended drive shaft and suitable machine base frame (SA4) • Reinforced traction sheave shaft (SA13) • Gear according to ATEX • Brake magnets, Ex-proof (SA 15) • Double safety by dual-circuit shoe brake • Low-wear traction sheave, available in Ø 540, 640, 700, 740 or 800 mm • Gear, motor, traction sheave: approx. 1250 kg Special designs are possible
s r a e G
W263C horizontal right
Technical Data Gear type Axle distance Load on shaft (Ft) Ratios Oil lling
Type of oil Backlash Weight Motor Type Type of protection - Motor handwheel Actual Value Sensor (standard) Actual Value Sensor (special) Operational Brake Type Braking Torque Operational Voltage Traction Sheave Type Diameter Traction Sheave Rim width max. Numerbrs of grooves (z x d)
Weight (incl. hub)
W263C 263
mm kN
≤ 84 (rope departure direction downwards) 49:1 / 40:1 / 60:2 / 50:2 / 41:2
L
ca. 20
synthetic gear oil 0,021 - 0,05 1250 frequency-controlled DTE / DTL / 1LA6 IP23 IP55 D360 (plastic) WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL WDG100-38-1024 HTL / WDG100-38-1024 Sin/Cos
° kg
W263C max. 2 x 320
Nm VDC
mm mm
1180 - overexitation // 90 - retentive voltage
540 160
160
7x13 6x16 kg
125
150
Standard / SA 9 / SA 4 640 700 740 800 180 215 180 215 160 215 160 215 8 x 10/11 8x13 8x13 7x13 8x13 7x13 8x13 7x16 8x16 7x16 8x16 6x16 8x16 6x16 8x16 5x18 7x18 5x18 7x18 160 180 185 210 195 230 225 265
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten
40
Issue 09/2015
W-Drives
W263C s r a e G
PERFORMANCE DATA
Rated Load Q [kg]
Operational Speed v [m/s]
Suspension r
2000 2200 3500 4000 4500
0,8 - 2,0 0,8 - 1,2 0,63 - 1,2 0,63 - 1,0 0,63 - 1,0
1:1 1:1 2:1 2:1
W263C horizontal left hand
2:1
kproj. = see product catalog
www.liftequip.com
41
W-Drives
W332C The well proven for big loads • VVVF-motor (16 up to 75 kW) controlled accurately • Horizontal rope departure (SA1) • Brake monitoring switch, manual brake release • Traction sheave in shaft with extended traction sheave shaft and pedestal bearing (SA 9) • Part-Ex proof: wall bearing with vapour-proof shaft duct, extended drive shaft and suitable machine base frame (SA4) • Gear according to ATEX • Brake magnets, Ex-proof (SA 15) • Double safety by dual-circuit shoe brake • Low-wear traction sheave, available in Ø 640, 700, 740 or 800 mm • Gear, motor, traction sheave: approx. 1700 kg Special designs are possible
s r a e G
W332C horizontal right
Technical Data Gear type Axle distance Load on shaft (Ft) Ratios Oil lling
Type of oil Backlash Weight Motor Type Type of protection - Motor handwheel Actual Value Sensor (standard) Actual Value Sensor (special) Operational Brake Type Braking Torque Operational Voltage Traction Sheave Type Diameter Traction Sheave Rim width max. Numerbrs of grooves (z x d)
Weight (incl. hub)
W332C 332
mm kN
≤ 155 (rope departure direction downwards) 63:1 / 47:1 / 59:2 / 46:2 / 57:3
L
ca. 33 synthetic gear oil 0,022 - 0,04 1700 frequency controlled DTE / DTL / 1LA6 IP23 IP55 D360 (plastic) WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL WDG100-38-1024 HTL / WDG100-38-1024 Sin/Cos
° kg
W332C max. 2 x 625
Nm VDC
mm mm
kg
180 - overexitation // 90 - retentive voltage
160
640 180
7x13 6x16
8x13 7x16 8x16
150
160
215
180
Standard / SA 9 / SA 4 700 740 180 215 160 215 8 x 10/11 8x13 7x13 8x13 7x16 8x16 6x16 8x16 5x18 7x18 185 210 195 230
800 160
215
7x13 6x16 5x18 225
8x13 8x16 7x18 265
Subject to modications
42
Issue 09/2015
W-Drives
W332C s r a e G
PERFORMANCE DATA
Rated Load Q [kg]
Operational Speed v [m/s]
Suspension r
2800 3200 4500 5500 6000
0,63 - 1,6 0,63 - 1,2 0,4 - 1,2 0,4 - 1,0 0,4 - 0,6
1:1 1:1 2:1 2:1 2:1
W332C horizontal left hand
kproj. = see product catalog
www.liftequip.com
43
Drum Drives
Drum Drives s r a e G
TW130 incl. drum
Techni cal Data Rated load max. Q [kg] Car weight max. F [kg] Total load F+Q [kg] Rated speed [m/s]
450 300 750 0,5
525 400 925 0,63
800 550 1350 0,5
Suspension
800 550 1350 0,63
1000 700 1700 0,5
1000 700 1700 0,63
1200 800 2000 0,63
1:1
12 TW130
Travel height max. [m]
Machine type Ratio
TW63B 48:1
33:1
42:1
35:1
50:1
41:1
35:1
Drum diameter [mm] Drum length [mm]
360 240
360 265
450 300
520 300
520 300
520 300
8 1850 6,5 14,4
9 2615 9,3 25,5
10 3185 11,8 26,8
450 300 2 11 4183 14,5 44,5
11 4232 14,7 46,0
12 5483 18,1 41,2
13 6623 22,2 52,4
Number of ropes Rope diameter [mm] Dissipated heat [kJ/h] Motor output [kW] Motor current [A]
TW160
For higher loads the W-series is available on request
MODERN TECHNOLOGY „Made in Germany“ FOR THE FIRST GENERATION OF ELEVATORS Also nowadays this kind of machines are used in many buildings. For providing their service in future we offer our TW-series* for a smooth operation of your elevator. The car is directly mounted on the rope and the drive coils the ropes on the drum. The non-use of counterweights saves space and the whole shaft cross section can be used for the cabin. Therefore existing hydraulic elevators and rope elevators in limited space areas can be modernised easily. Our whole range of options, for example emergency brake system (NBS), Ex-protection or vertical motors) is available for you. If you cannot nd the suitable machine in the matrix above, please contact us, together we will nd a solution for higher loads or
special applications.
TW63B incl. druml
Requirements of the standard EN 81-1:
- Minimum 2 cables which are wound one layer - D / d (Drum/Rope):> 40 - Rope diameter: ≥ 8 mm - Rope safety:> 12
- Speed max. 0.63 m/s
44
Issue 09/2015
Emergency Brake System NBS
Emergency Brake System NBS s r a e G
Space saving, simple, cost-
effective Certied and type approved according to EN 81-1:A3
Control unit (mounting on machine room wall or in control cabinet)
Control System
We provide you with a well thought out and calculated package of solutions: Machine with emer gency brake, overspeed governor including a switch for overspeed and a separate control-unit. Together, those components form a closed and operable system. This systemic solution spares you time consuming self-made constructions bearing unforeseeable costs. Compact Design
Our emergency brake is mounted on the drive shaft vis-à-vis the traction sheave: A conguration, which offers you a space saving solution. Easy Conversion To modernize your lift installation the addition of Additional switch at overspeed governor
the following components to the drive sufces: an additional safety switch at the overspeed governor and a separate control unit with a voltage
Terminal box for inte rmediate con trol -Brake port -Ventilation monitoring -Temperature monitoring Emergency Brake NBS
supply for wall-mounted installation in the machine room. Continuous Availability The emergency brake system is optionally availa-
Motor
ble for the following geared drives: TW 45C, T W63B, TW130, TW160.
Technical Data Machine TW 45C TW 63B TW 130 TW 160
Rated Load Q [kg]*
Suspension r
Brake Torque [Nm]
500 / 1000 1125 / 2100 1800 / 3500 2200 / 4750
1:1 / 2 :1
1200 2200 4000 5500
1:1 / 2 :1 1:1 / 2 :1 1:1 / 2 :1
* maximum values depending on speed v
www.liftequip.com
45
46
Issue 09/2015
Mini-Gearless
PMC- / DAF-Series s s e l r a e G
www.liftequip.com
PMC - DAF Product Description
48
Performance Matrix
49
PMC125 S / M
50
PMC145-2 S/XS
51
PMC145-2 M/XM
52
PMC145-2 L/XL
53
PMC145-2 M/L with TS Ø 320
54
PMC170 S - XL
55
DAF210 M / L
56
DAF270 S / M / L / XL
58
Machine Base Frame for PMC - Gearless
62
Machine Base Frame for DAF - Gearless
63
Modernisation solution 'Geard to Gearless'
64
Colouring for all Drives
84
47
Mini-Gearless
PMC - DAF
EN81-
20/ -50
Product Description s s e l r a e G
Efcient
With our synchronous gearless series (PMC and DAF) one of the most compact drives is available
-conform
A design version of the brake with a manual venting lever is possible. Another option of the PMC series is a handwheel extension.
Safe
A safety brake is used in all gearless drives available from LiftEquip, which is licensed as type-tested safety brake against excessive speed upwards in accordance with EN81-1/9.10. EN 81-A3 compliant. Rope guard acc. to EN 81-77 up to earthquake category 3. Flexible
The drives can be used both in the shaft (MRL) as well as in the machine room. The arrangement can be congured in 1:1 and 2:1 suspension.
48
Compact The compact design is a signicant
for deployment in energy efcient
modernisation / or system solutions, ideally suited for energy recovery. These series stand out as excellent value for money. Excellent efciencies with low energy consumption.
life, low vibrations and an extremely smooth running drive for your lift.
Complete
We can provide you with the matc-
advantage for using the drives in your systems.
hing frequency inverter (MFR: with integrated power regeneration; MFC:
Reliable
with braking resistor) in each case for our gearless drives, which feature all of the drive parameters required. In this way we guarantee fast, safe start-up. Optionally in plug&play version with integrated brake control, line lter, line inductor and contac tors. In addition, we provide various machine frames, perfectly adapted to these drives. Special designs are available on request.
Durable, sturdy construction, promising exceptionally long service life and availability and sustainable economic efciency. EN81 20/-50
Our drives meet all requirements with regard to the above standards, in particular the approval of safety brakes and the rope guard.
Smooth running
The traction sheaves we use are precisely manufactured and supplied with hardened grooves. As a result we guarantee you a long service
Issue 09/2015
Mini-Gearless
Performance Matrix s s e l r a e G k Q
1:1 DAF270L/XL
1000
630
DAF270M
PMC145-2 L
DAF210L
500 DAF210M
PMC145-2 M PMC145-2 S
1,0 ] g k [ Q
1,5 v [m/s]
2:1
2500 DAF270L/XL
2000 DAF270M
PMC170
1500
DAF270M
DAF270S DAF210L
1000
630 500
PMC145-2 L
DAF 210L
PMC145-2 XL
PMC125M PMC145-2 M
DAF 210M
PMC145-2 XM
PMC125S
PMC145-2 XS
PMC145-2 S
1,0
1,5
2,0
2,5
3,0
3,5
v [m/s]
In the diagrams the range of performance of the different machines are painted as an approximate value. For the exact assining of the machine we advise a technical calculation with the parameter of your installation. For this LEKalk is available.
www.liftequip.com
49
Mini-Gearless
PMC125 S / M
EN81-
20/ -50 -conform
s s e l r a e G
PMC125S
PMC125M
Techni cal Data Type of machine Suspension Rated Load Mass of Car Rated Speed max. Diameter of Traction Sheave Rim width Diameter of Ropes Number of Grooves max. Groove type Rated Power Rated Torque Permitted radial Shaft Load Weight Number of Switching Operations Duty Cycle Rated Current Output Factor Braking Torque Designation Brake Monitoring Protection Class Noise level Frequency inverter type
50
PMC125S001 r
PMC125M002 2:1
Q
[kg]
F v DT B d z
[kg]
450 600
630 700 1,0 240 75 6 6 at groove clearance 12 mm / 7 at groove clearance 10 mm seat / vee groove, hardened 3,8 230 12 137
[m/s] [mm] [mm]
51
[mm]
4
PN MN
[kW] [Nm] [kN] [kg]
2,8 170 10 127
120 40 10,2 0,89
% IN cos
[A]
7,9
φ [Nm]
2 x 210
2 x 300
2-surface disc brake in double conguration (2 brake circuits)
[dB(A)]
MFR MFC
1 microswith per brake circuit IP 21 < 65 5.5 21-15, 31-10
Issue 09/2015
Mini-Gearless
PMC145-2 S/XS
EN81-
20/ -50 -conform
s s e l r a e G
PMC145-2S
PMC145-2XS
Techni cal Data Type of machine Suspension Rated Load Rated Speed max. Diameter of Traction Sheave Diameter of Ropes Number of Grooves max. Groove type Rated Power Rated Torque Permitted radial Shaft Load Weight Number of Switching Operations Duty Cycle Rated Current Output Factor Designation
PMC145-2S r
Q [kg] v [m/s] DT [mm] d [mm]
z PN [kW] MN [Nm] [kN] [kg]
% IN [A] cos φ
1:1
2:1
275
450 1,0
www.liftequip.com
1,6
240 6 6 at groove clearance 12 mm / 7 at groove clearance 10 mm seat / vee groove, hardened 1,59 2,8 4,4 190 170 165 14 15 132 158 120 50 8,4 7,5 9,9 0,92 0,91 0,96 2 x 250 Nm, 2-surface disc brake in double conguration (2 brake circuits)
Brake Monitoring Protection Class Frequency inverter type
PMC145-2XS
MFR MFC
1 microswith per brake circuit IP 21 5.5 31-10
31-15
51
Mini-Gearless
PMC145-2 M/XM
EN81-
20/ -50 -conform
s s e l r a e G
PMC145-2XM
PMC145-2M
Techni cal Data Type of machine Suspension Rated Load Rated Speed max. Diameter of Traction Sheave Diameter of Ropes Number of Grooves max. Type of Groove Rated Power Rated Torque Permitted radial Shaft Load Weight Number of Switching Operations Duty Cycle Rated Current Output Factor Version of Brake
PMC145-2M r
1:1
2:1
Q [kg]
400
630
52
1,0
v [m/s]
1,2
6 8 at groove clearance 12 mm / 9 at groove clearance 10 mm seat / vee groove, hardened 2,38 2,72 2,86 3,91 3,9 6 6,9 285 235 205 225 236 18 19 172 189 180 40 50 11,5 9,5 8,3 14,8 15,6 0,93 0,92 0,94 0,97 0,96
MN [Nm] [kN] [kg]
% IN [A] cos φ
210
1,75
d [mm]
PN [kW]
240
1,6
240
z
210
1,0
DT [mm]
240
2 x 350 Nm, 2-surface disc brake in double conguration (2 brake circuits)
Brake Monitoring Protection Class Frequency inverter type
PMC145-2XM
MFR MFC
1 microswith per brake circuit IP 21 5.5 31-15
7.5
Issue 09/2015
Mini-Gearless
PMC145-2 L/XL
EN81-
20/ -50 -conform
s s e l r a e G
PMC145-2L
PMC145-2XL
Techni cal Data Type of machine Suspension Rated Load Rated Speed max. Diameter of Traction Sheave Diameter of Ropes Number of Grooves max. Type of Groove Rated Power Rated Torque Permitted radial Shaft Load Weight Number of Switching Operations Duty Cycle Rated Current Output Factor Version of Brake Brake Monitoring Protection Class Frequency inverter type
www.liftequip.com
PMC145-2L
PMC145-2XL
r
1:1
2:1
Q [kg]
630
1000
1,0
v [m/s] DT [mm]
240
d [mm]
z PN [kW]
3,69
MN [Nm] [kN] [kg]
216
% IN [A] cos φ
0,94
1,2 210
240
1,0 210
1,6
1,75 240
6 11 at groove clearance 12 mm / 13 at groove clearance 10 mm seat / vee groove, hardened 4,2 4,42 6,01 6 9,4 10,2 440 360 315 352 350 32 30 214 216 214 229 180 40 50 18,3 14,9 13 24,7 24,6 0,93 0,92 0,95 0,96
2 x 550 Nm, 2-surface disc brake in double conguration (2 brake circuits)
MFR MFC
1 microswith per brake circuit IP 21 7.5 31-15
18 31-26
53
Mini-Gearless
PMC145-2 M/L with traction sheave Ø 320
EN81-
20/ -50 -conform
s s e l r a e G
Bottom view
Sideview
View from above
PMC145-2M
PMC145-2L
Technic al Data Type of machine Suspension Rated Load Rated Speed max. Diameter of Traction Sheave Diameter of Ropes Number of Grooves max. Type of Groove Rated Power Rated Torque Permitted radial Shaft Load Weight Number of Switching Operations Duty Cycle Rated Current Output Factor Version of Brake
PMC145-2M
PMC145-2L
r
1:1
2:1
1:1
2:1
Q [kg]
300
480
500
800
1,0 320 8
v [m/s] DT [mm] d [mm]
z PN [kW] MN [Nm]
max. 5
max. 6 seat / vee groove, hardened 3,1 2,76 245 440
1,79 285 18 185
[kN] [kg]
4,7 375 32 225
180 % IN [A] cos φ
40 11,5 0,94
50 9,9 0,93
40 18,3 0,93
2 x 350 Nm
50 15,5 0,92 2 x 550 Nm
2-surface disc brake in double conguration (2 brake circuits)
Brake Monitoring Protection Class Frequency inverter type
54
1 microswith per brake circuit IP 21 MFR MFC
5.5
7.5 31-15
Issue 09/2015
Mini-Gearless
PMC170 S - XL
EN81-
20/ -50 -conform
s s e l r a e G
Dimensions L (mm)
D (mm)
E (mm)
F (mm)
H (mm)
S (mm)
G (kg)
PMC170S
180
613
426
300
706
273
381
PMC170M
240
673
486
360
766
304
423
PMC170L
270
703
516
390
796
319
448
PMC170XL
330
763
576
450
856
350
492
Technic al Data Type of machine Suspension Rated Load Rated Speed max. Diameter of Traction Sheave Diameter of Ropes Number of Grooves max. Type of Groove Rated Power Rated Torque Permitted radial Shaft Load Weight Number of Switching Operations Duty Cycle Rated Current Output Factor Version of Brake Brake Monitoring Protection Class Frequency inverter type
www.liftequip.com
PMC170S
PMC170M
r Q [kg] v [m/s]
1050 1,6
d [mm]
z
MN [Nm] [kN] [kg]
9,7 485 30 381
% IN [A] cos φ
PMC170XL
2:1
DT [mm]
PN [kW]
PMC170L
23 0,95
1650 1,0
1,6
1,75
320 8 10 seat / vee groove, hardened 9,8 15,6 17,1 781 42 40 423 448 180 50 27 40 0,94 0,95
2,0
19,5 42 492 240 45 0,94
2 x 1200 Nm, 2-surface disc brake in double conguration
1 microswith per brake circuit IP 21 MFR MFC
--
18 31-26
31-40
31-60
55
Mini-Gearless
DAF210M
EN81-
20/ -50 -conform
s s e l r a e G
Techni cal Data Type of machine Suspension Rated Load Rated Speed max. Diameter of Traction Sheave Diameter of Ropes Number of Grooves max. Type of Groove Rated Power Rated Torque Permitted radial Shaft Load Weight Number of Switching Operations Duty Cycle Rated Current Output Factor Version of Brake Brake Monitoring
DAF210M
r
1:1
Q [kg]
450
v [m/s]
1,0
d [mm]
z
MN [Nm]
630 1,6
320 8 5
DT [mm]
PN [kW]
2:1
2,83 450
4,3 430
240
180
50 12,5
60 12,0
[kg]
IN [A] cos φ
0,94
56
1,0
700
630
1,6
16,1 0,96
16,2
320 8 5
630 2,0 360 8/9 5/4
7,9
8,0
1,75
320 360 320 360 8 8/9 8 8/9 5 5/4 5 5/4 seat / vee groove, hardened 4,2 4,7 6,8 7,3 7,2 378 380 382 365 370 33 (≤ 75 1/min) / 37 (> 75 1/min) 250 240
10,5 0,95
700
50 17,4
15,4 0,95
360
17,2
2-surface disc brake in double conguration (2 brake circuits)
1 microswith per brake circuit
Protection Class Frequency inverter type
630
360 8/9 5/4
[kN]
%
700
IP 20 MFR MFC
5.5 31-15
7.5 31-26
Issue 09/2015
Mini-Gearless
DAF210L
EN81-
20/ -50 -conform
s s e l r a e G
Techni cal Data Type of machine Suspension Rated Load Rated Speed max. Diameter of Traction Sheave Diameter of Ropes Number of Grooves max. Type of Groove Rated Power Rated Torque Permitted radial Shaft Load Weight Number of Switching Operations Duty Cycle Rated Current Output Factor Version of Brake Brake Monitoring Protection Class Frequency inverter type
www.liftequip.com
DAF210L r
1:1
Q [kg]
630
v [m/s] DT [mm] d [mm]
z PN [kW] MN [Nm] [kN] [kg]
2:1
630/900/1000/1125 1,0 520/400/360/320
630/900/1000/1125 1125 1000 1,0 1,6 1,6 1,75 2,0 320 520/400/360/320 320 360 8 8-13 7 5-8 seat / vee groove, hardened 4,10 5,75 4,7/5,9/6,6/6,5/7,5 7,4/9,5/10,5/11,5 11,3/12,4 12,5 650 575 610/590/586/520/600 600/595/590/575 580/565 563 for 320-, 360- and 400-traction sheave 38 (≤ 75 1/min) / 46 (> 75 1/min) for 520-traction sheave 37 (≤ 75 1/min) / 41 (> 75 1/min) 320/325/330 240
% IN [A] cos φ
16,0 0,94
14,0 0,95
15,4/15/15,2/13/16,8
0,96/0,94/0,95
50 23,4/23,2/23,0/25,5 25,7/25,1 0,96/0,95/0,95 0,95/0,96
25,0 0,96
2-surface disc brake in double conguration (2 brake circuits)
1 microswith per brake circuits IP 20 MFR MFC
7.5 31-15
18 31-26/40
31-40
57
Mini-Gearless
DAF270S
EN81-
20/ -50 -conform
s s e l r a e G
Technic al Data Type of machine Suspension Rated Load Rated Speed max. Diameter of Traction Sheave Diameter of Ropes Number of Grooves max. Type of Groove Rated Power Rated Torque Permitted radial Shaft Load Weight incl. traction sheave Number of Switching Operations Duty Cycle Rated Current Output Factor
DAF270S r
2:1
Q [kg] v [m/s]
1,0
DT [mm] d [mm]
z PN [kW] MN [Nm]
8 640
[kN] [kg] [F/h] [%] IN [A] cos φ
23 0,94
Brake Monitoring Protection Class
58
2,5
17,8 570
27,8 0,96
2-surface disc brake in double conguration 2x1700 Nm option: with manual release
Version of Brake
Frequency inverter type
1250 1,6 1,75 2,0 320 8 10 seat / vee groove, hardened 12,6 13,8 15 630 600 43,5 475 240 50 30,7 29,2 0,95
MFR MFC
31-26
1 microswith per brake circuit IP20, optional IP54 18 31-40
-21-50R
Issue 09/2015
Mini-Gearless
DAF270M
EN81-
20/ -50 -conform
s s e l r a e G
Techni cal Data Type of machine Suspension Rated Load Rated Speed max. Diameter of Traction Sheave Diameter of Ropes Number of Grooves max. Type of Groove
DAF270M r Q [kg] v [m/s] DT [mm]
1:1
2:1
1600 2000 1,0 1,6 1,0 440 320 440 320 320/440
1600 1,75
900 800 1000900 800 1000
1,6
2,0 440
8-11 7-9 seat / vee groove, hardened
d [mm]
z
Rated Power
PN [kW]
Rated Torque Permitted radial Shaft Load Weight incl. traction sheave Number of Switching Operations Duty Cycle Rated Current Output Factor
MN [Nm] 1200/1175 1075/1050 1175 1250 1050/1025 1025/1050
5,4/7,4
7,8/10,6
10,7 11,4 15,3/14,9 16,3/16,7
[kg] 180
IN [A] cos φ
18,2
19,5
21,6 21,3 24,8
1000
860
950
780
180
240
43,5/58 550/570
[kN]
%
1350 1600 1250 2,5 3,0 3,5
240
240
180
180
40
240
50 40 50 40 27,5 24,5 24 25 22 30 24 25,5 30/35 0,96 0,94 0,92 0,93 0,95 0,94 0,94 0,95/0,94
50 35/30,5 38/29 41,5/28,5 31,4 31,2 36,5 0,95 0,96/0,95 0,95/0,96 0,96
Version of Brake
2-surface disc brake in double conguration 2x1250 / 2x1700 Nm option: with manual release
Brake Monitoring Protection Class
1 microswith per brake circuit IP20, optional IP54
Frequency inverter type
www.liftequip.com
MFR MFC
31-26/40
18 31-26
-31-40
31-60
21-50R
59
Mini-Gearless
DAF270L
EN81-
20/ -50 -conform
s s e l r a e G
Techni cal Data Type of machine Suspension Rated Load Rated Speed max.
DAF270L r
1:1
2:1
1100/1000 v [m/s] 1,0/1,6 Diameter of Traction Sheave DT [mm] 440 Diameter of Ropes Number of Grooves max.
Type of Groove Rated Power Rated Torque Permitted radial Shaft Load
Weight Number of Switching Operations
Duty Cycle Rated Current Output Factor Version of Brake
2000/2250/2500 1,0 1,6 490/440
Q [kg]
8-11 7
% IN [A]
26/24,5
50 25/36/41/28
cos φ
0,96
0,96/0,95
60
50/40 42,5/43,5/36/ 43,5 50/41 0,96/0,94 0,95
50 41,5/60/ 35/60
58/40/59 0,96
50/40 35/42,5/51,5/ 62 0,96/0,94
2-surface disc brake in double conguration 2x1700 option: with manual release
MFR MFC
4:1
2000 2200/2000 1800/2000 3000/4000/3400 4000 1,75 2,0 2,5 1,0/1,6 1,0 490 440/490 490/440 490/440 440
8-12 z 6-10 seat / vee groove, hardened PN [kW] 6,6/10,1 11,7/12,8/14,6 18/20,4/23,3 20 24,6/22,5 26,5/30 17/22,5/30,5 MN [Nm] 1475/1400 1433/1400/ 1375/1400/ 1400 1350/1375 1300/1325 1385/1650/ 1600 1600 1400 [kN] 58 730/740 [kg] 240 240/180 180 240 240/180 d [mm]
Brake Monitoring Protection Class Frequency inverter type
3:1
18 31-40
1 microswith per brake circuit IP20, optional IP54 18 / --31-60 31-60 / 21-105
18 / --
Issue 09/2015
25,1 1380
180 40 56 0,96
Mini-Gearless
DAF270XL
EN81-
20/ -50 -conform
s s e l r a e G
Option: with manual release
Techni cal Data Type of machine Suspension Rated Load Rated Speed max.
DAF270XL r
1:1
2:1
3:1
4:1
4000/3400 1,0/1,6
4000 1,0
8-13 z 6-10 seat / vee groove, hardened PN [kW] 6,6/10,1 12,2/12,8/14,6 17,3/20,4/23,3 24,6 30 22,5/30,5 MN [Nm] 1475/1400 1400/1600 1350 1325 1650/1400 73 [kN] [kg] 770/780 240 240/180 240 240/180
25,1 1380
1100/1000 v [m/s] 1,0/1,6 Diameter of Traction Sheave DT [mm] 440 Diameter of Ropes Number of Grooves max.
Type of Groove Rated Power Rated Torque Permitted radial Shaft Load
Weight Number of Switching Operations
Duty Cycle Rated Current Output Factor Version of Brake
1800/2000/2250/2500 1,0 1,6 520*/440
Q [kg]
d [mm]
cos φ
50 26/24,5 0,96
36/41/28 0,96/0,95
440
50/40 43,5/36/50/41 0,96/0,94
50 41,5/60 0,96
59 0,93
50/40 42,5/51,5/62 0,96/0,94
180 40 56 0,96
2-surface disc brake in double conguration 2x2200 option: with manual release
Brake Monitoring Protection Class Frequency inverter type
2000 2,5
8-11 7
% IN [A]
2200 2,0
MFR MFC
31-40
1 microswith per brake circuit IP20, optional IP54 -31-60 31-60
21-105
*see product catalogue DAF270
www.liftequip.com
61
Mini-Gearless
Machine base frame for PMC - Gearless s s e l r a e G
ModKit MO61 S
ModKit MO61 D4
Handrad/-lüftung optional
A S L 5 5 5 - 7 6 5 m m
For more information see description ModKit MO61S
For more information see description ModKit MO61 D4
Techni cal Data Frame Machine Suspension Rated load Rated speed Rope departure at drive
MODKit MO 61 S*
MODKit MO61 D4
PMC145-2 M, L
PMC145-2 M, L, XL
r Q [kg] v [m/s] [mm]
2.1 up to 1000
1:1
up to 675 1,0 from 555 to 765
up to 630 up to 1,6 600 ≤ ASL ≤ 1400
exible
Diameter of traction sheave DT [mm] d [mm] Diameter of ropes Number of ropes max. Number of grooves max. z Type of groove DT [mm] Pulley diameter Vibration isolation elements Integrated rope end fastening points, rope anchorages Handwinding wheel, optional Manual release, optional Hoist
210 / 240
240 6 12 12 seat / vee groove, hardened 240 Yes No (1:1)
Yes Yes Yes
No
Yes
Pre-assemble machine base frame on stock Machine available from stock
* ▶ ▶
62
Issue 09/2015
Mini-Gearless
Machine base frame for DAF - Gearless
DAF210 on TW63B machine base frame
DAF270 on TW130 machine base frame
s s e l r a e G
Technic al Data Frame
DAF210 on TW63 machine base frame
Machine Suspension
DAF210M r
ASL-dimension exible*
[mm]
DAF270 on TW130 machine base frame
DAF210L
DAF270S/M/L 1:1
481 - 1073 320 / 360
Diameter of traction sheave DT [mm] d [mm] Diameter of ropes Vibration isolation elements Adapter plat Rope guard optional Manual release optional * ASL-dimension is dependent on the traction sheave
501 - 1097 360 / 400
522 - 1297 320 / 360 / 440 8 / 10 / 11
8 / 10 Yes Yes Yes Yes
Further special frames on request. Contact us!
www.liftequip.com
63
Mini-Gearless
Modernisation solution "Geared to Gearless" s s e l r a e G
DAF210
DAF270
A exible solution, adjustable to the specic situation of the machine room
Existing situation
Possible solution
Szenario 1 Geared drive with extended shaft (SA9), Traction sheave located in the lift shaft and machine room located beside the lift shaft.
A gearless drive is installed in the already existing opening. The machine frame is especially designed to provide support upwards and downwards.
Szenario 2 Geared drive is mounted below the lift shaft, the machine room is located under the lift shaft, rope departure in upward direction.
The gearless machine frame is especially designed for rope departure in upward direction. A support with isolations is included.
Szenario 3 Geared drive is mounted above the lift shaft, the machine room is located abovethe lift shaft, rope departure in downward direction.
64
The gearless machine frame is especially designed for a rope departure in downward direction. A support with isolations is included.
Issue 09/2015
Mini-Gearless
Modernisation solution "Geared to Gearless" Example with DAF210L Rope departure in downward direction:
s s e l r a e G
Rope departure in upward direction:
Advantages of this example:
• Energy-efcient Gearless Technology • No additional safety gears required as the brake of the machine is certied for the overspeed in upward direction
• no replacement of the rope pulleys in the lift shaft required
Usage parameters: Q ≤ 630 kg / 2:1 / 1,0 m/s / diameter = 520 mm / 13 mm ropes
www.liftequip.com
65
66
Issue 09/2015
ModKit
MO61 Solutions with PMC Gearless s s e l r a e G
A S L 5 5 5 - 7 6 5 m m
MO61 D4 • Product description
68
• Techn. specifcations Rope suspension 1:1, 2:1
70
• Scope of supply
72
MO61 S • Technical Data
73
• Dimensions
74
MO61 CRX • The solution for plastic-coated ropes Colouring for all Drives
www.liftequip.com
75 84
67
ModKit
MO61 D4 Product Description s s e l r a e G
The powerful system solution in the modernisation of installations up to 1000 kg / 1.0 m/s (1:1) or up to 1000 kg / 1.6 m/s (2:1). Safety
Sustainability
Type-approved safety brake EN 81-A3 compliant Integrated device for pulling out of the safety gear (optional)
Scope of supply
Small quantities of lubricants used and no oil change required Rolling bearings, life-time lubrication
Innovation Efciency
High level of efciency of up to 92%
provides for low energy consumption Ideally suited for energy recovery
Comfort Minimal noises and very smooth running Outstanding ride comfort, e.g. in combination with a matched frequency inverter from LiftEquip
Well-conceived, exible solution with integrated deecting pulleys, rope xing points and mountings on elevator car / counterweight Drives optimally matched to the lower to middle power segment Ideal for use in modernisation in exchange for a geared drive in the machine room, general without structural adaptations
Gearless drive: Gearless PMC145-2 Machine base frame with elements for vibration isolation Additionally for 2:1: integrated rope suspension and universal diverter pulley mounting for car and counterweight Protective covers on traction sheave and diverter pulleys in acc. with EN 81-1 inclusive
Reliability All installed components and parts are high quality Ensuring a rapid and long lasting spare parts availability
IAvailable in versions for 1:1 or 2:1 rope suspension:
As a rule the previous ceiling openings can be used to feed through the ropes with the machine base frame that can be individually adapted to the existing project planning. This avoids costly structural measures.
Suspension 1:1
Suspension 2:1
Available in left- or right-hand version::
Left-hand version
68
Right-hand version
Issue 09/2015
ModKit
MO61 D4 Product Description Powerful and compact Exclusively the modern, tried-and-tested synchronous gearless drives of the PMC145-2 and PMC170 series are used in the ModKit MO61.
particu-larly favourable conditions for long-
life design are therefore satised. The PMC gearless drives have a typeapproved safety brake in accordance with
s s e l r a e G
EN 81-1 subclause 9.10 and a protection
Gearless PMC145-2
The low-noise and low-vibration drives operate at air-borne noise levels of less than
device against unintentional elevator car movement in accordance with EN 81-1:
60 dB(A). The efciency levels extend up to 92% and are therefore particularly efcient
1988+A3: 2009. This eliminates the need
in both driving and generator operation with energy recovery. The PMC drives are designed for 180 trips per hour with a duty cycle of 50% and can therefore easily cope
ures, e.g. retrots on the elevator car or a
during modernisation for additional measrope brake.
with high trafc volumes. The traction sheaves have a diameter of 240 mm with wearresistant, hardened seat grooves. Ropes with diameters of 6 mm are used. The ratio between traction sheave diameter and rope diameter is thus always 40. In accordance with the standards the
y g r 1 e 6 n O e s M ' t n i o K i d t a o l l M a t s e h n t i r h t u i o y w y e c s n a i e e r c c f n e I
High energy efciency
The perfect c ombination: MFC and MFR frequency inverters The ModKit MO61 is rounded off if required by a compact, optimally matched MFC series frequency inverter in which all the drive parameters of the gearless drive are already stored.
The frequency inverters from LiftEquip are specially designed for the strict re-quirements in elevator construction. The high clock frequency and control quality ensure a high degree of smooth running of the drive and low noise development.
If required, you can operate the drive with an MFR series frequency inverter with integrated energy recovery unit. When the drive is in generator operation, electrical energy is fed back to the in-house system
and additionally increases the efciency of your installation. MFR frequency inverter, Webcode 2069from the wide product range
www.liftequip.com
69
ModKit
MO61 D4 Technical specifcations – Rope suspension 1:1 with PMC145-2 s s e l r a e G
Rope suspension 1:1
Openings and load points in the machine room
Rope progression
(wrap angle on example with RCD =1400)
Centre of elevator car frame
Centre of counterweight
Dimensions in mm
Performance chart (rope suspension 1:1) Nominal load max
Q
[kg]
320
450
630
Nominal speed
v
[ms]
0.6 - 1.0
0.6 - 1.0
1.6
0.6 - 1.0
Drive, gearless
PMC
145-2M
145-2L
145-2XL
145-2L
Rope suspension
r
Travel height*.
FH
[m]
Car weight min./max.
FK
[m]
Rope clearance dimension
SAM
[mm]
600 - 1400
Diameter, traction sheave
DT
[mm]
240
Suspension ropes
n x dS
[mm]
Diameter, diverter pulleys
DA
[mm]
Weight, drive
mA
[kg]
Weight, sling
mR
[kg]
1:1 33
25
400 - 900
300 - 650
8x6
650 - 900
12 x 6 240
172
229
216
216
max. 150
*approximate value
70
Issue 09/2015
ModKit
MO61 D4, Technical specifcations – Rope suspension 2:1 with PMC145-2 s s e l r a e G
Rope suspension 2:1
Openings and load points P in the machine room
Centre of counterweight
Rope progression
(wrap angle on example with RCD = 1250)
Centre of elevator car frame
Dimensions in mm
Performance chart (rope suspension 2:1) Nominal load max
Q
[kg]
630
1000
Nominal speed
v
[mm]
0.6 - 1.0
1.05 - 1.6
0.6 - 1.0
1.05 - 1.6
Drive, gearless
PMC
-
145-2M
145-2XM
145-2L
145-2XL
Rope suspension
r
Travel height*
FH
[m]
Car weight min./max.
FK
[m]
Rope clearance dimension
SAM
[mm]
750 - 1400
Diameter, traction sheave
DT
[mm]
240
Suspension ropes
n x dS
[mm]
Diameter, diverter pulleys
DA
[mm]
Weight, drive
mA
[kg]
Weight, sling
mR
[kg]
2:1 33 600 - 1200
870 - 1450
9x6
12 x 6 240
172
189
216
229
max. 150
*approximate value
www.liftequip.com
71
ModKit
MO61 D4 Scope of Supply s s e l r a e G
We supply a exible modication set, consisting of the components
Permanent-magnet, gearless synchronous machine: Gearless PMC 145-2 Machine base frame with vibration isolation elements, in acc. with VDI 2566 - for rope suspension 1:1 - for rope suspension 2:1, integrated rope end fastening points, rope anchorages - Machine base frames are individually manufactured to the desired rope clearance dimension RCD - Both versions (1:1 and 2:1) are available in the left- or right-hand version
Integrated plastic rope deecting pulleys
Variant for rope suspension 1:1:
- Optional: Universal, highly exible mounting with rope xing points for car and counter
weight Variant for rope suspension 2:1:
- Universal, highly exible mounting with diverter pulleys for car and counterweight - Complete rope kit: suspension ropes with dia. 6 mm, expert's report, conformity-tested
with Directive 95/16/EC “Lifts / Elevator Directive”, all rope accessories
Integrated device for pulling the car out of the safe ty gear (optional)
Optional: - Handwinding wheel - Device for pulling the car out of the safety gear - Optimally matched MFC or MFR series frequency inverter
Diverter pulley mounting for car and counterweight (suspension 2:1)
Universal diverter pulley mounting
The pulley supports are xed to the top beam of the elevator car sling and to the counterweight. The freely rotatable suspension enables the diverter pulley to be mounted to match the rope suspension so that the ropes are not subjected to twisting. Mounting on car sling, variable adaptation dep.
on mounting proles
Mounting on counterweight, variable adaptation dep.
on frame proles
72
Issue 09/2015
ModKit
MO61 S Technical Data s s e l r a e G
Option:
with handwinding wheel
Option: manual release
A S L 5 5 5 -
7 6 5 m m
Techni cal Data Type of Machine Suspension Rated load Rated speed Rope departure at drive exible
Diameter of traction sheave Diameter of ropes Groove clearance Number of ropes max. Number of grooves max. Type of groove No. of switching operations Duty cycle Version of brake
PMC145-2 M, PMC145-2 L r Q
v ASL DT d RA
1:1 [kg] [m/s] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
z
ED
%
up to 675 1,0 from 555 to 765 210 / 240 6 / 6,5 * 10 12 12 seat / v-groove 180 40 2-surface disc brake (safety brake) option: with manual release
Brake monitoring Protection class Pulley diameter
DT
[mm]
with microswitch IP 21 240
* 6,5 mm ropes with special diverter pulley
Pre-assembled machine frame on stock ▶ Machine available from stock ▶
www.liftequip.com
73
ModKit
MO61 S Dimensions s s e l r a e G
max.
1 m m 4 6 0 1
2
m m 1 6 4 = y
555 ≤ ASL ≤ 765 (TS 240 mm) 540 ≤ ASL ≤ 750 (TS 210 mm)
3 4
n o L i s / m n M e 2 m m i 5 0 d 4 0 l 1 8 . a n n r C i e M m t x P E
Position of the rubber elements
5
Scope of supply machine frame:
1 2 3 4 5
74
Rope cover Console Rubber element Frame telescopable Axle, diverter pulley
Issue 09/2015
ModKit
MO61 CRX The solution for plastic-coated ropes Compared to steel ropes with the same diameter, plastic-coated ropes have a higher friction c oefcient and higher breaking strength. Thanks to the higher friction coefcient, the forces
required can be transferred at a lower wrap-around angle. Due to the lower D/d ration when using this rope, it is possible to use smaller diameter traction sheaves. This means given the same drive power, greater torque is available with a smaller traction sheave diameter. An economic solution is possible with fewer ropes and a smaller drive by using plastic-coated ropes.
s s e l r a e G
EN 81-1 and EN 81-20 only describe the use of steel ropes with a nominal diameter of at least 8 mm and a D/d ratio of at least 40. Given the corresponding authorisation and type approval test, it is possible to deviate from this standard if the measures described in the authorisation conditions for use and the requirements demanded for operation are complied with. The trend to increasingly small traction sheaves makes it necessary to look for corresponding solutions with regard to the traction capacity. The solution here is the ModKit MO61 CRX for plastic-coated ropes
It consists of the PMC 145-2 drive, with a traction sheave diameter of 150 mm for up to 11 ropes with 6 mm diameter (manufacturer Drako PTX 300) or up to 6 ropes with 8,1 mm diameter (manufacturer Brugg CTP 8.1 G2). The machine-frame is telescopic and as a result can be adjusted to the required ASL dimension. Insulation elements and rope
protection according to EN 81-20 are included in delivery.
Technic al Data Type of Machine Suspension Rated load
Mass of car Rated speed
ASL-Maß Diameter of traction sheave Diameter of ropes Number of ropes max.
PMC 145-2 r
1:1
Q [kg] F [kg] v [m/s] [mm] DT [mm] d [mm]
630 900 1,0
Type of rope Number of grooves max.
Groove-type
z
500 ≤ ASL ≤ 1400
150 6 8,1 7 6 DRAKO PTX 300 Brugg CTP 8.1 G2 11 6 Round groove
(Sample conguration)
www.liftequip.com
75
ModKit
MO61 CRX s s e l r a e G
Technical notes on the use of plasticcoated steel ropes
The requirements for the area of use, ambient conditions and state of wear are described in the particular type approval certicate for the rope. Among other things,
the replacement criteria depend on a specied number of travels or duration of use. For
this purpose it is necessary that the travel number (change of direction) is recorded by a manipulation-proof trip meter and that the lift is immobilised upon reaching this travel number. The ropes must be checked for wear and damage; here too the discard criteria dened in the type approval certicate
must be observed. The traction sheaves and rope pulleys have a groove prole corresponding to the infor mation of the rope supplier. Calculation of the traction capacity must be performed according to the requirements in EN 81. The advice of the rope supplier provided on storage, transport, handling, mounting and operation of the ropes must be observed. In particular, the ropes must be secured against twisting and the special information of the rope supplier regarding diagonal pull complied with
76
Issue 09/2015
Compact-Gearless
SC-Series s s e l r a e G
SC300/400
www.liftequip.com
• Product description
78
Colouring for all Drives
84
77
Compact-Gearless
SC300 and SC400
EN81-
20/ -50
-conform
s s e l r a e G
SC300
The synchronous COMPACT-Gearless SC 300 is our workhorse for superior lifts. Capable of rated loads up to 1600kg with 2:1 suspension or for operating speeds up to 3.5m/s. The synchronous COMPACTGearless SC 400 is the drive for high-speed lifts and heavy loads. Capable of rated loads up to 2750 kg with 2:1 suspension or for operating speeds up to 4.0 m/s.
is available in several power classes
Super Quiet Machine
ranging from 19.4 kW up to 48.6 kW and
Thanks to its excellent efciency the SC 300
Excellent Motor Control The vector controlled, synchronous machines with permanent magnet excitation are known for outstanding driving comfort. They are available in several power classes ranging from 10 kW up to 24.8 kW and as standard in protection class IP 43 for SC300. The SC400
certied as safety brake according to the
Machine Suspension
SC300S 2:1 SC300M
Machine
Compact Design As synchronous machine with a monobloc housing the SC-Series is very space-
saving in both the S- an the M-version. Double Safety The type-tested dual-circuit disc brake ensures safety at the best. This device is
European standard for lifts EN 81-A3. An additional and costly braking system for upwards braking operation is thus not necessary.
Rated speed v [m/s]
1000
1,0 - 2,5
900
3,0
1800
1,0
1600
1,6 - 2,5
1250
3,0 - 3,5
Machine Suspension
SC400S SC400M
SC300M
ca. 665 kg ca. 1230 kg ca. 1315 kg
1:1
SC400S
Drive with Traction sheave [kg]
ca. 565 kg
SC400M
IP20 as standard protection class.
Rated load Q [kg]
SC300S SC400S
78
SC400
2:1 SC400M
can pass on an additional ventilation. This results in a comfortable low sound-pressure level.
Package Solution High precision machine frames facilitate the construction of lifts with double wrap. If desired you can also obtain a frame for single wrap.
Maintenance-Free Due to its design our COMPACT-Gearless has a small number of mechanical components. In addition, since no oil is needed, a positive effect on maintenance and product life is achieved.
Rated load Q [kg]
Rated speed v [m/s]
1000 1350 1250 1000 2000 1700 1400 2750 2500 2000 1600
4 2,5 3 4 2 3 4 2 2,5 4 4
Traction sheave Ø
1)
560
1) Reduced travel height
Issue 09/2015
Compact-Gearless
SC300 and SC400 s s e l r a e G
SC300 on Machine frame
SC300
SC400
www.liftequip.com
79
80
Issue 09/2015
External Rotor Gearless
DAB-Series s s e l r a e G
DAB 450, 530
www.liftequip.com
• Product description
82
Colouring for all Drives
84
81
External Rotor Gearless
DAB450
EN81-
20/ -50
-conform
s s e l r a e G
Technical Data DAB450* Machine
DAB450S
DAB450L
DAB450S
DAB450L
Suspension
r
Rated load
Q [kg]
1150
1600
2400
2000
2400
2200
Rated speed Diameter Traction Sheave max. Numbers of Grooves
v [m/s]
3,5 / 4,0
3,0 - 4,0 600
2,5
3,0
3,5 660
4,0
52
54
2445
2220
1:1
DT [mm]
2:1
z
16 x Ø 13/14 // 16 x Ø 1“/ 2“
Type of Groove
seat / vee / semicircular groove
Rated Power
PN [kW]
27,5 / 30,3
28,5 / 38,8
Rated Torque
MN [Nm]
2340 / 2280
2840 / 2920
permitted radial Axle Load
[kN]
Weight
[kg]
40 2400
2200 360
2300
2650
Number of Operations
2300
2650
240
Duty Cycle
%
Rated Current
IN [A]
56 / 56
57 / 76
72
97
96
Output Factor
cos φ
0,77 / 0,83
0,78
0,84
0,77
0,81
60
Version of Brake Brake Monitoring
external dual circuit shoe brake
Protection Class
IP20
temperature monitoring
* Standard values
82
Issue 09/2015
External Rotor Gearless
DAB530
EN81-
20/ -50
-conform
s s e l r a e G
Technical DataDAB530* DAB530L
DAB530XL
Machine Suspension
r
Rated load
Q [kg]
2400
2250
5000
4500
4700
4100
Rated speed
v [m/s]
3,5
4,0
2,0
2,5
3,5
4,0
Diameter Traction Sheave
DT [mm]
700
max. Numbers of Grooves
z
20 x Ø 16 // 20 Ø 5/8 “ // 14 x Ø 18
1:1
2:1
740
seat / vee / semicircular groove
Type of Groove Rated Power
PN [kW]
Rated Torque
MN [Nm]
permitted radial Axle Load
[kN]
Weight
[kg]
50,6
57,5 5040
64,0
77,3
5600
5430
88,5 4670
4083
450 4000
4300 240
Number of Operations Duty Cycle Rated Current
% IN [A]
103
106
115
132
169
164
Output Factor
cos φ
0,77
0,82
0,83
0,86
0,77
0,8
60
Version of Brake Brake Monitoring
external dual circuit shoe brake
Protection Class
IP20
temperature monitoring
* Standard values
www.liftequip.com
83
Colouring
Colouring for all Drives and machine frame s e v i r D
RAL 7021 – Black grey
RAL 7005 – Mouse grey Colour of the machine base frames
84
The paintwork of drives is the environmentally friendly hydro-paint in the colour RAL 7021 (Black grey).
The machine base frames will continue to be supplied with a high-quality powder coating in a colour similar to RAL 7005 (Mouse grey). A polyester epoxy powder
Advantages of the new hydro-paint:
mix with a coating thickness of approx. 60 μm is used.
• Two-component water-based paint with higher impact strength • Complies with the VOC Directive (Volatile Organic Compounds) and thus very environ mentally compatible • Resistant to solvents, alkaline solutions and synthetic oils
Galvanised add-on parts are not painted. This changeover means that the drives and the optional machine base frame will consistently have a technologically superior and environmentally compatible surface coating. It will also lend the entire drive unit an even more attractive appearance.
Issue 09/2015
Drive Accessories
Drive Accessories s e i r o s s e s s A e v i r D
Brake control for operational brakes • BS3
87
• BSV2 and BSV4
88
• BSV1
89
UCM-Modul incl. Shaft Encoder
www.liftequip.com
86
90
85
Drive Accessories
Brake Control for Operational Brakes and NBS In gearless and geared drives s e i r o s s e s s A e v i r D
The operational brakes and NBS systems of the gearless and geared drives are closed in de-energised condition. To enable the brake to be opened, the brake magnets of the two brake circuits must be energised. Depending on the brake design, the brake is opened with high-speed excitation and kept open with reduced voltage. There are also brakes that are opened without high-speed excitation. Selection of the brake control for different brakes depends on the high-speed excitation voltage and holding voltage required and the current needed. The table below shows the assignment of the drives with brakes to t he different brake controls:
Overview Drive accessories BS 3 (50-60 Hz)
BSV 2
BSV 2 (60 Hz)
BSV 4 (207/144V)
BSV 1 (50-60 Hz)
6510 000 9263
65 100 27 68 0
6510 000 9262
6510 000 92 65
65 000 06 67 0
● Gear Brake: Warner/Kendrion (not W332C)
● Gear Brake: Warner/Kendrion (not W332C)
● Gear Brake: Warner/Kendrion (not W332C)
● DAF (Mini Gearless) (not DAF270 2x2200 Nm)
● DAF (210/270) only ships (not DAF270 2x2200Nm)
● DAF (210/270) only ships (not DAF270 2x2200Nm)
● DAF270 (2x2200 Nm)
● SC 300
● SC 300
● SC 300
● W332C
● PMC (manually released)
● PMC (manually released) only ships
● PMC (manually released) only ships
● DAB 450/530
● PMC 125/145-2 (electrical brake release) ● PMC 170
● SC 400
● PMC (electrical brake release 207/144V)
When using the drives with the MFC 30/31-xx inverters in plug&play design or MFR, the brake control is integrated in the inverter. The different brake controls with their technical data are described below.
86
Issue 09/2015
Drive Accessories
BS3 s e i r o s s e s s A e v i r D
Brake control 3 serves to activate brake magnets for elevator drives. Design
Brake control 3 consists of a control board, an integrated power lter and the
connection terminals for mounting on a top hat rail. Operation
The direct voltage required for the brake magnets is generated via a bridge rectier and downstream pulse width modulation with output lter. A varistor
protection circuit is provided at the output. An integrated power lter ensures compliance with the
EMC limit values.
Technic al Data
6510 000 9263
Part number: Nominal system voltage:
230 V AC
Line fuse (glass fuse on the PCB)
230V F,4AT 48-63 Hz
Frequency of system voltage:
Braking voltages:
Nominal output current: Maximum output current:
• • • • •
180/90V 207/103V 207/144V overexcitation continously on 180V or 207V additional freely programmable braking voltage
1,5 A 3 A (for overexcitation time, max. 2 sec.)
Switch ON duration:
100 % ED; 60% ED with continuous overexcitation
Level of protection:
IP20
Ambient operating temperature: Relative air humidity: Max. site altitude above sea level: EMC check: Mounting:
Dimensions (LxBxH) Weight
www.liftequip.com
0° - 50°C no condensation 10…95%r.H., annual mean 70 % 1000 m without derating compliance with EN 12015 and EN 12016 top hat rail 170 x 125 x 78 mm
approx. 1,00 kg
87
Drive Accessories
BSV2 and BSV4 s e i r o s s e s s A e v i r D
The brake control 2 and 4 is used to activate brake magnets for elevator drives with rated currents of 0.25 - 1.25 A Structure
The brake control 2 and 4 consists of a control board, a power lter and the connection terminals.
The components are mounted on a steel bracket and covered with a perspex sheet to prevent human contact with live parts. Operation
The direct current for the brake magnets is generated via a semi-controlled bridge rectier. The bridge rectier is activated by a phase-control module. The bridge rectier is equipped with a free wheeling diode as well as a varistor protection circuit at the output. An integra ted power lter ensures compliance with the EMC limit values. After applying the mains voltage (230 V AC), there is
an output voltage according to Table 1 at the output of terminal 10 - and terminal 20 + . Connecting connections 10 and 22 reduces the output voltage after approx. 1 second to approx. retentive voltage.
Technical data Brake control 2 and brake control 4
Part number
Brake control 2
Brake control 2 60Hz
Brake control 4
65 100 27 68 0
6510 000 9262
6510 0009265
Nominal system voltage:
230VAC
Line fuse (glass fuse on the PCB)
230V F 3,15A 50Hz
60Hz
50Hz
Output voltage (retentive voltage)*
90V
90V
144V
Overexcitation voltage*
180V
180V
200V
Frequency of system voltage:
Output current
max. 2,5A
Activation period
100% ED
Type of protection
IP00
Ambient operating temperature
0° - 50°C
Relative air humidity:
max. 70%
max. site altitude amsl EMV check Dimensions L*B*H Weight
2000m without derating (derating above this to 3500m: derating 1% pro 100m The requirements of EN 12015 and EN 12016 are complied with 180mm*120mm*103mm 1,1 kg
* all data refer to the rated connection voltage
88
Issue 09/2015
Drive Accessories
BSV1 s e i r o s s e s s A e v i r D
The brake control BSV1 is designed for activating brake magnets at rated currents of 2.0 A to 7.8 A. With BSV 1 the preselected current will always ow independent of line voltage uctuations. The
effective force of the brake magnets and consequently their noise response during activation can be inuenced by means of the current to be set through jumpers. Conguration
The brake control BSV1 consists of the power part, the control board and the lter board. All parts are
mounted on a heat sink, including the terminals for the main connections. The heat sink is isolated from the remaining assemblies and is applied to protective earth potential (PE). The heat sink is also used for fastening the assembly in the control cabinet. Mode of operation
BSV1 is designed as current controller and has PI characteristic. The reference current value is generated on the control board. The desired continuous current (which normally corresponds to the holding current of the brake release magnets) is preselected by means of jumpers J1 and J2 in increments of 0.2 A in the range of 2 A to 7.8 A. Technical data of BSV1
Part number Nominal system voltage: Frequency of system voltage:
Supply voltage for internal power supply: Output current: (Stabilized) pick-up current: Mode of operation: Activation period: Max. operating frequency: Type of protection: Ambient operating temperature: Relative air humidity: max. site altitude amsl: EMV check: Dimensions L*B*H:
Weight www.liftequip.com
65 000 06 67 0 230 V AC – 15% to 400 V AC + 10%, 2- phase or phase – N (note operating
conditions of connected brake release magnets) 50 Hz bzw. 60 Hz 230V AC + 10% / - 15%, 50/60 Hz Continuous (stabilized) current is equivalent to holding current of brake: 2A
to 7.8 A, to be preselected in increments of 0.2 A. Twice the value of the preselected continuous current for one second S4 75% ED 260 circuits / hour IP00 0°C to 45°C max. 70% 2000 m without derating derating of 1% per 100m above 2000 m to 3500 m compliance with requirements of EN 12015 (interference) and EN 12016 (immunity). 165 x 200 x 93 mm 2,2 kg
89
UCM-Modul
Incl. Shaf Encoder s e i r o s s e s s A e v i r D
Control
The twin encoder is mounted in the sha. Our mounng-set consists of: • • •
An universal xing for the guide rails Toothed belt (length depends on the travel height) for the encoder drive Diverter pulleys for the sha pit.
The UCM-module has to be integrated in to the control. Due to the small dimensions of the module the installaon is very easy and doesn´t pose any problems.
For the operaon with an overspeed governor an addional emergency power supply is neccessary. Therefore the governor doesn´t stop the machi ne in case of power breakdown unless there is no error message.
Gearless machine
Geared machine incl. NBS
Geared machine without NBS
Hydraulic
1:1 - Stopping the machine - Activating the UCM brake device
- Bucher DSV-A3 valve
- Stopping the machine - Activating the UCM brake device
stopps the ow at the
piston
- Stopping the machine - activates locking device - activates safety gear
2:1 - activates locking device - activates safety gear
90
Issue 09/2015
UCM-Modul
Incl. Shaft Encoder s e i r o s s e s s A e v i r D
With our type-examinaon tested combinaon of UCM-module and twin sha encoder, fulllment of EN81-A3 is very easy.
This soluon can be integrated very fast and easy in rope elevators and also in hydraulic elevators . Thanks to its autonomous operaon the module can be used universally with almost any controller and EN81/A3 cered emergency stop facilies.
Technical data
Supply voltage Power consumption Safety circuit voltage Triggering speed max. Triggering distance max. Triggerung time max. Speed max. Type of incremental encoder Travel height
24V 4W 230V 0,2 m/s 100 mm 50 ms 3,5 m/s HTL-1024 Imp./U. 55 m (higher travel heights on request)
And that´s how it works: The device monitors the movement of the car t hrough two independent evaluaon channels. The speed and traveling distance are monitored as from the start of the travel operaon. As soon as the door contact is interrupted and the speed exceeds a value of 0.2 m/s, or the covered distance is greater than 100 mm, safety relays will be turned o. The redundant encoder system consists of two encoders and has a belt crack monitoring incl. safety switch.
www.liftequip.com
91
92
Issue 09/2015
Frequency Inverter
MFC and MFR r e t r e v n I y c n e u q e r F
MFC 20/21, Product description
94
MFC 30/31, Product description
96
MFR 5.5, 7.5, 18, with Regeneration
www.liftequip.com
• Product description
98
Plug & Play Cable sets
101
93
Frequency Inverter
MFC 20/21 r e t r e v n I y c n e u q e r F
Current vector-controlled frequency inverters from LiftEquip are designed for controlling asynchronous (MFC 20) or synchronous (MFC 21) drives. Frequency inverter package In addition to the inverter, it contains the mains lter and the power choke for connecting to TN, TT and IT power supply systems. The connection is established via the parallel or the DCP interface. The braking resistor is supplied in a separate housing. Safe evacuation and maintenance In the event of failure of the power supply, a single-phase UPS (uninterruptible power supply) enables emergency operation. If, during maintenance, the controller is switched-off and the operational brake of a synchronous gearless machine is released, an optional coasting device limits the car speed to safe values by connecting an additional resistor. Fast start-up The data sets of our motors are stored entirely in the device. You can thus easily and quickly select the relevant motor. Special and time-consuming motor parameterisation is thereby avoided. The motor data of third-party motors is determined through autotuning. Simple parameter entry The MFC 20/21 inverter is equipped with a control panel with a two-line LCD display. Parameters such as speed, acceleration, jerk, rated motor speed, number of encoder marks, traction sheave diameter, etc., can be entered directly in physical values
94
Issue 09/2015
Frequency Inverter
MFC 20/21 r e t r e v n I y c n e u q e r F
Technical data Inverter type MFC 20/21-... Motor power
[kW]
15
32
48
60
105
7,5
14
24,5
28,5
49
INPUT DATA (MAINS SIDE) Line voltage range
[V]
Nominal input current
[A]
16
3 AC 380, -10 % bis 415, +10 % 27 43 52 92
Maximum input current
[A]
26
42
64
95
145
Line fuses AFF (external)*
[A]
25
40
63
80
125 **
Conductor cross section
[mm²]
2,5
6
10
16
25
OUTPUT DATA (MOTOR SIDE) Nominal output voltage Nominal output current, Irated Maximum output current for 10 s, Imax Nominal output power Maximum output power for 10 s
3 AC 350
[V] [A]
18
32
50
60
115
[A]
30
48
75
110
180
[kVA]
11
20
31
36
70
[kVA]
18,5
30
46
60
110
Conductor cross section
[mm²]
2,5
6
10
16
35
Loss at rated power
[W]
350
600
900
1200
2100
0,97
0,97
0,97
0,97
0,97
[mm]
305
305
330
334
440
[mm]
345
345
460
523
900
[mm]
207
207
223
295
278
[mm]
+ 70
+ 70
+ 70 0 100 / 100
0
Total efciency
MECHANICAL DATA Width Height Depth Additional for connector Minimum top / bottom clearance
[mm]
Fan power, free blowing
[m³/h]
140
140
360
360
620
[kg]
17
18
26
35
59
Weight * Duty class gR ** Line fuse internal class gRL
www.liftequip.com
95
Frequency Inverter
MFC 30/31 r e t r e v n I y c n e u q e r F
Plug&Play current vector-controlled frequency inverters from LiftEquip are the optimal addition for controlling asynchronous (MFC 30) or synchronous (MFC 31) drives. Ready-to-install inverter package In addition to the inverter, it contains the brake controller, the mains lter, the power choke and the travel contactors completely wired and integrated in the housing for connection to TN, TT and IT power supply systems. The connection is established via the parallel or the DCP interface. The braking resistor is supplied in a separate housing. EN81-A3 With integrated speed monitoring and the standard HSD circuit board, our MFC 30/31 frequency inverter, when used together with a suitable controller, is ideal for satisfying the requirements of EN81-A3. Safe evacuation and maintenance In the event of a power failure, emergency operation is possible via a UPS (uninterruptible power supply). If, during maintenance, the controller is switched-off and the operational brake of a synchronous gearless machine is released, an optionally available coasting device limits the car speed by connecting an additional resistor. Simple parameter entry The MFC 30/31 inverter is equipped with a control panel with a twoline LCD display. Parameters such as speed, acceleration, jerk, rated motor speed, number of encoder marks, traction sheave diameter, etc., can be entered directly in physical values. Ad di ti on al s afety Our inverter package controls the release of the operational brake via the integrated control unit. The brake monitoring switches of our drives (version SA3) for evaluating the brake condition must be connected to the controller in accordance with EN 81. The integrated travel contactors are also monitored for "switching of the contactors after change of run direction" as set out in EN 81. Fast start-up The data sets of our motors are stored entirely in the device. The motor data of third-party motors is determined through autotuning.
96
Issue 09/2015
Frequency Inverter
MFC 30/31 r e t r e v n I y c n e u q e r F
Technical data Inverter type MFC 30/31-... Motor power
[kW]
10
15
26
40
60
50R
100R 155R 310R
5
7,5
11
18
28,5
18
36
60
105
Input data (mains side)
Line voltage range
[V]
3 AC 380, -10 % bis 415, +10 %
Nominal input current
[A]
10
16
23
34
52
36
72
105
180
Maximum input current
[A]
17
26
38
55
95
85
170
315
630
Line fuses AFF (internal)
[A]
25*
25
40
63
80
80
135
315
400
Conductor cross section
[mm²]
2,5
2,5
4
6
16
10
25
35
95
Output data (motor side)
Nominal output voltage
[V]
Nominal output current, Irated
[A]
12
18
27
42
60
35
64
104
180
Maximum output current for 10 s, I max [A]
18
30
43
67
110
75
150
225
450
Nominal output power
[kW]
7,2
11
16
25
36
24
48
81
140
Maximum output power for 10 s
[kVA]
11
18,5
26
40
60
51
102
187
375
Conductor cross section
[mm²]
2,5
2,5
4
10
16
6
16
35
95 / 2x35
Loss at rated power
[W]
220
330
500
800
1200 1500 3000
6000
6000
0,97
0,97
0,97
0,97
0,97
0,94
0,94
0,94
0,94
344
401
600
1000
1400
Total efciency
3 AC 350 - 10
3 AC 440
3 AC 450
Mechanic al data
Width
[mm]
244
309
309
333
Height
[mm]
387
715
715
1090 1263 1105 1950
2200
2200
Depth
[mm]
260
263
263
270
340
284
470
600
600
[m³/h]
80
140
140
360
360
360
700
1000
1000
[kg]
19
35
38
55
81
80
195
460
750
Fan power, free blowing Weight
* Line fuses AFF (external), duty class gR
www.liftequip.com
97
Frequency Inverter
MFR5.5, 7.5, 18 with regeneration r e t r e v n I y c n e u q e r F
A very compact device for inverter and regenerative mode
The patented, energy-regenerating MFR frequency inverters from LiftEquip are the optimal addition for the energyefcient control of synchronous drives. Ready-to-install inverter package
The MFR frequency inverters include energy recovery, electronic brake controllers, mains lter, power choke and the
electronic travel contactors. Control takes place via parallel, DCP or CANopen interface. EN81-A3
Electronic travel contactors and an electronic brake controller (within the standard scope of supply) enable a uniquely fast shutdown time of the drive. With our integrated speed monitoring and a suitable controller, you have the safest and fastest solution for satisfying EN81-A3. Energy-saving functio n
In addition to energy recovery, our MFR inverters also offer the possibility to further save energy in standby mode (approx. 17 watt). Simple parameter entry
The MFC inverter is equipped with a control panel with a two-line LCD display. Parameters such as speed, acceleration, jerk, rated motor speed, number of encoder marks,
traction sheave diameter, etc., can be entered directly in physical values. Remote parameterisation via DCP and CANopen is possible. Ad di ti onal s afety
Our inverter package controls the release of the operational brake via the integrated control unit. The brake monitoring switches of our drives, for evaluating the brake condition, can be connected to the inverter in accordance with EN 81. Fast start-up
The data sets of our motors are stored entirely in the device. Third-party motors can be matched to the inverter by entering the motor data.
Interfaces
• CANopen - Position Mode - Velocity Mode • DCP - 03 - 04 • Parallel The motor parameters can be programmed on request.
98
Issue 09/2015
Frequency Inverter
MFR 5.5, 7.5, 18 with regeneration r e t r e v n I y c n e u q e r F
Technical data Inverter type MFR Motor power
[kW]
5.5 5,5
7.5 7,5
18 18,5
INPUT DATA (MAINS SIDE) Line voltage range Line frequency Continuous input current (thermal) Maximum input current
[V] [Hz] [A] [A]
3 AC 380, -10 % up to 460, +15 % nominal 50, range 48 ... 63 10 14 36 20 30 75
OUTPUT DATA (MOTOR SIDE) Nominal output voltage
[V]
Nominal output current, Irated Maximum output current for 3 s, Imax Maximum output power for 3 s Conductor cross section Loss at rated power
[A] [A] [kVA] [mm²] [W]
Total efciency
Type of protection
3 AC 0…input voltage (max. 340 V for motor design) 12 18 42 21,8 33,5 75 11,5 17,5 35 2,5 2,5 10 350 500 1200 0,95 0,95 0,95 IP21
MECHANICAL DATA Width Height Depth Minimum top / bottom clearance Fan power, free blowing Weight
[mm] [mm] [mm]
330 614,5 196
[mm] [m³/h] [kg]
140 18,4
330 614,5 196 0/100 140 18,4
353 971,8 207,5 100/100 300 43,5
Radio interference (emission) according to EN12015 Immunity to EN12016 Power dissipation in standby mode max. 17 W PlugPlay device (complete inverter with regeneration)
www.liftequip.com
99
100
Issue 09/2015
Plug & Play Cable sets
Accessories MFC 30/31 r e t r e v n I y c n e u q e r F Cable W1
Cable W2
Cable W3
Cable W5
Cable W10
Cable W11
DIN-rail plug XE1, XE2, XE3
Shield clamps 4mm, 7mm, 8mm
Do you want to save assembly time? Do you want to avoid unnecessary error diagnostic caused by clamp faults? Use our Plug&Play cable sets With these completely ready-for-use cable sets our MFC frequency inverters are ready for operation at your installation rapidly. You can connect DCP3/DCP4 and the parallel interface with your control
system fast and safely. All necessary accessories, such as DIN-rail plugs and shield clamps, are included in our cable sets. Content Cable Sets (Length: 10 meter) Type of interface
Parallel
DCP 03/04
Lisa
8807 308 10 200 8807 308 10 100 8807 308 10 300
Cable W1
Control Voltage
X
X
X
Cable W2
X1a
X
X
X
Cable W3
X1b
X
X
X
Cable W5
DCP
---
X
---
Cable W10
Floor Selection
---
---
X
Cable W11
Brake
---
---
X
DIN-rail plug XE1
10-pin female connector
X
X
X
DIN-rail plug XE2
7-pin female connector
X
X
X
DIN-rail plug XE3
14-pin male connector
X
X
X
shield-clamps
4mm, for Cable W5
---
X
---
shield-clamps
4mm, for Cable W10
---
---
X
shield-clamps
7mm, for Cable W3
X
X
X
shield-clamps
8mm, for Cable W2
X
X
X
www.liftequip.com
101
102
Issue 09/2015
Car Sling
Car Sling TCS The exible one for medium loads g n i l S r a C
TCS25/40/60
www.liftequip.com
• Product description
104
• Weight mass
105
103
Car Sling
TCS 25/40/60 Product Description g n i l S r a C
Our car sling TCS is designed for safety gear masses m ges up to a maximum of 6500 kg depending on cabin width, operating speed and car sling type.
High Safety
Progressive Safety Gear, upwards
Great Stability Multiple bent sheet steel proles in
the top and bottom beam ensure the required stability. Polyamide-pulleys
Progressive Safety Gear, Down
are used with suspension 2:1. Variable Height Adjustment
Variable Height Adjustment
The side beams consist of 2 sheet
Quick and Easy Assembly
steel proles which are screwed to gether. They are xed at the top and
the bottom beam and a punched grid allows their length to be adjusted in
Optimal Adjustment to Your Lift
steps of 25 mm. Excellent Driving Comfort
The cabin is bedded on compression springs, which are mounted in a spe-
Excellent Driving Comfort
cially isolated U-prole. This results
in an outstanding vibration isolation. Roller guides instead of sliding guides can be supplied on demand.
Great Stability Car Sling TCS 25
Compact Design
With safety gears mounted in the top and the bottom beam compact overall dimensions of the car sling are possible High Safety
The complete car sling as well as its single parts were calculated on the computer with the nite elements
method (FEM). They are therefore veriably safe!
Optimal Adjustment to Your Lift A great variety of conguration
Special Versions
- Load sensor for overload
alternatives make an optimal custo- - Rope pulleys for 2:1 suspension xed misation to many requests possible. in a pulley carrier on the top beam Special versions are shown overleaf. - Rope pulley isolation (SA 9) - Braking system (upwards, SA 10) Colour - Without car isolation for goods lifts The products shown are available in - Buffer plates in addition mouse-grey - RAL 7005 - as stan- Extended governor rope end (SA 1) dard and with zinc coated parts. - Travelling cable mounting (SA 11) - Compensation chain mounting (SA 11)
Quick and Easy Assembly
The true to size production of all parts and a small number of components permit an easy and quick assembly in next to no time.
104
Issue 09/2015
Car Sling
TCS 25/40/60 Weight Mass g n i l S r a C
Car Sling TCS - Gradation in following sizes
TCS 25
TCS 40
TCS 60
Rated load Q [kg]
≤ 1600
≤ 2000
≤ 3200
v [m/s]
≤ 1,6
≤ 2,5
≤ 2,5
mges [kg]
≤ 3000
≤ 5000
≤ 6500
Car width [mm]
900 ÷ 1600 900 ÷ 1900 900 ÷ 2500 2200 up to 2700 in a raster of 25 mm
Car height [mm]
Car Sling TCS 25 Suspension 1:1
Rope attachm. + Hitch plates Suspension 2:1
2 Stk. rope pulley 360 Ø - PA/steel 2 Stk. rope pulley 450 Ø - PA/steel
CW 900
CW 1100
CW 1300
CW 1600
kg kg
156
167
178
195
kg kg kg
150
172
189
40 161
39 / 91 61 / 155
Safety gear, buffer plates, sliding guides, car isolation
kg
79
Braking system SA 10
kg
20
Car Slin g TCS 40 Suspension 1:1
Rope attachm. + Hitch plates Suspension 2:1
2 Stk. rope pulley 540 Ø - steel 2 Stk. rope pulley 450 Ø - PA/steel
CW 1100
CW 1300
CW 1600
CW 1900
kg kg
253
267
289
311
kg kg kg
241
277
299
60 256
196 61 / 155
Safety gear, buffer plates, sliding guides, car isolation
kg
144
Braking system SA 10
kg
40
Car Sling TCS 60 Suspension 1:1
Rope attachm. + Hitch plates Suspension 2:1
2 Stk. rope pulley 540 Ø - steel 2 Stk. rope pulley 450 Ø - PA/steel
CW 1100
CW 1300
CW 1600
CW 1900
kg kg
416
446
491
551
kg kg kg
416
491
551
60 446
196 61 / 155
Safety gear, buffer plates, sliding guides, car isolation
kg
144
Braking system 10
kg
40
www.liftequip.com
105
106
Issue 09/2015
Counterweight
GTK 700/1050/1370 The variable solution for many installation situations t h g i e w r e t n u o C
GTK 700/1050/1370
www.liftequip.com
• Product description
108
• Special Versions
109
107
Counterweight
GTK 700/1050/1370 Product Description t h g i e w r e t n u o C
For a counterweight mass of up to 6460 kg in various versions The coun terweight frames calculated for an overall mass up to 6240 kg (special llers). The various n ecessary widths, gauges between rails and suspensions (1:1 and 2:1) are available in the modular system:
High Safety
Quick and Easy Assembly
Governor rope anchorange, top beam
Variable Filling
Optimum adjustment to your installation With the variations in length, width and gauge be tween rails, the counterweight is an optimum t for the most diverse project planning dimensions. In the standard versions, the counterweight frames with rope attachment for 1:1 arrangement or rope pulleys are available for 2:1 arrangement. Besides the standard gauge between rails of 700, 1050 and 1370 mm, other clearance dimensions can be produced as well.
Great Stability
Optimal Adjustment to Your Lift
Counterweight frames GTK
Additional options Various special versions such as sliding and pulley guides, and a safety gear on the counterweight can be selected. For aesthetic purposes, the counterweight can be encased in a glass shaft. Diverse accessories for the mounting of compensation chains and compensating ropes are selectable. The path cover in the pit area in com pliance with
EN81-1, adjusted to the mass of
the counterweight, is available in the program. Variable lling The two lengths for a multilayer lling with max. 30 or 40 levels (a layer is 60 mm) and various ller materials such as Gussolith, steel and lead allow variable adjustment to the dimensions of
Counterweight (CW) GTK - Data table 2:1 Width of CW [mm] GTK 700 GTK 1050 GTK 1050 GTK 1370
135 135 200 270
Total Mass [kg]1
Pulleys [mm]
≤ 1650
360
≤ 2435
360
≤ 3630
450 / 540
≤ 6240
540
the shaft. High level of safety The frame construction of angular sheet metal proles in the top and bottom beams and reinforced knot junctions and their connections were calculated and optimised with the Finite Element Method (FEM), whereby the necessary proofs of solidity were also provided.
Filler materials • Steel • Gussolith • Concrete • Lead
1
Total Mass (ller+frame)
108
Issue 09/2015
Counterweight
GTK 700/1050/1370 Special Versions
Drawing for 2:1
Counterweight Mass
The following approximated values do include the masses of the counterweight frame, the hitch plate or the rope pulley, one or two buffer
t h g i e w r e t n u o C
plates and the sliding guides: GTK 700/135: 159 kg, 1:1 suspension; 187 kg, 2:1 suspension; GTK 1050/135: 184 kg, 1:1 suspension; 211 kg, 2:1 suspension; GTK 1050/200: 210 kg, 1:1 suspension; 287 kg, 2:1 suspension; GTK 1370/270: 374 kg, 1:1 suspension; 422 kg, 2:1 suspension.
Colour
The products shown are available in mousegrey - RAL 7005 - as standard and with zinc coated parts. The variable gauges are: • GTK 700/135: 612 ≤ gauge ≤ 700 mm • GTK 1050/135/200: 701 ≤ gauge ≤ 1050 mm • GTK 1370/270: 1051 ≤ gauge ≤ 1370 mm • Special Versions
• Roller guides • Rope pulleys for 2:1 suspension xed in a pulley carrier on the top beam • Progressive safety gears (type 0, 1 and 2) • Buffer plates additionally • Panelling of counterweight on one or on both sides • Compensation chain or compensation rope mounting
www.liftequip.com
109
110
Issue 09/2015
Safety Gears
Progressive safety/Braking system s r a e G y t e f a S
6071/0 bis /3 • Product description
www.liftequip.com
112
111
Safety Gears
6071/0 bis /3
EN81-
20/ -50
Product Description
-conform
s r a e G The safety device can be deployed y t e as a progressive safety gear or f a braking device. They are 2 iden S tical components but turned in their installation position by 180°, and depending on how they are deployed they have a set braking or gripping force. In everyday language, the safety device is also referred to as a jaw.
Functional description In the event of overspeed, the safety gear rope connected with the grip wedge on the safety gear frame is blocked. The grip wedge is held in place while the elevator car continues to move. A transport roller in the grip wedge draws the grip wedge in the direction opposing the moving direction of the elevator car on a chamfer on the jaw body between the rail and jaw body. In doing so, it expands the spring range of the jaw body. The jamming effect of the jaw body is congured in such a way that the fric tional forces between the grip wedge, counter wedge and rail decelerate the elevator car to a standstill. The jaw is released by moving the elevator car in the opposite direction. Here, the jaw body slips back over the chamfer on the counter wedge until the counter wedge is pressed by the return spring into its initial situation and thus releases the rail.
with rated load at the guide rails and to hold it there (this also applies in the event of failure of the suspension gear). The regulations of EN 81-1:98 are to be adhered to.
• Operating mode (dry, oiled) Distinction by deployment accor ding to the application
Safety device / progressive safety gear (AFV) for safety gear operation downwards. Safety device with function as bra - Progressive safety gears are type king system (ABV) approved safety devices with type On the elevator car, a safety braking approval marking and CE marking device is prescribed that takes effect in accordance with EN 81-1:98. in the upward direction as a protecThe progressive safety gear on the tion device against overspeed for elevator car may only take effect in the elevator car moving upwards. On a downward direction and must be reaching the tripping speed on the able to brake the loaded elevator car speed governor, this must be able to from the tripping speed of the speed brake the empty elevator car at the governor and hold it in place. guide rails. The regulations of EN 81-1:98 are to In country-specic certications you Safety device with function as pro- be adhered to. hesitate to contact us.. gressive safety gear (AFV) On the elevator car and when required on the counterweight, a safety braking system is prescribed that takes effect in the downward direction as a safety device against the risk of falling. On reaching the tripping speed on the speed governor, this must be able to brake the elevator car
112
Distinction by construction size In ascending ord er accordi ng to power output (0, 1, 2, 3), corre sponding to the characteristics:
• Mass of car and load • Speed • Guide rail dimension and surface (drawn, machined)
Issue 09/2015
Safety Gears
6071/0 bis /3 Product Description
It em Desi gnati on
It em Desi gnati on
1 Jaw body 3 Seal 5 Counter wedge 7 Guide plate 9 Guide bracket 11 Safety gear roller 13 Grip wedge 15 Spacer sleeve 17 Slotted nut 19 Mounting borehole
2 Seal wire 4 Threaded bolts 6 Fork element 8 Stop bolt 10 Flat countersunk nib bolt 12 Limit stop 14 Compression spring 16 Split pin 18 Spring plate 20 Name plate
s r a e G y t e f a S
2
g
h
1 f
Item Designation
1 Rail blade thickness 2 Guide blade width
e
k i m
l
n
Type 0, 1 2 3
a 50 50 60
b 64 64 82
c 31 31 40
d 106 106 132
e ~ 70 70 85
f 81 94 138
g 15 15 20
h 179 179 216
i 13 13 16,5
k Ø 22 22 28
l 4 4 11,5
m 170 170 195
n 192 192 233
Assignment of the safety devices to the rail blade thickness Type 6071/
Rail blade thickness [mm]
Safety gear
0 1 2 3
9 - 16 9 - 16 9 - 19 16 - 35
60 710 59 03 0 60 710 60 03 0 60 710 61 03 0 60 710 62 03 0
www.liftequip.com
Part number Braking System
60 710 63 03 0 60 710 64 03 0 60 710 65 03 0 60 710 66 03 0
113
114
Issue 09/2015
Overspeed Governor
GBTK 6023, 6023F, 6024 and Accessories r o n r e v o G d e e p s r e v O
www.liftequip.com
GBTK 6023
116
GBTK 6023 F
118
GBTK 6024 300S
119
Governor tensioning weight D200/D300
120
115
Overspeed Governor
GBTK 6023
EN81-
20/ -50 -conform
r o n Technical data r e v Pulley diameter D mm 300 o G Rated speed vrated m/s 2.5 d e e Tripping speed vT m/s 0.6 - 3.13 p s r e *with test groove diameter 170 mm v O
250* 2.0 0.5 - 2.6
Standard version as shown side on Options: - Remote tripping (blockable rocker with voltage) - Blocking device (blockable rocker without voltage) - Bracket with nal limit switch OFF - Many other functions on request
1
2
3
vN ≤ 2,5 m/s
4
Version by EN 81-20/-50
11
10
5 6
9
7
8
116
1
Cam disc
7
Lever with rubber ring and locking plate
2
Governor pulley
8
Locking position switch
3
Captive-type adjusting screw
9
Limit stop
4
Cast-on lug
10 Latch on rocker
5
Cap spring
11 Non-locking position switch
6
Pulley with rubber ring on rocker
Issue 09/2015
Overspeed Governor
GBTK 6023 in EN81-A3
EN81-
20/ -50
-conform
Inductive sensor for monitoring the plunger position
Magnet 12V 100 % duty cycle
Rocker Blocking device - Blockable rocker without voltage
Safety contact - optional
r o n r e v o G d e e p s r e v O
Safety contact with preswitching and electrical reset - optional
Technical data
vN ≤ 2,5 m/s FHmax= 175 m Use as a tripping element as part of the protection device against unintended movements of the elevator car in acc. with EN 81-1:1998+A3:2009-9.11.
Pulley diameter D
mm
300
Rated speed vrated
m/s
≤ 2.5
Tripping speed vT
m/s
0.6 - 3.13
Max. engaging time of magnet
ms
39
Max. total travel
mm
310
GBTK 6023 in EN81-A3 compliant and EX version
EX
Explosion proved
vN= 1,0 m/s
Technical data Use as a tripping element as part of the protection device against unintended movements of the elevator car in acc. with EN 81-1:1998+A3:2009-9.11.
The EX evaluation of this component is conducted within the framework of the overall EX evaluation of the installation.
www.liftequip.com
Pulley diameter D
mm
300
Rated speed vrated
m/s
1.0
Tripping speed vT
m/s
1.2 - 1.3
Max. engaging time of magnet
ms
39
Max. total travel
mm
310
117
Overspeed Governor
GBTK 6023 F
EN81-
20/ -50 -conform
r o n r e v o G d e e p s r e v O
Standard version with electrical remote reset - Hardened groove (wear-resistant) - Finish-wired and tested - Connections to system plug connector - Specially developed for MRL installations Options: - Remote tripping (blockable rocker with voltage) - Blocking device (blockable rocker without voltage) - Many other functions on request
Technical data Pulley diameter D
mm
200
Rope diameter d
mm
6.5
Rated speed vrated
m/s
≤ 1.6
Tripping speed vT
m/s
0.7 - 2.09
GBTK 6023 in EN81-A3 compliant version
Inductive sensor for monitoring the plunger position
Magnet 12V 100 % duty cycle
Blocking device Blockable rocker without voltage Rocker Safety contact - optional
Safety switch with preswitching and electrical reset
Use as a tripping element as part of the protection device against unintended movements of the elevator car in acc.
Bracket with integrated nal limit switch OFF
with EN 81-1:1998+A3:2009-9.11.
Max. engaging time of magnet Max. total travel
40 ms 205 mm
Technical details as for above version
118
Issue 09/2015
Overspeed Governor
GBTK 6024 300S
EN81-
20/ -50 -conform
r o n r e v o G d e e p s r e v O
vN = 2,00 - 4,00 m/s
300S: 379 mm
3 0 0 S : 4 8 8
m m
View with encoder mounting, left-hand version
300S: 102 mm
- Left- / right-hand version available - Encoder mounting optional
Technical data Type
300S
Pulley diameter D with 8 mm Drako 300T
mm
304
Axle load FA max
N
12.000
Rated speed vrated
m/s
2,0 - 8,0
Tripping speed vT
m/s
2,35 - 10,5
Braking force FB
N
400 - 2100
11 12
10 9
1 2 3
8 7 6
4
1
Cover for encoder
7
Rope slip-off guard
2
Shaft cover
8
Cam, downwards
3
Connection for encoder
9
Tripping wheel for rope brake
4
Type plate
10
Tripping wheel for pre-switching
5
Electr. connection
11 Cover plate
6
Cam, upwards
12 Governor pulley
5
www.liftequip.com
119
Overspeed Governor
Governor tensioning weight D200 Accessories r o n r e v o G d e e p s r e v O
Technical data Tension force
500 N
Governor rope diameter
6.5 mm
Governor tensioning pulley
D=200/ 6.5-PA
Rated speed vrated
≤ 1.6 m/s
Travel height, TH
≤ 100 m
Type of protection, rope breaking switch Rope engagement point (back of rail) Distance X Guide rail 150 mm 200 mm 250 mm
IP 54 (optional IP67) 40 mm
T70
T89 / T90
T125 / T127
●
---
---
●
●
●
●
●
●
- Galvanised sheet metal design - Mounting in left- and right-hand versions possible → On-site modication possible! - Bracket for mounting the overspeed governor to the guide rail available
120
Issue 09/2015
Overspeed Governor
Governor tensioning weight D300 Accessories Technical data
right
Tension force
648 N / 870 N
Governor rope diameter
6.5 mm / 8.0 mm
Governor tensioning pulley
D=300: 6.5-PA / 8.0-PA
Rated speed vrated
≤ 2.5 m/s
Travel height, TH
≤ 175 m
Type of protection, rope breaking switch
IP 67 or EEx d IIc T6
r o n r e v o G d e e p s r e v O
Rope engagement point (back 40 mm of rail)
150 mm
●
T89 / T90 ---
Distance X 200 mm
●
●
●
---
250 mm Distance X 300 mm with exten- 350 mm sion 400 mm
●
●
●
---
-------
-------
●
●
●
●
●
●
Rail width - Easy to install thanks to individual attached
weight plates
www.liftequip.com
T70
T125 / T127 ---
T140-1 / T140-2 ---
121
122
Issue 09/2015
Buffer
Oil and Spring Buffers r e f f u B
www.liftequip.com
Oil Buffers 01 - 03
124
Oil Buffers 04 - 05
125
Spring Buffers
126
Buffer Uprights
128
123
Buffer
Oil Buffers O1 - O3
EN81-
20/ -50 -conform
r e f f u B
124
Issue 09/2015
Buffer
EN81-
20/ -50
Oil Buffers O4 - O5
-conform
r e f f u B
www.liftequip.com
125
Buffer
Spring Buffer
EN81-
20/ -50
-conform
r e f f u B
Spring Buffer Height Travel Buffer hub max. Diameter of Buffer Rated speed max. applied load Permissible total load (P+Q) min.-max.
H h hmax D
v m/s
mm mm mm mm m/s 1,0 0,7 0,63 0,4
Dimensions
P1 120 110 100
126
P2-SA1 220 200 180
140 0,7 kg -500 - 3200
1,0 500- 2600 500 - 2962
mm d d1 d2 L L1
Part No.
P2 210
60 219 02 03 0
--14 215 165 60 219 03 03 0
60 219 08 03 0
Issue 09/2015
Buffer
Spring Buffer
EN81-
20/ -50 -conform
r e f f u B
Spring Buffer Height Travel Buffer hub max. Diameter of Buffer Rated speed max. applied load Permissible total load (P+Q) min.-max.
H h hmax D
v m/s
mm mm mm mm m/s 1,0 0,7 0,63 0,4
Dimensions
100 * 80 A 85
www.liftequip.com
165 * 80 C-SA1 92
100
165 1,0
kg 190 - 1000 190 - 1344 190 - 751 112 - 996 mm
d d1 d2 L L1 Part No.
165 * 80 C 86 80 72
568 - 2534 568 - 3300 520 - 2978 434 - 3958 35 18 18 205 165
6021 000 0572
6021 000 0594
6021 000 0595
127
Buffer Uprights
Buffer Uprights r e f f u B
2 1
128
Part number.
Type
Spring buffer perm. Q+P 2600 kg L
Oil bufer perm. Q+P 3020kg L
d in mm
6010 000 9441
FK
715
315
82.5
6010 000 9440
GG
715
315
82.5
60 100 45 56 0
FK
73
73
76.1
60 100 46 56 0
GG
73
73
76.1
Issue 09/2015
Buffer Uprights
Telescopic Buffer Uprights r e f f u B
Heights Adjustable Range
Steel thickness Part No.
• • •
Telescopic Buffer Upright Buffer Upright 530 Buffer Upright 930 330 mm - 530 mm 570 mm - 930 mm 200 mm (40mm-steps) 360 mm (45mm-steps) 4 mm 4 mm 6010 000 9403 6010 000 9400
maximum load: 2600 kg (each buffer upright)
speeds of up to max. 1 m/s suitable for spring buffer P2 and P1
Mounting advantage The height can be adjusted to the shaft pit
• •
www.liftequip.com
to compensate tolerances to adjust the height when speed has changed
129
130
Issue 09/2015
Guides
Roller Guides and Sliding Guides s e d i u G
www.liftequip.com
Roller Guides ARO D60 / RTK 100
132
Roller Guides RT 18 / RTK 300
133
Roller Guides WRG
134
Sliding Guides I, PUR I, Eco, Ultramid, PUR II
136
Sliding Guides II, Nylon, Aclamid, GG-25I / II
138
Lubricators for Sliding Guides
140
131
Guides
Roller Guides AR ARO D60 / RTK 100 s e d i u G
AR AR0 D60 Roller Guide Counterweight Counterweight (GG)
Roller Guide AR0 D60
RTK 100 Roller Guide Car (FK) & Counterweight Counterweight (GG)
Roller Guide RTK 100
6073078010
60730002940
Speed vn max. -> FK
---
Speed vn max. -> FK
1,75 m/s
Speed vn max. -> GG
2,5 m/s
Speed vn max. -> GG
3,0 m/s
Width of guide blade SKB [mm] Counterweight Force G [kN] [kN]
5 - 16 35
Width of guide blade SKB [mm] Conterweight Force G [kN]
Guiding Force Pstat [N] Guiding Force Pdyn [N]
132
9 - 16 50 1250 // 1350 500 // 600 Issue 09/2015
Guides
Roller Guides RT 18 / RT RTK K 300 s e d i u G
RT 18 Roller Guide Car (FK)
Roller GuideRT 18
RTK 300 Roller Guide Car (FK)
Roller Guide RTK 300
6073008010
60730002079
Speed vn max. -> FK
3,0 m/s
Speed vn max. -> FK
10 m/s
Speed vn max. -> GG
---
Speed vn max. -> GG
---
Width of guide blade SKB [mm]
16
Width of guide blade SKB [mm]
Guiding Force Pstat [N] Guiding Force Pdyn [N]
www.liftequip.com
2500 800
16 // 19 // 28,6
Guiding Force Pstat [N]
3000
Guiding Force Pdyn [N]
depends on spring calibrationg
133
Guides
Roller Guides WRG s e d i u G
WRG 125 125 Roller Guide Car (FK)
134
WRG 150 150 Roller Guide Car (FK) & Counterweight (GG)
Issue 09/2015
Guides
Roller Guides WRG s e d i u G
WRG 200 200 Roller Guide Car (FK)
WRG Roller Guides WRG 80 60730009208
WRG 100 60730009209
WRG 125 60730009210
WRG 150 60730009206
WRG 200 60730009211
Speed vn max. -> FK
---
---
---
3,5 m/s
5,0 m/s
Speed vn max. -> GG
2,5 m/s
3,5 m/s
7,0 m/s
7,0 m/s
---
Width of the guide blade SKB [mm]
9 16
9 16
9 16
16 19
16 19
Counterweight Force G [N]
100
100
100
100
---
Guiding Force Pstat [N]
---
---
---
3000
3000
Guiding Force Pdyn [N]
---
---
---
900
900
A [mm] [mm]
80
100
125
150
200
B [mm]
126
143,5
151
200
250
C [mm]
175
150
150
220
220
D [mm]
200
228
266
300+SKB
555
Dimensions
www.liftequip.com
135
Guides
Sliding Guides I PUR I, Eco s e d i u G Sliding Guide: Car (FK) Eco
Sliding Guide: Counterweight (GG) PUR I
Sliding Guides PUR I Speed vn max. -> FK Speed vn max. -> GG Width of guide blade SKB [mm] Counterweight Force G [kN
136
6073073010 --1,75 m/s 5 20
Sliding Guides Eco Speed vn max. -> FK Speed vn max. -> GG Width of guide blade SKB [mm]
Guiding Force Pstat [N] Guiding Force Pdyn [N]
6073 607300 0009 0922 222 2 1,0 m/s --9 1700 600
6073 607300 0009 0920 204 4 1,0 m/s --16 1700 600
Issue 09/2015
Guides
Sliding Guides I Ultramid, PUR II s e d i u G Sliding Guide: Car (FK) & Counterweight (GG) Ultramid
Sliding Guide: Car (FK) PUR II
Sliding Guides Ultramid Speed vn max. -> FK Speed vn max. -> GG Width of guide blade SKB [mm]
Counter Weight Force G [kN]
Guiding Force Pstat [N] Guiding Force Pdyn [N] www.liftequip.com
6073069010 --3,5 m/s 5 50 -----
6073063010 1,75 m/s 3,5 m/s 9 100 1700 600
Sliding Guides PUR II 6073027010 1,75 m/s --16 --1700 600
Speed vn max. -> FK Speed vn max. -> GG Width of tguide blade SKB [mm]
Guiding Force Pstat [N] Guiding Force Pdyn [N]
6073066010 1,75 m/s --16 2000 800
137
Guides
Sliding Guides II Nylon, Aclamid s e d i u G Sliding Guide: Car (FK) Nylon
Sliding Guide Nylon Speed vn max. -> FK Width of guide blade SKB [mm]
Guiding Force Pstat [N] Guiding Force Pdyn [N]
6073047010* 2,0 // 2,5 m/s 16 2500 // 2000 1000 // 800
Sliding Guide: Car (FK) Aclamid
Sliding Guide Aclamid 6073046010 2,0 // 2,5 m/s 16 2500 // 2000 1000 // 800
6073068010 Speed vn max. -> FK Width of guide blade SKB [mm]
Guiding Force Pstat [N] Guiding Force Pdyn [N]
1,0 // 1,75 m/s 16 6000 // 5000 3000 // 2500
* inkl. Befestigungsteile für Schmierapparat 60 740 04 01 0
138
Issue 09/2015
Guides
Sliding Guides II GG-25I, GG25 II s e d i u G Sliding Guide: Car (FK) GG-25 I
Sliding Guide GG-25 I Speed vn max. -> FK Width of guide blade SKB [mm]
Guiding Force Pstat [N] Guiding Force Pdyn [N]
www.liftequip.com
6073214240 0,63 m/s 16 8000 3500
Sliding Guide: Car (FK) GG-25 II
06240
13242
a
205
280
b
250
480
c
200
400
l
280
300
n
92
130
Sliding Guide GG-25 II 6073206240 Speed vn max. -> FK 0,63 m/s Width of guide blade SKB [mm] 16 Guiding Force Pstat [N] 18000 Guiding Force Pdyn [N] 7000
6073213242 0,63 m/s 28,6 34000 13000
139
Guides
Lubricators for Sliding Guides s e d i u G Lubricator 60740009201 for Sliding Guides PUR I 6073073010 Ultramid 6073069010 Ultramid 6073063010 Ultramid 6073027010 GG-25 II 6073213242
140
Lubricator 6074004010 for Sliding Guides Nylon 6073046010 Nylon 6073047010 GG-25 I 6073214240 GG-25 II 6073206240
Issue 09/2015
Guides
Lubricators for Sliding Guides s e d i u G
Sliding Guide Car With guide shoe HSM 6073208250
Lubricator AK10 6074009010 For sliding guide car
Oil drip receptacle (SKB = 5-16 mm)
60160006205
And Aclathan inserts 6073217240 (9 mm) 6073216240 (16 mm) (Mounting on bottom beam)
OPTIONAL:
Mounting elbow for mounting the lubricator AK10 above/below the car sling 60748902980 (Lubricator AK10 is available for every type of sliding guide)
Sliding Guide 6073208250 (Guide shoe) inkl. insert
Speed vn max. -> FK Speed vn max. -> GG Width of guide blade SKB [mm]
www.liftequip.com
0,5 - 2,0 m/s --5-16
141
142
Issue 09/2015
Rope Pulleys
Rope Pulleys and Accessories s y e l l u P e p o R
www.liftequip.com
Cast iron-/Polyamid-Pulleys
144
Accessories
145
143
Rope Pulleys
Cast iron-/Polyamid-Pulleys Roller bearings s y e l l u P e p o R
• Highest precision and smoothness • Extremely resilient • Extremely attractive price / performance
ratio
D [mm]
Ropes z*Ø RA [mm]
Bp35 [mm] Axle
Bearing Type
Part number
150
7x6
12
110
X
6310 2RS
6072 000 9255
150
10x6
12
145
Y
6310 2RS
6072 000 9229
150
12x6
10
145
Y
6310 2RS
6072 000 9265
2401
12x6
10
132
Z
6310 2RS
6250 000 0057
1
260
6*6,5
11
82
0
6310 2RS
6072 000 7798
3201
8*8
14
130
1
NSK 6310
6072 000 9341
3601
7*8
14
127
1
6310 2RS
60 720 76 42 0
360
7*8
15
118
2
6310 2RS
6072 000 3603
360
7*8
18
140
3
6310 2RS
60 720 54 42 0
2
360
7*8
18
140
3
NJ 310 E
60 720 60 42 0
3
360
z*d
-
140
3
6310 2RS
60 720 71 42 0
3604
z*d
-
140
3
NJ 310 E
60 720 71 42 0
400
4*10
18
90
4
6310 2RS
60 720 67 42 0
4001
8*10
18
163
5
6312 2RS
6072 000 9342
4501
7*10
18
160
5
6312 2RS
6072 000 4885
450
7*10
20
160
5
6312 2RS
6072 000 4884
450
7*10
18
160
5
6312 2RS
60 720 68 42 0
450
7*10
20
160
5
6312 2RS
60 720 55 42 0
450
7*10
20
160
5
NJ 312 E
60 720 62 42 0
450
8*10
18
160
5
6312 2RS
60 720 58 42 0
4503
z*d
-
160
5
6312 2RS
60 720 72 42 0
450
z*d
-
160
5
NJ 312 E
60 720 72 42 0
540
7*8
18
160
6
6216 2RSR
60 720 69 42 0
540
7*13
20,5
160
6
6216 2RSR
60 720 65 42 0
540
7*13
20,5
160
6
NJ 216 E
60 720 44 42 0
5403
z*d
-
160
6
6216 2RSR
60 720 73 42 0
4
540
z*d
-
160
6
NJ 216 E
60 720 73 42 0
540
8*13
20,5
190
7
6216 2RSR
60 720 66 42 0
5402
1
2
4
2
8*13
20,5
190
7
NJ 216 E
60 720 59 42 0
3
540
z*d
-
190
7
6216 2RSR
60 720 73 42 0
5404
z*d
-
190
7
NJ 216 E
60 720 73 42 0
6404
z*d
-
240
8
NJ 2218
6072 000 0984
4
z*d
-
240
9
NJ 224
6072 000 0976
740
Specialty: 1Polyamide-pulley, 2High load, 3Variabele*, 4Variabele* and High load, 5Overall width of rope pulley, incl. bearing *Variabele with grooves (z), groove diameter (d), groove distance (RA) .
144
Issue 09/2015
Rope Pulleys
Accessories s y e l l u P e p o R Axles for Rope Pul leys
Axle1
Length
Part number
X
147 mm
6072 000 9240
Y
182 mm
6072 000 9234
Z
200 mm
6250 000 0058
0
111 mm
6072 000 8541
166 mm
60 723 53 32 0
2
135 mm
6072 000 3604
3.0
190 mm
60 723 34 32 0
3.1
240 mm
60 723 50 32 0
4
132 mm
60 723 37 32 0
216 mm
60 723 35 32 0
240 mm
60 723 51 32 0
230 mm
60 723 47 32 0
260 mm
60 723 32 32 0
1
5 6 7
Ø-Axle
50 mm
60 mm 80 mm
8
90 mm
305 mm
6072 000 0981
9
120 mm
310 mm
6072 000 0980
1)
relevant axle-numers see page before
Axle Brackes
For Rope Pulley Ø 240 mm
Part number 40x3x65
6250 000 0059
Ø 360 mm
00 981 03 61 0
Ø 400 mm
00 981 03 61 0
Ø 450 mm
00 981 03 61 0
Ø 540 mm
00 981 04 61 0
Ø 640 mm
00 981 04 61 0
Ø 740 mm
00 981 05 61 0
Pedestal Bearing for Deection Pulley Fixed on Concrete Foundation (including axle)
For Axle
Part number
3
61 720 07 25 0
5
61 720 08 25 0
6
60 720 64 25 2
8
60 720 65 25 2
www.liftequip.com
145
146
Issue 09/2015
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A s r o o D
www.liftequip.com
Product Benefts
148
General Notes
149
Landing Door S8A
150
Car Door K8A
151
Project planning
152
Steel sheet/stainless steel doors - surfaces
154
Steel sheet/stainless steel doors - fre protection
155
Glass Doors
156
Door Sills
158
Door safety lock system
159
F9 Door Drive
160
Technical Information
161
Special versions
162
Structure of the landing door
164
Layout of the car door
165
Modernisation for Door Drive F9
167
147
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A
EN81-
20/ -50
Product Benets
-conform
s r o o D Design
Flexibility
Very wide and nely graded range of
Panelling in numerous surface designs, glass door panels, aluminium and stainless-steel door sills and surrounding invisible sill guides enable individual adaptation to the design requirements in the building
Safety Compliance with currently valid EU standards EN 81-1/2 and national safety regulations High-quality door safety lock systems and short door reversal times for the safety of passengers and to protect the technology against damage
Efciency Time-saving installation resulting from clever, installation-friendly mounting solutions for short downtimes Short door opening and closing times reduce waiting periods and increase the handling capacity of the installation
Innovation Optimum utilisation of space and short
options for door dimensions, with door widths from 700 to 2500 mm and door heights from 2000 to 2500 mm One-side opening, double-panel telescopic door (M2T) for optimum door width in a narrow shaft Centre-opening, double-panel door (M2Z) for short door running times and high handling capacity Centre-opening, four-panel telescopic door (M4TZ) for maximum door widths with good utilisation of space Comprehensive range of options and special versions for individual adaptation
oor-to-oor distances possible as a
result of compact design of the door header Stable, single-leaf landing door panels in sandwich design with low weight and without weld seams
S8A M2Z, stainless steel, leather surface
Comfort
Low noise of ≤ 55 dB(A), measured one metre in front of the landing door Excellent smooth running properties and isolation from structure-borne sound as a result of mounts protected from vibration
on the elevator car (SA 79)
Harmonious and smooth door movements as a result of frequency-controlled door drive with adjustable running characteristic curves
Reliability Safe and robust mechanical construction with powerful door drive Long service life as a result of the exclusive deployment of proven and tested materials and components Ensuring a rapid and long lasting spare parts availability
Scope of Supply Doors complete with required fastening material, basic body of the door
sill, guide rail prole of the door sill and
toeguards Rasterising of the door height and door widths in increments of 50 mm possible (SA 20);
S8A M2T, glass door with frame, stainless steel grain 220
with door type M4TZ with DW ≥ 1400 mm in increments of 100 mm
SA – special version
148
Issue 09/2015
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A General Notes s r o o D Range of application
Fire protection safety standards
The S8A / K8A comfort elevator doors are used in passenger and freight elevators with high standards with regard to quiet running, handling capacity and comfort.
The landing doors are re-tested in line with DIN EN 81-58 with regard to re resis-
Door type M2T, opening to the left
Door type M2T, opening to the right
The 2-panel, side-opening telescopic sliding door (M2T) is used mainly in passenger elevators to achieve a door width that is as large as possible in relation to the shaft width.
The 4-panel, centre-opening telescopic sliding door (M4TZ) is mainly used in passenger and freight elevators with a high handling capacity and large door widths with small shaft dimensions.
Door type M4TZ, centre-opening
Mounting of the suspension gear with wall plugs
the majority of export markets if re protection safety standards are required for the landing doors. DIN EN 81-58 is included in building regulations list A, part 1 of the German Institute for Building Technology. This means that
the landing doors with this re resistance test can be deployed in Germany.
The 2-panel, centre-opening sliding door (M2Z) is conceived for passenger elevators with a short door running time and high handling capacity. Door type M2Z, centre-opening
tance. This means the door can be used in
Planning recommendation Elevators should be planned in such a way that they can also be used without difculty by elderly and disabled persons. The minimum dimensions for elevator doors stipulated in the standard DIN 18040 (formerly DIN 18024/18025) for barrier-free construction are 900 mm door width and 2000 mm door height. In the case of modernisation measures, these minimum dimensions should be complied with, circumstances in the building permitting.
The S8A landing doors in the corresponding special version (SA) also comply with
other re protection requirements such as BS476 (GB) and GOST (RU-UKR). The S8A glass doors are not available with
a re protection safety standard and are therefore not suitable for the partitioning of
re-protected zones.
Compliance with special requirements The comprehensive range of options
(SA – special versions) means the door is suitable for deployment with special requirements consisting of special standards and regulations, for example in accordance with EN 81-70 Accessibility of elevators for persons, including disabled persons DIN EN 81-71 Protective measures against wilful destruction (vandalism), categories 0 or 1 only after consultation DIN EN 81-72 Fire service elevators Noise The noise characteristics of the door depend on the door dimensions, door panelling, installation conditions and door running times. At a distance of 1 metre to the landing door, an airborne noise level of
≤ 55 dB(A) can be assumed. SA – special version
Mounting of the base door sill support
Securing bracket with large adjustable ranges anchor rails with wall plug xture (SA 38)
for
www.liftequip.com
149
Comfort Door
S8A Landing Door s r o o D Door panels
The door panels are single-leaf, manufactured using noise-inhibiting sandwich design and offer outstanding corrosion protection. The basic body consists of 2 mm galvanised steel plate and is either laminated with 0.6 mm galvanised steel plate or with 0.8 mm stainless steel plate. Powder coating of the galvanised version is also possible. The lower door panel guide in the door sill for each door panel consists of two adjust-
able sliders. Rubber buffers are tted to the closing edge to buffer impacts and reduce noise. In the case of landing doors that lead out-doors, we recommend the use of door panels clad with stainless steel.
In the case of re resistant doors with heat insulation criterion, the door panels are
lled with an additional technical heat insulation.
Door frame
The door frame comprises: the upper suspension gear made of folded 2.5 mm galvanised steel plate; the side door posts made of folded 1.5 mm galvanised steel plate; and the lower door sill made of folded 2 mm galvanised steel plate with bolted-
on aluminium or stainless steel prole S8A M2Z, hook lock with contacts
Suspension gear with stable,
proled guide rail
Flooring
The customer-tted ooring can be laid directly up to the outer door panel facing the hallway. Even more elegance is created with the door sill with surrounding guide of the
door panels (SA 18): the ooring can be laid up to the shaft edge. The same possibility applies to the car door (SA 18). Precisely adjustable gap of the door panels to one another
150
150
Sill with encompassing guide (SA 18)
Issue 09/2015
Comfort Door
K8A Car Door s r o o D Door panels
The structure of the door panels with the door panel guides corresponds to the highquality technical designs described for the landing door. In the case of elevator car doors, on the other hand, no door panels
with re protection safety standards and heat insulation are deployed. Door drive The door drive that is used is a highqality, gearless and frequency-controlled asynchronous motor with integrate control device. The power transmission to the door panels is low-noise by means of a belt drive that is highly resistant to wear. The machine is very compact and does not protrude beyond the projection area of the suspension gear. It is mounted on the suspension gear of the car door and protected from vibration.
Door mounting
The sheet metal casing of the suspension gear of the car door is bolted directly onto the car roof using brackets. Mounting that is protected from vibration is available as
an option (SA 79). The elevator car can be up to 300 mm higher than the door height (optionally up to 500 mm, SA 40). The car door portal is not included in the scope of delivery of the car door. The landing doors are coupled by means of a widening cam fastened to the car door. This is operated and moved by the toothed belt of the machine. The type of protection for the entire door is IP20. An IP54 version is available as an option (SA 13). Mounting of the suspension gear on the elevator car Non-insulated mounting using a number of brackets directly with the car roof.
SA – special version
Insulated mounting (SA 79) with rubber insulation to reduce the transmission of vibrations to the car roof.
www.liftequip.com
151
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A Project Planning s r o o D Door type M2T (2-panel, one-sided telescopic opening) 68 (150 with SA 27)
≥ 30 + CDT BT
CDT ≥ 30 + BT
TB ++ 25 1,5 x DW 25 (1,5 x DW + 45 for SA 18)
DH 0 4 1 5 2 1
DW
2000 2100
5 9 2
2200 2300
T T D B C
700 - 750
800 - 850
900 - 1400
• • •
• • • • •
• • • • • •
2400 2500
DW TB
125
DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, optionally in the grid of 50 mm.
125
TB ++ 50 1,5 x DW 20
Door type M2Z (2-panel, centre-opening)
22xxDW TB + + 50 50
30++CDT BT ≥≥30
≥ 30 + CDT BT
DH 0 2 1 5 8
DW
2000
5 3 2
2100 2200
T T D B C
2300
700 - 750
800 - 850
900 - 1400
• • •
• • • • •
• • • • • •
2400
DW TB
125
2500
125
DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, optionally in the grid of 50 mm.
22xxDW TB + + 100 100
Door type M4TZ (4-panel, telescopic centre-opening)
≥ ≥3030 + CDT + BT
1,5 xx DW TB + 1,5 + 50 50 (1,5 x DW + 70 with DW < 900 mm)
≥ 30 + BT CDT
DH 0 4 1 5 2 1
5 9 2
DW TB
1,5 + 100 1,5 xx DW TB +
125
2000 2100 2200
T T B D C
125
DW
2300 2400
800 - 950 1000 - 11501200 - 13501400 - 15001800 - 2500
• •
• • •
• • • •
2500
• • • • •
DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, optionally in the grid of 50 up to DW ≤ 1400 mm.
• • • • • •
All mass in mm; DH – door height, DW – door width; CDT – construction dimension tolerance / deection from plumb (± 25 mm); SA – special version
152
152
Issue 09/2015
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A Project Planning s r o o D Installation options for the landing doors Detail A (M2T/M4TZ)
Detail A (M2Z) 85
FFL
FFL
UFL
125 ≤6 ≤6
UFL
(SA 19)
FFL
0 9 5 + H D = . n i m
6
0 0 1 0 0 3
) 2 1 A S r o f 0 5 4 + H D =
0 9 5 + H D = . n i m
. n i m
H W H H T S W D T S (
) 2 1 A S r o f 0 5 4 + H D =
36
40 x 40
40 x 40 (SA 19)
SD
0 0 1
Door architrave Türzarge
40 36 34
Door architrave
SD
≤6 40
0 9 1
FFL OFF
6
2 7
2 7
Sill prole
Schwellenprofil Sill prole
Basic body
Grundkörper Basic body
M16
Mounting bracket
M16
Mounting bracket Befestigungswinkel Toeguard Schürze
Toeguard
Detail B (M2Z)
Detail B (M2T/M4TZ)
. n i m
H W H H T S W D T S (
Door architrave
40
85
≤6
125 ≤6 ≤6 Door architrave Türzarge
36 34
40
36
40 x 40 40 x 40 (SA 19)
(SA 19)
FFL
FFL OFF
6
2 7 0 9
2 7 0 9 0 9 1
Recess
Sill prole
0 9 1
Nische
Sill prole Schwellenprofil Basic body Grundkörper
Basic body 0 9
6
M16
Mounting bracket Toeguard
M16
Befestigungswinkel Mounting bracket Toeguard Schürze
B
A
Recess
Installation in the shaft
Installation in recess / in the landing
The landing doors are fastened to the shaft wall by means of brackets. The brackets are secured to the wall optionally with wall plugs or with securing bolts on anchor rails (measurement in concrete in line with CEN/
In the interest of economical utilisation of space, the landing door can be installed in a recess. Recesses with greater depth are possible as an option (SA 60).
TS 1992-4:2009) that are cast into the
the table below.
If your requirements or wishes go beyond the range of options described, please contact our experienced sales team.
The different recess depths are specied in
shaft wall or welded onto a shaft scaffold.
Recess depth Door type
M2T S8A
Without recess
With recess
With deep recess
SA 11
Standard
SA 60
0 mm
55 mm
100 mm
M2Z S8A
0 mm
20 mm
60 mm
M4TZ S8A
0 mm
55 mm
100 mm
All mass in mm; DH – door height; STWH – oor height; SD – shaft depth; UFL – unnished oor level; FFL – nished oor level; SA – special version
www.liftequip.com
153
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A Steel sheet / stainless steel doors – surfaces s r o o D Door panels Surface versions
The door panels of the landing and elevator car doors consist of 2 mm galvanised steel plate and are clad either with 0.6 mm galvanised steel plate or with 0.8 mm stainless steel plate. For the galvanised version, an additional powder coating is also possible. The same applies to the surface versions for the door frames and front walls of the elevator shaft. Standard version
Door panel, front / visible side
Door panel, back
Standard version
Stainless steel
Electrolytically galvanised steel plate surfaces for painting on site.
Electrolytically galvanised steel surface
Painting Different types of painting are possible with a high-quality powder coating method (60 µm): Basic colour shade Mouse Grey RAL 7005 / powder coating
Painting
Linen / stainless steel
Trafc White RAL 9016 / powder coating
White Aluminium RAL 9006 /
powder coating Colour RAL / powder coating
Leather / stainless steel
Mouse Grey RAL 9016 / powder coating
Rhombus / stainless steel, ferritic or austenitic, only available for landing door
Trafc White RAL 9016 / powder coating
Stainless steel Panelling with 0.8 mm stainless steel plate: Leather / stainless steel Linen / stainless steel Rhombus / stainless steel, ferritic or austenitic, only available for landing door Grain 220 / stainless steel, ferritic Grain 220 / stainless steel, austenitic
Other versions available on request. 154
154
White Aluminium RAL 9006 /
Grain 220 / stainless steel, ferritic
powder coating
Colour RAL / powder coating
Grain 220 / stainless steel, austenitic
Issue 09/2015
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A Steel sheet / stainless steel doors – re protection s r o o D Doors with re protection safety standards
The standard versions of the landing doors comply with the requirements of the type approval in accordance with EN 81-1/2. In addition to this, other criteria in line with
in part country-specic guidelines and regulations such as EN 81-58, BS 476 and
GOST apply to the special re protection versions. Door panel with re protection safety standards (back)
M2T
Fire protection classications for S8A landing door
E120
EN 81-58
Standard
EW30
EN 81-58
SA 104
EW60
EN 81-58
SA 105
EI60
EN 81-58
EI120
EN 81-58
EI120
GOST (RU and UKR)
2h-Integrity
E30
BS 476
GOST (only RU)
SA 106
SA 109
M2Z
M4TZ
DW 700 – 1400 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm
DW 800 – 2500 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm
galvanised, powder coated, panelled with stainless steel
galvanised, powder coated, panelled with stainless steel
DW 700 – 1400 mm DH 2000 – 2200 mm
DW 800 – 2000 mm DH 2000 – 2200 mm
galvanised, powder coated, panelled with stainless steel
galvanised, powder coated, panelled with stainless steel
DW 700 – 1100 mm DH 2000 – 2200 mm
DW 800 – 1100 mm DH 2000 – 2200 mm
panelled with stainless steel
panelled with stainless steel
DW 700 – 1400 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm
DW 800 – 1400 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm
DW 800 – 2500 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm
galvanised, powder coated, panelled with stainless steel
galvanised, powder coated, panelled with stainless steel
galvanised, powder coated, panelled with stainless steel
-
SA 101
SA 100
SA 100
DW 700 – 1400 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm galvanised, powder coated, panelled with stainless steel
-
DW 700 – 1400 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm
DW 1400 – 2500 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm
galvanised, powder coated, panelled with stainless steel
galvanised, powder coated, panelled with stainless steel
DW 700 – 1400 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm
DW 800 – 2500 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm
galvanised, powder coated, panelled with stainless steel
galvanised, powder coated, panelled with stainless steel
DW 700 – 1400 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm galvanised, powder coated, panelled with stainless steel
-
Not all combinations of door height / door width are available; d etails on request.
SA – special version
www.liftequip.com
155
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A Glass Doors s r o o D Glass door panels
The S8A / K8A comfort glass door panels are designed with a surrounding door panel frame on all sides at a width of 50 mm.
Fully glazed door panels are also available on request (SA 41). The glass door panel frames have a basic
coating and can be given any surface nish which is available for sheet metal door pan-
els. The glass panes are tted ush with the door panel frame. The glass panes are made of composite safety glass (TVG and VSG-V) and are transparent. The gap between the glass door panel and door post or portal is limited to a maximum of 4 mm to safeguard against the danger of children's hands being drawn in.
Glass door panels with f rame (SA 31)
Fully glazed door panels (SA 41)
In the case of the centre-opening doors (M2Z, M4TZ), the closing edge is optionally designed as a 25-mm-wide frame (SA 33), so that the closed door visually has a frame width of 50 mm at the closing edge. The other three sides of the frame have also a width of 50 mm, giving the door an even more elegant appearance. In the case of glass doors, we recommend for reasons of visual appearance that the light grid be mounted as stationary on the car door at the end of the running rail and
Panelling of the suspension gear on the shaft side, optional
Panelling of the suspension gear on th e shaft side, optional
at the end of the guide rail prole. On glass door panels, the cam elbows of the widening cam of the elevator car door protrude into the visible area. If this is not visible, a shortened version of the widening cam (SA 30) can be selected. On this version, however, levelling with opening doors is not possible.
SA – special version
156
Issue 09/2015
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A Glass Doors s r o o D Glass door panels with available dimensions Door width
Door width
50 0 5
100
t h g i e h r o o D
50
m m 6
Closing edge
0 5
Frame glass door panels (SA 31)
DH [mm]
DW [mm]
2000
700 - 1200
2100
700 - 1200
2200
700 - 1100
2300
700 - 1050
t h g i e h r o o D
Fully lazed door panels (SA 41)
0 5
DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, optionally in the grid of 50 mm.
m m 6
DH [mm]
DW [mm]
2000
700 - 1200
2100
700 - 1200
DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, optionally in the grid of 50 mm.
Closing edge
0 5
Door type M2T (2-panel, one-sided telescopic opening), glass door panels with frame (Fig. on left) and fully glazed door panels (Fig. on right)
Door width
Door width
50 0 5
2x25 2x50
t h g i e h r o o D
1)
m m 6
2)
Closing edge
0 5
Frame glass door panels (SA 31)
DH [mm]
DW [mm]
2000
700 - 1200
2100
700 - 1200
2200
700 - 1100
2300
700 - 1050
t h g i e h r o o D
Fully lazed door panels (SA 41)
m m 6
DW [mm]
2000
700 - 1200
2100
700 - 1200
DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, optionally in the grid of 50 mm.
DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, optionally in the grid of 50 mm.
Closing edge
0 5
DH [mm]
0 5
Door type M2Z (2-panel, centre-opening), glass door panels with frame (Fig. on left) and fully glazed door panels (Fig. on right)
Door width
Door width 0 5
Frame glass door panels (SA 31)
50 0 5
100
2x25 2x50
t h g i e h r o o D
1)
m m 6
2)
DH [mm]
DW [mm]
2000
1300 - 2200
2100
1300 - 2200
2200
1300 - 2200
2300
1300 - 2100
t h g i e h r o o D m m 6
DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, optionally in the grid of 50 mm. Foe door sill without visible guide
Door type M4TZ
0 5
DH [mm]
DW [mm]
2000
1400 - 2200
2100
1400 - 2200
DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, optionally in the grid of 50 mm.
(SA 18) as of DW ≥ 1400 mm.
Closing edge
Fully lazed door panels (SA 41)
Closing edge
0 5
(4-panel, telescopic centre-opening), glass door panels with frame (Fig. on left) and fully glazed door panels (Fig. on right)
1) For glass door panels (SA 31), combined with narrow frame (SA 33). 2) For glass door panels (SA 31). Edge protection with width 15 mm available as an option for solid glass doors (SA 47).
SA – special version. All specied dimensions in mm.
www.liftequip.com
157
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A Door Sills s r o o D Door sills
The basic body of the shaft door sill is made of angled steel plate. As default, sill proles made of aluminium with permit ted wheel loads of 280 kg are mounted. Alongside these, stainless steel door sills for 500 kg (SA 15) and 1500 kg (SA 16) wheel loads are also available.
Aluminium door sill for permitted wheel loads up to 280 kg as standard version
Stainless steel door sill for permitted wheel loads up to 500 kg,
Stainless steel door sill (only for M4TZ) for permitted wheel loads up to 1,500 kg,
Door sill with surrounding guide
solid stainless steel prole (SA 16)
(SA 18);
proled stainless steel guide (SA 15)
Wheel load QRL on the door still Distance between wheels a
Door width DW
Door sill
Aluminium (standard) Stainless steel (SA 15)
Max. wheel load
Max. overall sill load
QRL
a < 400 mm a ≥ 400 mm
280 kg
280 kg
560 kg
500 kg
500 kg
1000 kg
Stainless steel (SA 16)
1500 kg
1500 kg
3000 kg
Surrounding guide (SA 18)
500 kg
optionally with at stainless steel prole (SA 17)
500 kg
DW – door width, QRL – wheel load, a – distance between wheels.
158
the ooring can be laid up to the shaft edge
1000 kg
SA – special version
Issue 09/2015
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A Door Safety Lock System s r o o D Door safety lock systems The doors can be equipped with different, opto-electronic systems for door safety: - Standard light grid - High-resolution light grid (SA 26) - High-resolution 3D light grid with motion detection system (SA 45) - Motion detection system (SA 25) The systems are always equipped with the electronic evaluation system required in each case.
The standard light grid is a no-contact opto-electronic door safety system. Transmitter and receiver units are integrated in the door panels. Between the two, a light grid is created up to a height of 180 cm; this has 18 parallel and 84 crossed light beams. Interrupting one or more of the light beams triggers reversing of the door drive. The device works with invisible alternating light in the infrared range. Standard light grid
High-resolution light grid (SA 26)
A high-resolution light grid (SA 26) with particularly high protective effect is available
as an option: 40 parallel and 194 crossed beams up to a height of 180 cm guarantee the highest sensitivity (suitable for installations in accordance with EN 81-70). Even more comfort is provided by a highresolution light grid with integrated motion detection system (SA 45). The closing operation of the door then reversed when persons or objects approach the door. This light grid cannot be used for glass doors. Monitoring ranges of the high-resolution light grid with integrated motion detection system (SA 45)
In addition, a facility for monitoring the area in front of the door with body heat detection can be installed in the car door portal (SA 25). Only rapid changes in temperature are detected, which means that changes in the ambient temperature or
stationary persons have no inuence on the system.
SA – special version High-resolution light grid with integrated motion detection system (SA 45)
www.liftequip.com
Monitoring range of the motion detection system (SA 25)
159
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A F9 Door Drive s r o o D F9 door drive
The F9 door drive is a compact unit consisting of a gearless, frequency-controlled asynchronous motor with integrate control device. It is mounted vertically and protected from vibration on the suspension
gear of the car door. A horizontal arrangement is possible as an option. A high-resolution encoder supplies the drive with all the necessary information with regard to position and speed of the door panels at all times. This means that no limit switches are required to detect the door position. The power transmission to the door panels is linear and low-noise by means of a belt drive that is highly resistant to wear. The door panels of the landing door are moved by a widening cam without play.
Technical description Motor: six-pole asynchronous motor Control device: integrate frequency
Additional features / functions Automatic commissioning as well as and functional test, including automatic learning of door mass, closing force limitation of 150 N, limitation of kinetic energy, door width, opening direction, running characteristic curve generation for door movement. Approaching a detected obstacle: if the door strikes an obstacle on closing that was not detected by the light grid (e.g. due to a stone in the door sill), it is reopened. The previously determined rise in force causes the door drive to decelerate in the next closing operation even before the position of the obstacle. Conse-
inverter, clock frequency 16 kHz, V/f
quently, there is a signicant reduction in
characteristic Type of protection: IP54 EMC: in accordance with EN 12015/16 Interfaces: 24 V logic level, potential separation, programmable special output Parameterisation: via PC Diagnosis: event stack
Connection voltage: 230 V, 50/60 Hz
Ambient conditions
the levelling speed. If no other obstacle is detected, the door drive accelerates again to normal speed after reopening to the position of the obstacle. Partial opening: after reopening, the opening width of the door can be reduced if desired. The door drive has an event stack that stores errors and warnings in nonvolatile form with date and time. Other activation options, see operating manual.
Automatic commissioning takes place via a convenient teach-in function. At high ambient temperatures, the motor and control device can be placed in separate units (on request).
– 10 °C to + 50 °C Dimensions: (as of ange area) W x H x D = 260 x 200 x 115 mm
160
Running characteristic curve setting / parameterisation The control system electronics calculate the running characteristic curve depending on the path travelled. The running characteristic curve con-
tains a special prole for operation of the
door cam by the door drive. All the parameters of the running characteristic curve for opening, closing,
nudging and reopening can be dened
independently. Learning the maximum possible closing force (moment teach-in). Running characteristic curves (over time t) 1
1 6
2
6
2
5 3
5
3
4
4
on opening
on closing
Maximum speed v
Deceleration Approach
speed Widening cam operation (can be deactivated) Widening cam speed Acceleration
Issue 09/2015
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A Technical Information s r o o D Technical details M2T
M2Z
M4TZ
S8A landing door / K8A car door Permitted dimensions for steel plate doors 1)
Door width
DW
[mm]
Door height
DH
[mm]
700 – 1400 / 100 mm grid
800 – 2500 / 100 mm grid
2000 – 2500 / 100 mm grid
Materials for steel plate doors
Suspension gear
Steel plate 2.5 mm, galvanised
Door posts
Steel plate 1.5 mm, galvanised
Door sill
Door panels
Basic body:
folded steel plate 2.0 mm, galvanised
Guide rail prole:
made of aluminium or stainless steel (SA), bolted on
Structure:
single-leaf, manufactured using noise-inhibiting sandwich design
Basic body:
folded steel plate 2.0 mm, galvanised
Panelling:
steel plate 0.6 mm, galvanised or stainless steel plate 0.8 mm or steel plate 0.6 mm, galvanised with powder coating
K8A car door (technical details for selected combinations of door width x door height)
Door width x door height DW x DH
[mm]
Door running time s2)
t open / t close
[s]
galv./stainl. steel/glass
[kg]
Weight (with DH 2100)
3)
700 x 2000 - 2200
700 x 2000 - 2200
800 x 2000 - 2100
2.00 / 2.50
1.70 / 2.20
107 / 111 / 180
106 / 110 / 176
1.90 / 2.40 134 / 139 / -
Step-on area
2
[m ]
0.056
0.056
0.064
Door width x door height DW x DH
[mm]
800 x 2000 - 2400
800 x 2000 - 2400
900 x 2000 - 2100
Door running time s2)
t open / t close
[s]
2.30 / 2.80
1.80 / 2.30
galv./stainl. steel/glass
[kg]
117 / 122 / 193
116 / 121 / 191
1.90 / 2.40 143 / 149 / -
[m2]
0.064
0.064
0.072
Door width x door height DW x DH
[mm]
900 x 2000 - 2500
900 x 2000 - 2500
1100 x 2000 - 2200
Door running time s
t open / t close
[s]
2.60 / 3.10
1.90 / 2.40
2.00 / 2.50
galv./stainl. steel/glass
[kg]
127 / 132 / 207
125 / 131 / 205
163 / 170 / -
[m2]
0.072
0.072
0.088
Door width x door height DW x DH
[mm]
1000 x 2000 - 2500
1000 x 2000 - 2500
1200 x 2000 - 2300
Door running time s2)
t open / t close
[s]
2.80 / 3.30
2.00 / 2.50
2.00 / 2.50
galv./stainl. steel/glass
[kg]
138 / 144 / 240
137 / 143 / 222
174 / 181 / -
2
[m ]
0.080
0.080
0.096
Door width x door height DW x DH
[mm]
1100 x 2000 - 2500
1100 x 2000 - 2500
1400 x 2000 - 2400
Door running time s
t open / t close
[s]
3.10 / 3.60
2.20 / 2.70
2.20 / 2.70
galv./stainl. steel/glass
[kg]
148 / 155 / 254
147 / 154 / 237
194 / 202 / 304
[m2]
0.088
0.088
0.112
[mm]
1200 x 2000 - 2500
1200 x 2000 - 2500
1800 x 2000 - 2500
3.30 / 3.90
2.50 / 3.00
2.60 / 3.10
158 / 165 / 268
157 / 164 / 252
233 / 244 / 398
Weight (with DH 2100)
3)
Step-on area 2)
Weight (with DH 2100)
3)
Step-on area
Weight (with DH 2100)
3)
Step-on area 2)
Weight (with DH 2100)
3)
Step-on area Door width x door height DW x DH Door running time s
2)
Weight (with DH 2100)
3)
t open / t close
[s]
galv./stainl. steel/glass
[kg]
Step-on area
2
[m ]
0.096
0.096
0.144
Door width x door height DW x DH
[mm]
1400 x 2000 - 2500
1400 x 2000 - 2500
2500 x 2000 - 2500
Door running time s2)
t open / t close
[s]
3.90 / 4.50
3.00 / 3.50
3.80 / 4.30
galv./stainl. steel/glass
[kg]
178 / 186 / -
177 / 185 / -
304 / 318 / -
[m2]
0.112
0.112
0.200
Weight (with DH 2100)
3)
Step-on area 1)
Available combinations of door width / door height, see page 6. Available combinations of door width / door height for landing doors with re protection safety standard, see page 9.
Available combinations of door width / door height for glass doors, see page 10. Door dimensions (DW and DH) optional (SA 20) in the 50 mm grid, available as option with door type M4TZ up to DW 1400 mm. For door types M2T and M2Z, operating and indicator elements are only possible in the door frame up to DW 1300 mm. 2) The opening and closing speeds can be adjusted separately from each other. The specied values are the default settings where the noise development is ≤ 55 dB(A) and the door has very good running proper-ties. 3) Weight determination of car door with the following equipment: galvanised = door panels covered with 0.6 mm galvanised steel sheet, without special equipment; stainless steel = door panels
covered with 0.8 mm stainless steel, without special equipment; glass = glass door panels (SA 31 / frame door panels with 0.8 mm stainless steel panelling or SA 41 / fully glazed door panels), with special version 79 / insulated suspension gear mounting and insulated supports). SA – special version
www.liftequip.com
161
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A Special Versions s r o o D Special versions Special versions SA 4 SA 5 SA 6 SA 7 SA 8 SA 11 SA 12 SA 13 SA 14 SA 15 SA 16 SA 17 SA 18 SA 19 SA 20 SA 21
S8A landing door
K8A car door
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
-
Display "No Entry" complying with DIN EN 81-73
-
Round opening (l 35.6 mm) for indicator elements
-
Round opening (l 35.6 mm) for control elements
-
Square opening ( Y 36.8 mm) for control elements; key switch not possible with M2Z and M4TZ
-
Square opening ( Y 36.8 mm) for indicator elements
-
Door installed in shaft without recess
-
Low height between oors STWH up to min. DH + 450 mm
•
Type of protection IP 54 (example of use: for door leading outdoor)
-
EX version (ATEX), explosion-proof version
• • • •
Stainless steel sill prole, proled, permitted wheel load (QRL) up to 500 kg
-
Prole between the door posts; material: aluminium or stainless steel
• • • • • • • •
Door dimensions in the 50 mm grid for door width (DW) and door height (DH), on M4TZ only up to DW ≤ 1400 mm
-
Mounting in the shaft scaf fold with M 16 screw, without anchor rails and without wall plugs
•
Glass door panels with door panel frame width at the closing edge of 25 mm, available for M2Z and M4TZ
-
Panelling of the suspension gear on the shaft side and door posts
-
Gap cover for plastering
-
Rubber strip at closing edge
-
Wall plug xture
• • •
Halogen-free cables for landing and elevator car door
-
Widened toeguard, up to outer edge of the suspension gear (suspension gear width)
-
Panelling for the entire suspension gear sheet metal casing, for glass shaft
• • •
S8A: delivery device, special toeguard of bottom landing door; K8A: folding toe guard
-
Widened toeguard up to outer edge of the door posts (width of door post)
-
Monitoring of emergency unlocking, locking, only with M2T
-
Type of protection IP x3 / re service elevator
-
Additional lock for second, faster door panel on M2Z and M4TZ
•
Vision panel in acc. with sample high-rise guideline and EN 81-1, no re protection with EN 81-58 included
SA 24
-
SA 25
-
SA 26
-
SA 27
•
SA 30
-
SA 31
• • • • • • • •
SA 32 SA 33 SA 34 SA 35 SA 37 SA 38 SA 39 SA 40
-
SA 41
• • • •
SA 42 SA 43 SA 44 SA 45
-
SA 47
• • • • • •
SA 49 SA 51 SA 52 SA 53 SA 54
Description
Stainless steel sill prole, solid, permitted wheel load (QRL) up to 1,500 kg, door sill cast in, only available for M4TZ Stainless steel prole for SA 18, if ooring us not to go all the way to the sill edge Door sill with surrounding guide of door panels, oor covering thickness up to 40 mm
Sill heating only in conjunction with door sill SA 18
Intermediate prole for control panel in the recess, only available with insulated mounting (SA 79) Motion detection system with infrared sensor, deployment in addition t o a light grid, installation in the c ar door portal High-resolution light grid with 40 parallel / 194 crossed beams, up to 1800 mm height, suitable for installation in acc. with EN 81-70
Mechanical car door lock complying with DIN EN 81-1/2, if distance between shaft wall and car door sill > 150 mm Short widening cam for panoramic elevators, cam base plate / c am bracket not visible, levelling with opening doors not possible
Glass door panels with surrounding door panel frame width of 50 mm, ush-tted glass panel, stationary mounting of light grid
Mount for 300 mm < (car height – door height) ≤ 500 mm Fully glazed door panels
High-resolution 3D light grid (height up to 1800 mm) with integrate motion detection system (door width u p to 1900 mm) Protection of closing edge for solid glass doors, U-prole made of stainless steel
For technical reasons, not all special versions can be combined with one another, details on request.
162
Issue 09/2015
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A Special Versions s r o o D Special versions Special versions
S8A landing door
K8A car door
• • • • • • • • • •
•
Double-leaf door panels
-
Labyrinth at the closing edge, only in conjunction with SA 5 5 and only for M2Z and M4TZ
-
Recess in the door post for cover plate, not for M2Z with front wall of the elevator shaft
-
Deep recess of 100 mm (M2T, M4TZ) or 60 mm (M2Z), for aluminium door sill with permitted wheel load (QRL) up to 280 kg
-
Additional switch mounting for monitoring, protection type IP20
-
Version without shaft door toeguard; a clamping bracket is used instead
-
Cam mounting for SA 27 in conjunction with an elevator car door of another generation
-
Door suitable for instal. complying with DIN EN 81-71, (available from conversion to DIN EN 81-20/-50)
-
Hook lock with weight (version for example for China), available for M4TZ as of DW ≥ 1400 mm
-
Monitoring of emergency unlocking, scanning, only with M2T
SA 79
-
•
Insulated car installation, suspension gear on elevator car and supporting bracket with insulation element
SA 100
•
-
Fire protection class 2-h-Integrity complying with BS 476 (GB) and E30 complying with GOST (RU)
SA 55 SA 56 SA 57 SA 60 SA 65 SA 67 SA 69 SA 71 SA 74 SA 75
Description
Fire protection class EI60 complying with GOST for Russia, Kazakhstan, Belarus. SA 101
•
•
Fire protection class EI120 complying with GOST for Ukraine. Special version for Russia is available only in combination with SA 55 (in this case not possible with powder coating). Special version for Belarus is available only for door types M2T and M2Z.
SA 104
• • • •
-
Fire protection class E120, EW30 complying with DIN EN 81-58
-
Fire protection class E120, EW60 complying with DIN EN 81-58
-
Fire protection class EI60 complying with DIN EN 81-58
-
Fire protection class EI120 complying with DIN EN 81-58, door width DW = 800-1400 mm and door height DH = 2000-2700 mm
SA 105 SA 106 SA 109
For technical reasons, not all special versions can be combined with one another, details on request.
www.liftequip.com
163
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A Structure of the Landing Door s r o o D
Suspension gear Shaft securing bracket, to anchor rail or secured with wall plugs Door post mounting, secured with wall plugs Carriage Hook lock, landing door lock (optional) Sheet metal casing Running rail Opening post Door panels Closing edge door post Basic body of shaft door sill, made of steel plate
Guide rail prole, made of aluminium or stainless steel Shaft securing bracket, to anchor rail or secured with wall plugs Lower door panel guides Shaft door toeguard
164
Issue 09/2015
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A Layout of the Car Door s r o o D
Suspension gear Door drive motor with control device,
F9 Car installation, rigid
or insulated (SA 79, not shown) V-groove belt Toothed belt Carriage Widening cam Sheet metal casing Running rail Supporting bracket
(SA 79, not shown) Door panels Light grids Basic body of car door sill, made of steel plate
Guide rail prole, made of aluminium or stainless steel Insulation for supporting bracket
(SA 79, not shown) Lower door panel guides Car door toeguard (not shown)
SA – special version
www.liftequip.com
165
166
Issue 09/2015
Door Drive
Modernisation for Door Drive F9
■ gearless, frequency-controlled asynchronous motor drive ■ quiet operation ■ maintenance-free and compact unit of motor and controller ■ Controller with clock frequency of 16 kHZ ■ high-resolution shaft encoder ■ high car heights ■ vibration-free drive ■ Protection type IP54 ■ Door width 700-2500 mm ■ after reserving, the width that opens the door
can be reduced if desired
■ programmable special output (virtual switch, clo-
sing force limitation, additional end positions signal)
s r o o D
■ Power limitation according to EN81 ■ Diagnostics and Parameterisation automatically
or via Laptop ■ Mains voltage: 230V (+10% / -15%) AC voltage,
50/60Hz signal voltage ■ ambient temperature range: -10°C to + 50°C ■ relative humidity max. 70% ■ EMV tested according to EN12015/16 ■ 24V logic level
Door-Modernisation Kits: ■ The modernisation solution has been specially designed for the different doors ■ Transmission from the drive to the door through a belt ■ The modernisationkits are independent from the doorwidth, as they can be adjusted on site ■ No necessity for limit switches
Haushahn, TSS72K: This modernisation kit consists of a console that can be adjusted accor ding to the door width and a special cam that ts to the old door.
Thyssen, M2TD4: This Modernisation Kit consists of the doordrive F9 which replaces the old telescopic arm by the belt. Furthermore it has a console that can be adjusted
according to the existing door width and an instruction manual with drawings.
Thyssen, M3TK/2: With this solution the old doordrive is replaced by the F9 door drive with a belt.
Thyssen, M2Z/ M2T/ M4TZ (D1,G1,D2,W1,W2,W3,W7): This Modernisation Kit consists of the F9 door motor, a simple bracket that ts to the above listed old door drives and a drawing
for the installation.
Further Modernisation Kits are available for: Schindler QKS6/QKS8/QKS9/QKS11
For more type of doors that can be modernised, please do not hesitate to contact our sales team.
www.liftequip.com
167
168
Issue 09/2015
LEA
®
LEA - Family ®
The Lift Family s t i K
Functionality at its nest
LEA
®
The Kits of LiftEquip
MRL, 450 – 1000 kg, 1,0 m/s Standardized dimensions PMC 145-2, MFC or MFR
Variabel and functional
LEA
®
• Well thought solut ion
Flexible • Individually for your application
MRL, 450 – 1000 kg, 1,0 m/s Adaptable dimensions PMC 145-2, MFC or MFR
The allrounder
LEA
®
• Secure and reliable quality products
Comfort
• Perfectly coordinated components
LEA
MRL, 450 – 5000 kg, 0,5 – 2,0 m/s Custom applications DAF210 / DAF270, MFC / MFR
Robust and reliable ®
Cargo • Competent advice
MR, 1800 – 6000 kg, up to 1,0 m/s Planning according to customer requirements Door width up to 3000 mm
Personally and individually
LEA
®
Home
www.liftequip.com
Gulliver and Orion, accord. to 2006/42/EG
Up to 5 stops, 0,15 m/s, 15 m TH Over 70 platform variants and design options
LEA®
173
LEA® Flexible
185
LEA® Comfort
189
LEA® Cargo
193
LEA® Home
209
169
Technical Report
LEA - Family ®
The Lift Family y i l i m a F A E L
t r o p e R l a c i n h c e T
PRODUKTE UND FACHBERICHTE / PRODUCTS AND TECHNICAL REPORTS
LEA – die Aufzugfamilie LEA – the lift family LiftEquip ist seit vielen Jahren erfolgreich in Wohn- und Geschäftsgebäuden. Die mit Aufzugkomponenten und Komponen- Fahrkörbe in Edelstahldesign, verschiedene ten-Sets weltweit im Markt vertreten. Mit Beleuchtungsoptionen und die Möglichkeit der LEA Familie (LiftEquip Aufzug) möchte die Rückwand in Glas auszuführen und das Unternehmen einen noch stärkeren auch Glastüren einzusetzen, machen den Fokus auf den Bereich der Bausätze und Aufzug zu einem attraktiven Produkt für Systeme legen, da der Markt in den ver- jeden Aufzugsbauer. Wirtschaftlichkeit und schiedenen Segmenten wie Neuanlage und Qualität werden nicht nur bei der HerModernisierung nach Komplettlösungen stellung großgeschrieben, optimierte fragt. Hier ist nicht nur die Lösung aus einer Montageabläufe reduzieren die Kosten Hand wichtig, hier ist auch die kompetente bei Einbau und Inbetriebnahme. In Bezug Beratung bei schwierigen Einsatzbedin- auf die Energieeffizienz können hier – in Abhängigkeit von der Nutzungskategogungen gefragt.
rie – Aufzüge nach Energieeffizienzklasse Das Spektrum der Aufzugsfamilie LEA A nach VDI 4707 gebaut werden. Einen reicht vom Standard MRL Bausatz für die wichtigen Beitrag zur Energieeffizienz leisunterschiedlichen Marktsegmente bis hin zu den Systemen im Bereich der Sonderanlagen und Lastenaufzüge sowohl als MRL Systeme als auch als konventionelle Anlage mit Triebwerksraum. Hier gibt es nicht die Lösung von der Stange, hier sind Engineering und individuelle Planung gefragt. Bei diesen Bausätzen liefern wir alle mechanischen Baugruppen mit Antriebstechnik und Umrichter sowie allen Sicherheitsbauteilen. Die Schnittstellen zu den am Markt verfügbaren Steuerungen sind klar definiert, damit hat der Aufzugbauer die freie Auswahl und kann nach seinen Anforderungen die elektrischen Komponenten für das Gesamtsystem auswählen. Eine Sonderstellung nimmt in dieser Reihe der LEA Home, als Gulliver und Orion nach Maschinenrichtlinie, ein. Das Komplettsystem kann wahlweise komplett mit Schachtgerüst oder zum Einbau in einem bestehenden Schacht angeboten werden. Die Übersicht der LEA Familie zeigt die Einsatzbedingungen der unterschiedlichen Systeme. Mit dem LEA in seiner Standardversion bietet das Unternehmen einen Bausatz für einen MRL Aufzug, der im Leistungsbereich von 450 kg, 630 kg und 1000 kg und 1 m/s einsetzbar ist. Lösungen mit reduzierten Schutzräumen für eine optimale Ausnutzung des Schachtes sind hier realisierbar. Ab 63 0 kg ist au ch Durchlad un g machbar. Dieser LEA ist damit besonders geeignet für den Einsatz L i f t E q u i p ( 2 )
LiftEquip has for many years been successfully represented on the market worldwide with lift components and component sets. The company intends to emphasise the area of construction sets and systems even more with the LEA family (‘LiftEquip Aufzug’ = lift), since the market in the various segments such as new lifts and modernisation, demands complete solutions. Here what counts is not just having solution from one source, but also expert advice in the event of difficult conditions of use. The spectrum of the LEA lift family ranges from the standard construction kit for lifts without machine rooms for the various market segments to the area of special lifts and cargo lifts as well as lifts without machine rooms and conventional lifts with a machine room. Here there are no off-thepeg solutions, what is called for are engineering and individual planning. When it comes to these construction sets, we supply all mechanical modules together with the drive technology and converter as well as all safety components. The interfaces for the controls available on the market are clearly defined, as a result of which lift builders can choose freely and select the electrical components for overall system according to their requirements. The LEA Home occupies a special position in this series, as Gulliver and Orion according to the Machinery Directive. The complete system is available optionally complete with shaft framework or for installation in an existing shaft. The overview of the LEA family shows the conditions of use of the different systems. In its standard version the company provides the LEA as a construction kit for a lift without machine room, which can be used in the performance range 450 kg, 630 kg and 1000 kg and 1 m/s. Solutions with reduced protective spaces for optimal exploitation of the shaft can be realised here. Through-loading is also possible from 630 kg upwards. Consequently, this LEA is especially suitable for use in residential and business buildings. Lift cars in stainless steel design, different lighting options and the option to produce the back wall in glass as well as with glass doors, make the lift an attractive product for any lift builder. Economic efficiency
LEA: Das System auch mit reduzierten Schutzräumen LEA: The system with reduced protective spaces
18 LIFT journal 2/2015
170
Issue 09/2015
Technical Report
LEA - Family ®
The Lift Family PRODUKTE UND FACHBERICHTE / PRODUCTS AND TECHNICAL REPORTS
and quality are not just priorities in production; optimised assembly processes reduce the costs during installation and start-up. With regard to energy efficiency - depending on the use category – it is possible here to build as energy efficiency class A according to VDI 4707. The gearless drive PMC145-2 and MFR frequency converter with integrated regenerative braking make an important contribution to energy efficiency. The LEA is based on a type-tested system and can be put into operation in the version with a free control based on the tested system by individual inspection and acceptance. LiftEquip has an extremely economic solution for the volume market with the LEA. If individual solutions are needed, the LEA Flex and LEA Comfort are available as additional construction sets for lifts without machine rooms. Since all the components used on the market are freely available, maximum flexibility and durability of the lift with regard to future modernisations are also available to the operator. Volker Lenzner Technical Director LiftEquip GmbH
tet hier der Gearlessantrieb PMC145-2 sowie der Frequenzumrichter MFR mit integrierter Rückspeisung. Der LEA basiert auf einem baumustergeprüften System und kann in der Abwandlung mit einer freien Steuerung auf Basis des geprüften Systems durch Einzelabnahme in Verkehr gebracht werden. Mit dem LEA bietet LiftEquip eine äußerst wirtschaftliche Lösung für den Volumenmarkt an. Sollten individuelle Lösungen gefordert sein, stehen der LEA Flex und der LEA Comfort als weitere MRL Bausätze zur Verfügung. Da alle verwendeten Komponenten am Markt frei zugänglich sind, ist auch für den Betreiber die maximale Flexibilität und Langlebigkeit der Anlage in Bezug auf zukünftige Modernisierung gegeben. Volker Lenzner Technischer Leiter LiftEquip GmbH www.liftequip.de
Die LEA Familie / The LEA family
y i l i m a F A E L
t r o p e R l a c i n h c e T
www.liftequip.de
.
www.liftequip.com
171
172
Issue 09/2015
LEA
®
LEA
®
s t i K
Functionality at its nest MRL, 450 – 1000 kg, 1,0 m/s Standardized dimensions PMC 145-2, MFC or MFR
www.liftequip.com
System description and advantages
174
Technical overview
175
Technical Details
176
Car Design
178
Main components
180
Scope of supply and planning information
181
Performance programme and options
182
173
LEA
®
System Description and Advantages s t i K LEA ® for your customers With the LEA® elevator kit, LiftEquip offers you a future oriented system solution for
Safety System corresponds to DIN EN 81-1:
1998+A3, for commencement of operation per individual inspection with
residential and ofce buildings. As a functional machine-room-less passenger elevator, it has an elaborate layout with optimal shaft usage and proven, high quality components.
EC Type Test Certicate as basis Efciency
Use a control system of your choice! You can congure LEA® into a bespoke product from your company by combining it with a control system of your choice. It is also possible to integrate further options of operating and indicator elements that are freely available on the market. LEA® provides maximum exibility for the shaft height dimensions, you can design the type-approved system optionally with reduced headroom and/or reduced pit depth. If there is more space available, simply plan with conventional shaft height dimensions – some additional safety measures can then be omitted. As of 630 kg, an open through entrance is also possible.
The elevator car design of LEA ® is highly presentable as you can choose from a wide range of ceiling lightings, wall versions,
ooring materials and hand-rails. The LED lighting systems are very appealing and economical. Further options such as glass doors and a glass rear wall are also possible in the elevator car. In all cases, LEA® is a very economical system. The initial purchase offers a very good price-performance ratio and it is optimised for rapid installation. The deployment of a modern, gearless machine
makes it highly energy efcient during
Modern, highly efcient gearless machine (PMC Gearless) Variable frequency control (V3F) with power regeneration as an option Energy saving LED lighting
Economic efciency Excellent price/performance ratio
Efcient maintenance options
Reliability High reliability resulting from deployment of proven components (e.g. doors) High quality materials Design Modern elevator car design with many equipment options Glass doors and glass rear wall in the elevator car as an option Comfort Low-noise Gentle ride quality and precise stops Innovation Machine-Room-Less With / without reduced headroom and pit depths Scope of supply Short delivery times Common options available Flexibility
Congurable into an elevator system from your company by deploying your preferred control system and the operating and indicator elements you wish to have.
Not included in the scope of supply of the LEA ® are: Control system, control box with measures for rescue of passengers, operating and indicator elements, external control panels, mounted control panels in the elevator car, emergency call system, travelling cable, shaft selector, shaft wiring, shaft lighting, inspection control and emergency stop switch.
operation. LEA provides you with a modern, attractive elevator system with all the advantages of series manufacturing. ®
Energy efciency With LEA®, you can congure an elevator system
that achieves a high energy efciency class. You thereby make a signicant contribution to the
A B
reduction of ongoing operating and energy costs and lowering CO 2 emissions. On an installation with 6 30 kg, 4 landings, 8.6 m travel height, LED lighting, automatic shutdown of the car lighting and power
regeneration, it has been possible to verify energy efcienc y class "A" in the usage category 1 in accordanc e with VDI 4707.
174
Issue 09/2015
LEA
®
Technical Overview s t i K Two-panel telescopic sliding door (M2T) [kg]
Rated Load
Speed Max. travel height
1)
450
630
1000 (deep)
[m/s]
1.0
[m]
45
Number of passengers
6
Dual entrance
no
8
13
no
yes
no
yes
16
Max. number of landings Car width CW
[mm]
1000
Car depth CD
[mm]
1250
1100
Car height CH [DH+100] or [DH+200]
[mm]
Door width DW
[mm]
Door height DH
[mm]
Shaft width SW with DW 800
[mm]
1500
1600
Shaft width SW with DW 900
[mm]
–
1600
Shaft depth ECD/D11 door in shaft
[mm]
1650
1785
2010
2485
2710
Shaft depth ECD/D11 door in recess (recess = 80 mm)
[mm]
1580
1715
1870
2415
2570
Shaft depth ECD/D11 door on landing (recess = 100 mm)
[mm]
1550
1685
1810
2385
2510
Shaft depth S8A/D11 door in shaft
[mm]
1655
1790
2020
2490
2720
Shaft depth S8A/D11 door in recess (recess = 55 mm)
[mm]
1600
1735
1910
2435
2610
Shaft head height – red. shaft head [CH+500] with ECD
[mm]
2600 / 2700 / 2800 / 3000
Shaft head height – red. shaft head [DH+800] with S8A or glass door
[mm]
2800 / 2900 / 3100
Conventional shaft head height [CH+1300]
[mm]
3400 / 3500 / 3600 / 3800
Schaft pit depth with reduced shaft pit 2)
[mm]
400
Conventional shaft pit depth
[mm]
1100 – 1850
1400
2100
2100 / 2200 / 2300 / 2500
800 / 900
800
2000 / 2100 / 2300
Min. oor-to-oor-distance [DH+550]; (min. 200 with of fset dual entrance) [mm]
2550 (with ECD) / 2590 (with S8A)
Two-panel central opening door (M2Z ) Rated load
Speed Max. travel height 1)
[kg]
450
630
1000 (deep)
[m/s]
1.0
[m]
45
Number of passengers
6
Dual entrance
no
8
13
no
yes
no
yes
16
Max. number of landings Car width CW
[mm]
1000
1100
Car depth CD
[mm]
1250
Car height CH [DH+100]
[mm]
Door width DW
[mm]
Door height DH
[mm]
2000 / 2100 / 2300
Shaft width SW with DW 800
[mm]
1800
Shaft width SW with DW 900
[mm]
–
Shaft depth S11/D11 door in shaft
[mm]
1610
1745
1930
2445
2630
Shaft depth S11/D11 door in recess (recess = 80 mm)
[mm]
1540
1675
1790
2375
2490
1400
2100
2100 / 2200 / 2300 / 2500
800 / 900
800
2000
Shaft depth S11/D11 door on landing (recess = 100 mm)
[mm]
1510
1645
1730
2345
2430
Shaft depth S8A/D11 door in shaft
[mm]
1575
1710
1860
2410
2560
Shaft depth S8A/D11 door in recess (recess = 20 mm)
[mm]
1560
1695
1830
2395
2530
Conventional shaft head height [CH+1300]
[mm]
3400 / 3500 / 3600 / 3800
Conventional shaft pit depth
[mm]
1100 – 1850
Min. oor-to-oor-distance [DH+550]; (min. 200 with of fset dual entrance) [mm]
2550 (with S11) / 2590 (with S8A)
With a travel height from 33 m to 45 m, no reduced shaft pit possible.
1)
With elevator car ooring material thickness of up to 3.5 mm, shaft pit depth of 425 mm with ooring material thickness of up to 25 mm.
2)
www.liftequip.com
175
LEA
®
Technical Details s t i K Technical and electric data [kg]
Q
Rated load
450
630
1000
Synchronous gearless machine
type
PMC145-2S
PMC145-2M
PMC145-2L
Frequency controller (V3F)
type
MFC 21/31
MFC 21/31
MFC 21/31
MFR 5.5
MFR 5.5
MFR 7.5
with energy recovery (optional)
type
Number of travel per hour max.
[s/h]
180
Rated output of motor
[kW]
2.8
3.9
6.0
Operating input power 1), 2)
[kVA]
3.6
4.7
7.2
Nominal operating current
[A]
5.1
6.7
10.4
Starting current 1), 2)
[A]
7.8
10.0
15.1
1), 2)
Rope suspension
2:1
Diameter of traction sheave Suspension rope (steel) Guide rails
D T
[mm]
n x d s
[mm]
240 5/6 x 6
9/10 x 6
6/7 x 6
Elevator car
T70
Counterweight
T-50/A
Counterweight with safety gear
T70
At 400 Volt / 50 Hz.2) Data for the elevator control unit have t o be added. During the planning phase, please consider all applicable regulations stipulated by the relevant notied body and all applicable national regulations. 1)
Specied loads in the shaft pit Rated load
Q
[kg]
450
630
1000
Load points / elevator car guide rails
P7 [kN]
16
20
29
Load points / elevator car buffer
P8 [kN]
48
59
86
Load points / counterweight buffer
P9 [kN]
37
44
62
Load points / counterweight guide rails
P10 [kN]
16
19
27
P10 ½ x P8* P9 P7
P7
P8
Extraordinary loads: - Load points / machine base frame
P11 [kN]
- Load points / rope xing points
P12 [k N]
4 x 3.5
4 x 4.5
D S
P10
4x6
½ x P8*
4 x 2.5 – 4 x 6.5 4 x 3.5 – 4 x 9.0 4 x 6.0 – 4 x 13.5
The loads P7 to P10 never occur simultaneously. * Two buffers in the case of reduced shaft pit depth. With a conventional shaft pit depth, only one buffer, central between the elevator car guide rails. DW + 240 1040 (DW = 800)
70 (DW = 800) 50 (DW = 900)
1140 (DW = 900) SW
Shaft layout with central opening door (M2Z)
Shaft layout with side-opening door (M2T)
D D C S
DW CW SW
) l s a s n e o c i e t R p o (
D D C S
DW CW
) l s a s n e o c i e t R p o (
SW
D D C S
DW CW SW
) l s a s n e o c i e t R p o (
D D C S
DW CW
) l s a s n e o c i e t R p o (
SW
Shaft layout is also possible as mirror-inverted, with position of the counterweight on the opposite shaft side.
176
Issue 09/2015
LEA
®
Technical Details s t i K Door installed in shaft The landing doors are fastened to the shaft wall by means of brackets and drill
xings. Door type S8A can optionally be
Shaft vertical section with reduced headroom and / or conventional headroom and or reduced pit depth conventional pit depth (only available with telescopic door)
mounted with securing bolts on anchor rails (measurement in concrete according
to CEN/TS 1992-4:2009) that are cast into the shaft wall or welded onto a shaf t steel structure. CW D D C S
m m 0 0 0 3 / 0 0 8 2 / 0 0 7 2 / 0 0 6 2 = H S
DW SW
FFL
UFL
FFL
UFL
m m 0 0 3 2 / 0 0 1 2 / 0 0 0 2 = H D
m m 0 0 5 2 / 0 0 3 2 / 0 0 2 2 / 0 0 1 2 = H C
m m 0 0 8 3 / 0 0 6 3 / 0 0 5 3 / 0 0 4 3 = H S
Door installation in recess In the interest of optimal utilisation of space, the landing door can be installed in a recess. CW D D C S
UFL FFL ) ) T Z 2 2 M / M / A A 8 8 S ( S (
DW SW
Door installation in the story with shaft front wall Installation of the landing door on the story with the shaft front wall is also possible. This stretches across the entire shaft width. From the point of view of construction, this means no special door opening is required. CW
D D C S
DW SW Front wall of elevator shaft
m m 0 0 1 = s s e c e R
DH - door height
TH - travel height
DW - door width
HST - oor-to-oor-distance
CH - car height CW - car width
SH - shaft headroom SP - shaft pit depth
CD - car depth SW - shaft width
FFL - nished oor level UFL - unnished oor level
SD -
) A 8 S h t i w ( m m 0 9 5 2 / m m 0 5 5 2 =
m m m m m m 0 5 0 8 5 2 = = = s s s s s s e e e c c c e e e R R R
UFL FFL
m 5 4 = . x a m H T
. n i m 1
m T S m H 0 0 T S 2 H = . n i m 2
FFL m m 0 0 4 = P S
UFL
m m 0 0 1 1 = P S
SD
LEA® with reduced dimension for headroom and/or pit depth Ideal for very narrow space available and for reduction of the construction costs. With LEA®, there is the choice of only the headroom, only the pit depth or both dimensions reduced. The reduced dimensions for head room and pit depth are only possible in conjunction with the telescopic door (M2T). Please observe all applicable
LEA® with conventional dimension for headroom and pit depth In the basic version, LEA ® is designed with conventional headroom and conventional shaft pit. Even then, the space requirement is very low. In this case, no add itional protective measures need to be implemented.
regulations stipulated by the relevant notied body and all applicable national regulations.
shaft depth
www.liftequip.com
177
LEA
®
Car Design s t i K Equipment features of the design lines Colours / materials Available colours
colour-line
Electrolytically galvanised
Trafc White (RAL 9016)
White Aluminium Sand Yellow
Ocean Blue
Pastel Green
Pa st el Grey
(RAL 9006)
wood-line
stainless-line
Kiruna Bird (beech)
Rich Cherry (dark cherry)
Natural Oak (light oak)
Erable Chocolat (black ash)
Stainless Steel, grain 220, Ground and Brushed
Stainless Steel Linen
Stainless Steel Elephant Skin
False ceilings and lighting
Honeycomb
Spot LED lighting possible
Constellation LED lighting possible
Domino LED lighting possible
SlimLED PANEL* Lighting directly in the car ceiling
Imola (l=320 mm) with energy-saving lighting
Polymero (l=310 mm) with energy-saving lighting
* on request
Flooring material
Light Grey (6525, Natural Rubber)
Dark Grey (6527, Natural Rubber)
Handrails
Stainless Steel, grain 220, l 40 mm
178
Trafc Wood (3391, Vinyl)
Trafc Attila (2691, Vinyl)
Without ooring material – lowered by 3.5 or 25 mm for customer-tted ooring material
Bumber rails
Stainless Steel, grain 220 , l 40 mm Curved ends (acc. to EN 81-70)
Skirting
Stainless Steel, grain 220
Black Blue (6530, Natural Rubber)
Stainless Steel, grain 220, 140 x 18 mm
Mirror
Aluminium
On rear wall of car, with aluminium strips
PVC 127 x 27 mm
Glass rear wall
In Stainless Steel, frame
prole with aluminium
Wood 120 x 30 mm
Glass door
Glass door panels with frame
Issue 09/2015
LEA
®
Car Design s t i K Elevator cars
colour-line
wood-line
stainless-line
Glass versions (optional)
m m 0 2 1 – H D
H D
0.5 x DW – 62 mm
DW
Glass door panels with frame (telescopic door, opening to the right)
www.liftequip.com
Glass surface in the glass door panel
Glass rear wall
179
LEA
®
Main Components s t i K Gearless machine
Gearless PMC145 The synchronous gearless PMC145-2 is one of the most compact machines worldwide and is perfectly suited for deployment in the LEA ® elevator system without a machine room.
High efciency
Low noise as there is no forced ventilation and very smooth running Safe and comfortable electromagnetic brake release Anti-friction bearings with life-time lubrication Ideally suited for energy recovery
Type-approved safety brake in accordance with EN 81-1 Section 9.10 and protective device against unintended movement of the elevator car in accordance with EN 81-1: 1998+A3:2009 EN 81-A3 compliant UCM verication using the safety brake of the machine and considering the switching times of the control system Rope guard in accordance with EN 81-77 up to earthquake category 3
PMC145-2
Frequency inverter
MFC 21/31 Inverter The power-vector-controlled LiftEquip frequency inverter is optimised for the PMC145-2 synchronous machine.
Inverter with brake activation, power
lter and power choke
MFC 31
MFR (optional)
Doors
Landing door with stainless steel panelling (telescopic door, opening to the left)
180
With travel contactor (MFC 31) Brake resistor in the separate housing Motor parameters stored Rapid commissioning via Plug&Play Emergency power mode possible in the event of a power failure via UPS (uninterrupted power supply) Integrated speed monitoring for compliance with EN81-A3 (for MFC 31) in conjunction with suitable control system Parallel interface and DCP03
Door Type ECD/D11 and/or S11/D11 Landing door ECD and/or S11 Fire-tested in compliance with DIN EN 81-58 Door panels at top with rollers and counterrollers, two gliding felt strips Telescopic door (M2T): door type ECD Central door (M2Z): door type S11 Car door D11 (door drive RT301) Voltage-controlled machine with toothed belt drive Automatic learning function Adjustable opening / closing times Collision detection
MFR Inverter (optional) The MFR frequency inverter with energy recovery capability is the optimal technology for the creation of an energy
efcient elevator. In addition to features of the MFC 21/31:
Inverter with electronic brake activation,
power lter, power choke and electronic
travel contactors Integrated power regeneration, which means no brake resistor is required Possibility for activation of a standby and
sleep mode to improve energy efciency
Possibility for remote parameterisation via parallel interface, DCP03/04 and CANopen
Door Type S8A /D11 (optional / on request) Landing door S8A Fire-tested in compliance with DIN EN 81-58 Door panels at top with large rollers and counterrollers, adjustable sliders The door panels are single-leaf and made in noise-inhibiting sandwich design Comprehensive range of options Car door D11 (door drive VF400) Frequency-controlled machine with toothed belt drive Automatic learning function Adjustable opening / closing times Collision detection Issue 09/2015
LEA
®
Scope of Supply and Planning Information s t i K Scope of supply LEA® elevator system Machine Gearless machine PMC145-2, with motor cable BSV4 for brake activation Encoder (BISS-C, NDAT, etc.) with cables Positioned on drive bracket in the shaft headroom, supported by bearings and protected from vibration Frequency inverter MFC21 / MFC31 inverter without power regeneration, with chopper resistor MFR inverter (optional) with power regeneration Elevator car Self-supporting elevator car, two plastic diverter pulleys ( l 240 mm) on the bottom, suspension 2:1, car railing Vibration insulation with steel springs Ventilation in the door portal Counterweight Steel plate frame with diverter pulley Filler weights: steel, Gussolith (type 3.8 / 5.0), concrete, in variable ratio Counterweight compensation 40 % Guides on elevator car / counterweight Moving plastic guides Optional pulley guides Guide rails For elevator car: T70 For counterweight T50/A, with safety gear on counterweight: T70 Rope system Steel ropes l 6.0 mm (1770 N/mm²)
Rope xing points in the shaft headroom, suspensions insulated with rubber / steel springs Compensation chain as of travel height > 33 m
Shaft equipment Two-part sliding shackles made of powder-coated, painted or galvanised steel plate Painting/priming Steel parts mainly with powder coating (similar to RAL 7005) or priming (RAL 7031 and/or RAL 7005), layer thickness approx. 60 µm; galvanised parts remain galvanised
www.liftequip.com
Landing door (ECD and/or S11) / car door (D11) Door panels and door architraves made of electrolytically galvanised sheet metal with primed front (RAL 7005) Car door panels single-leaf, made of austenitic stainless steel, grain 220 Door drive with DC-current control, power transmission with toothed belt, closing force limitation Light curtain Aluminium shaft door sills Progressive safety gear Progressive safety gear for downwards
direction, integrated in the car oor
Protection in upward direction: monitored operational brake according
to EN 81-1, 9.10 Speed governor l 200 mm, with remote tripping, positioned in the shaft headroom at the rail end Governor rope l 6.5 mm Tensioner device Buffer Counterweight: driving on the frame Elevator car: in the shaft pit With reduced shaf t headroom (optional) Opening monitoring for all landing doors with reset for normal travel
Speed governor with “positive effect” * of control system Monitored, automatic pivot stops on the car roof and step protection monitoring Monitored, pivoting railing
With reduced shaft pit (optional) Opening monitoring for the landing doors
in top and bottom oors with reset for normal travel
Speed governor with “positive effect” * of control system Monitored telescopic car door toeguard with electrical operation Monitored buffer support for connection in the shaft pit
Not included in the scope of supply are: Control system with control box and measures for the rescue of passengers Operating and indicator elements External control panels Mounted control panel in the elevator car Emergency call system Car distributor box Travelling cable Shaft selector Shaft wiring and lighting Inspection control, emergency stop switch Integration of the inverter Connection of the elevator car lighting, of the elevator car fan and of the overload sensor Load measurement system (occupied, full load, overload) All of the above components must be
provided by the installation rm and/or a control system supplier. Control box of the control system The control box with control system is not included in the scope of supply. It must
be provided by the installation rm. The control box is mounted preferably in the top landing of the entrance area. Installation in the landings below this is possible. The nearest landing door must be located within calling distance of the control box and be visible from the control box. If the control box is installed in an adjoining room, the room must be equipped with an intercom system in accordance with
EN 81-1:1998+A3, Section 14.2.3.4. Legal information The LEA® elevator system has been
granted an EC Type Test Certicate in accordance with Point 5, Paragraph B, Appendix V (Module B) of the 95/16/ EC Directive. Before the commencement
of operation, the installation rm must have the elevator system per inspected / approved in an individual inspection with danger analysis. The existing EC Type Test
Certicate can be used as the basis for this. During the planning phase, please consider all applicable regulations stipulated by the
relevant notied body and all applicable
* "Positive effect" means that the speed g overnor is in the pre-triggered position in the event of a power failure. System is to be safeguarded with a battery.
national regulations. Patents have been granted for the LEA® elevator system. On an order-related, LiftEquip will issue a quota licence.
181
LEA
®
Performance Programme and Options s t i K LEA ®: technical data, landing door Design lines
colour-line
wood-line
stainless-line
Technical data
Rated load Q = 450 / 630 / 1000 kg
(with 1 entrance)
Q = 675 / 1050 kg
(with open through entrance)
•/•/• /
• • •
Speed v = 1.0 m/s Travel height TH max. = 45 m Max. number of landings 16
•/
Car height CH = 2100 / 2200 / 2300 / 2500 mm
/
/
Door types M2T
Side-opening, double-panel telescopic opening door
M2Z
Centre-opening, double-panel sliding door
•
Door width DW = 800 / 900 mm
/
•/
Door height DH = 2000 / 2100 / 2300 mm
• /
Shaft headroom SH
•
Min. 3400 mm (CH + 1300 mm) Reduced: min. 2800 mm (DH + 800 mm, with door type S8A (M2T) with VF400) Reduced: min. 2600 mm (CH + 500 mm, with door type ECD (M2T)) Shaft pit depth SP
•
Min. 1100 mm
1100 – 1850 mm Reduced: min. 400 mm + ooring material thickness (available up to TH < 33 m), only available with telescopic door (M2T)
Reduced: 450 – 1100 mm (available up to TH < 33 m), only available with telescopic door (M2T)
Rail bracket xing with drill xing to anchor rails Compatible supports for calcium silicate walls (not for Germany)
Safety gear on the counterweight Pulley guide on the elevator car Roller guide on counterweight Halogen-free wiring Landing door
Installation in shaft / in recess (80 mm) / in landing (recess = 100 mm) [ECD and/or S11]
•/
/
Installation in the shaft / in recess (with M2T = 55 mm; with M2Z = 20 mm) [S8A]
/
Installation in landing with shaft front wall, shaft width = 1600 – 1800 mm
•
Fire protection safety standard E120 / EW60 in accordance with EN 81-58 Fire protection safety standard EI60 acc. to EN 81-58 Fire protection safety standard E30 acc. to GOST Fire protection safety standard EI120 acc. to GOST Design of door panels and door frame Primed (RAL 7005) / electrolytically galvanised
•/•
Stainless Steel, grain 220 / Linen / Elephant Skin
/
/
•/
/
Aluminium door sill (max. wheel load 190 kg) / Stainless Steel (max. wheel load 350 kg) Prole between the door frames made of aluminium Gap cover – primed (RAL 7005) / electrolytically galvanised Gap cover – Stainless Steel, grain 220 / Linen / Elephant Skin Wall plug xture Floor-to-oor-distance landing min. = DH + 360 mm
•
/
/ /
/
/
•
Glass door panels with frame (door type ECD/D11 and/or S11/D11) l
182
in the standard,
¡
optional, – not available. Please contact our sales consultants regarding the availability of options.
Issue 09/2015
LEA
®
Performance Programme and Options s t i K LEA ®: car door, elevator car equipment Design lines
colour-line
wood-line
stainless-line
Car door
Door security system (closing-edge monitoring)
•
Light curtain (94 crossed beams) Door panel design
•
Electrolytically galvanised Primed (RAL 7005)
–
Painted Trafc White 1) / White Aluminium 2)
/
•
Stainless Steel, grain 220 Stainless Steel, Linen Stainless Steel, Elephant Skin Car opening panel
Electrolytically galvanised / Trafc White 1) / White Aluminium 2)
•
Stainless Steel, grain 220 / Linen / Elephant Skin Aluminium door sill Mechanical car door locking, acc. to EN 81-1/2
/
/
/
/
•
Elevator car equipment
Wall panels
•
Electrolytically galvanised
Trafc White 1) / White Aluminium 2) / Sand Yellow / Ocean Blue 3)
4)
5)
/
/
–
/
–
6)
Rich Cherry / Natural Oak / Kiruna Bird / Erable Chocolate Pastel Green / Pastel Grey
/
–
•/
•
Car ceiling in Trafc White
1)
Elevator car lighting Honeycomb / Spot / Constellation / Domino / Imola / Polymero
•/
– –
/
Stainless Steel, grain 220 / Linen / Elephant Skin
/
– – –
/
/
/
/
/
•
SlimLED PANEL 7) / LED-Beleuchtung (bei Spot / Constellation / Domino)
/
•/
/
/
•/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Hand-rail Type Stainless Steel, grain 220, diameter 40 mm with curved ends Type Stainless Steel, grain 220, diameter 40 mm Bumper rails Skirting (Aluminium / Stainless Steel, grain 220)
•/
/
Flooring material Light Grey 6525 / Dark Grey 6527 / Black Blue 6530 (all natural rubber)
Trafc Wood 3391 / Trafc Attila 2691 (all vinyl) Floor recessed by 3.5 mm / 25 mm (ooring material supplied by the customer)
/
•/
Mirror on side wall of car opposite car operating panel / on rear wall of car
•/
/
/ / /
Glass rear wall (basic) Folding seat (surface-mounted version) Fan in car ceiling with automatic switching on/off as well as after-run function 1)
RAL 9016,2)
l
in the standard,
RAL 9006,3) Cherry dark, 4) Oak Bright, 5) Beech, 6) Ash Black, 7) on request – not available. Please contact our sales consultants regarding the availability of options. ¡ optional,
www.liftequip.com
183
LEA
®
Reducing energy consumption This well balanced system and LED lighting option enables LEA ® to make an obvious contribution to reducing regular operating costs and CO 2 emissions.
Energy recovery The deployment of the MFR frequency inverter with integrated power regeneration can
further enhance the overall efciency of the installation. By taking account of the usage category in accordance with VDI 4707, energy efciency class "A" can be achieved.
Technology with a secur e future
Quality Made in Germany – Quality Made by "LiftEquip": on a level with international standards and appreciated worldwide.
Low-noise ride quality The deployment of our high-quality and perfectly balanced components make LEA ® a very quiet and comfortable elevator system.
Environmentally friendly production Throughout the production of LEA ®, we ensure that the environment is protected.
184
Issue 09/2015
LEA Flexible ®
LEA Flexible ®
s t i K
Variabel and functional MRL, 450 – 1000 kg, 1,0 m/s Adaptable dimensions PMC 145-2, MFC or MFR
www.liftequip.com
Basic package
186
Technical Data
187
Floor Plans
188
185
LEA Flexible ®
Basic Package s t i K
Your Choice: Basic package (independent of travel height): • • • • • • • • • •
Gearless PMC145-2 Frequency inverter MFC or MFR Machine frame Ropefixing frame Overspeed governor Counterweight Rope anchorages Panelling of counterweight in liftshaft Governor tension pulley Buffer supports
Optionen: • • • • • • • • • • •
186
Car beams Counterweight beams Car guide rails Counterweight guide rails Fishplates Traction ropes Governor ropes Counterweights inserts Cabin Shaft doors Cabin doors
Issue 09/2015
LEA Flexible ®
Technical Data s t i K
Technical Data Rated load
Q
[kg]
Rated speed max.
v
[m/s]
Suspension
r
400
450
630
800
1000
1,0 2:1
Car internal dimensions (CW x CD)
[mm]
Cabin height clear
[mm]
Door width (M2T)
DW [mm]
Door height
DH
Clear shaft (W x D) without dual entrance
320
900 x 1000
1100 x 1000
1000 x 1200
1000 x 1250
1350 x 1400
700
800
1750 x 1300
900
1600 x 1400
2100 x 1100
1100
1200
2150 x 1800
2650 x 1600
2000 1450 x 1500
1650 x 1500
1550 x 1600
1650 x 1800
1900 x 1800
Shaft pit
SP
[mm]
1350
Headroom
HR
[mm]
3500 (KH + 1300)
Travel height
TH
[m]
www.liftequip.com
1100 x 2100
2200
[mm] [mm]
1100 x 1400
1650 x 2500
2300 x 1700
45
187
LEA Flexible ®
Floor Plans s t i K
Headroom
Shaft pit
Shaft layout
T S β
.
-
• Load specifications Px are determined during configuration. • For dual entrance will change the shaft depth, depending on the type of door.
188
Issue 09/2015
LEA Comfort ®
LEA Comfort ®
s t i K
The allrounder MRL, 450 – 5000 kg, 0,5 – 2 m/s Custom applications DAF210 / DAF270, MFC / MFR
www.liftequip.com
Product description
190
Project planning data
191
189
LEA Comfort ®
Product Description s t i Machine-room-less gearless t echnology w ith cen K
trally suspended car (2:1) precisely adapted to your requirements is also available for solutions with front and rear entrance. With suspension (4:1) load capacities up to 5000 kg are possible. We assist you in your project planning works and provide the tech nical calculation for your special requirements. Installations with speeds less than 1 m/s can be also designed with reduced shaft pit. • Drive package MINI-Gearless machines DAF210 to DAF270 equipped with safety brake acc. to EN 81-1/9.10 and frequency inverter MFC21 or MFC31 (Plug & Play). The drive package is designed adapted to your installation parameters. The machine has isolated supports for wall mounting and rope suspensions. Optional MFR inverter with integrated regeneration.
• Sling / safety gear TCS25 and TCS40 with gauge KB + 50 mm or TCS40 or TCS60 with gauge KB + 110 mm including safety gear, overload sensor, car isolation and sliding or roller guides.
• Governor With remote tripping and electrical remote reset as well as tensioning weight and fastenings.
• Car and landing door Comfort S8A/K8A as telescopic or center-closing door
• Counterweight With llers and safety gears with sliding or roller guides and travel path cladding, if necessary.
• Buffer Plastic and oil buffers acc. to calculation and design drawings.
• Shaft equipment Rail brackets for car and counterweight including fastenings, car and counterweight rails with shplates and rail
• Ropes Suspension ropes with
clips.
attachments and governor rope.
Performance data with 2:1 suspension and center-guided rails Q [kg]
v [m/s]
450 kg / 475 kg
0,50 m/s ≤ v ≤ 2,0 m/s
630 kg / 675 kg
0,50 m/s ≤ v ≤ 2,0 m/s
1.000 kg / 1.050 kg
0,50 m/s ≤ v ≤ 2,0 m/s
1.600 kg / 1.650 kg
0,63 m/s ≤ v ≤ 2,0 m/s
2.000 kg / 2.250 kg
0,63 m/s ≤ v ≤ 2,0 m/s
2500 kg
0,63 m/s ≤ v ≤ 2,0 m/s
5000 kg (4:1)
190
≤ 0,5 m/s
Issue 09/2015
LEA Comfort ®
Project Planning Data s t i K
) 1
Shaft head
Shaft plan
We offer: •
Assistance in planning
•
Technical planning works for approval drawings and documentation
•
Documentation and operating manuals for all components
•
Information for your risk analysis
•
A3 detection (UCM) for your conguration
•
By Piece license to use the patents of the system
•
Legal certainty
Machine base frame
Technical data for selected performance levels Suspension Bearing force [kg] Cruise [m/s] Shaftdepth [mm] Shaftwidth 1) [mm] Shafthead [mm] Shaftmine [mm] Car width [mm] [mm] Car depth
450 1,0 1500 1650 3550 1150* 1100 1100
630 1,0 1800 1650 3550 1150* 1100 1400
2:1 1000 1600 1600 1,0 1,0 1,6 2500 2800 2800 1650 2150 2150 3550 4000 4150 1150* 1150* 1250 1100 1400 1400 2100 2400 2400
1600 2,0 2800 2150 4200 1400 1400 2400
2000 2000 1,0 1,6 3100 3100 2250 2250 4100 4250 1250* 1250 1500 1500 2400 2700
2000 2,0 3100 2250 4300 1400 1500 2700
2500 1,0 3100 2700 3850 1250 1800 2700
4:12) 5000 0,5 3900 3900 4000 1500 2500 3500
TB = 900 mm; TH = 2100 mm; KH = 2200 mm; * reduced shaft pit design available 1)
Sheet metal frame Q ≤ 1050 kg; Distance wall to c enter counter weight 130 mm Please contact us for an individual planning
2)
www.liftequip.com
191
192
Issue 09/2015
LEA® Cargo
LEA Cargo ®
s t i K
Robust and reliable MR, 1800 – 6000 kg, up to 1,0 m/s Planning according to customer requirements Door width up to 3000 mm
www.liftequip.com
System Description and Advantages
194
Technical Overview
195
Planning Drawings: Elevator Shaft
197
Planning Drawings: Doors
198
Planning Data: Doors
199
Robust Elevator Car Equipment
200
Main Components
201
Scope of Supply an Planning Information
203
Range of Geared Machines
204
Range of Gearless Machines
206
Options
207
193
LEA® Cargo
System Description and Advantages s t i K LEA ® Cargo elevator system LiftEquip offers you with the LEA ® Cargo elevator assembly kit a modern, adaptable solution for demanding transport operations in shopping centres and in industry applications. It is a robust passenger and freight elevator with machine room of fering either a proven geared machine or an
efcient gearless machine. The choice of machine type depends on the rated load and speed. Only proven and high-quality components are used. Use a control system of your choice! In order to be able to offer LEA ® Cargo to your customers, combine it with a control system freely available on the market and with operating and indicator elements of your choice. This ensures that you can congure LEA® Cargo for your customers into a product from your company. LEA® Cargo exhibits the ultimate in exi bility when it comes to the doors: you can use two-, four- or six-panel centre-opening doors or one side-opening three-panel door. All the door systems are suitable for operation in the freight elevator under heavy-duty conditions. The modular system is offered with an entrance and open through entrance. The door width can be designed to extend up to the car width. This provides the perfect conditions for loading and unloa-
ding. The complete range of wall and oor materials or the optional use of additional bumper rails prevents damage to the functionally elegant elevator car. LEA® Cargo is a highly variable, economical and durable elevator system with a modern machine. By using a frequency inverter with optional power regeneration it provides the
perfect preconditions for energy-efcient operation.
194
Safety
System complies with DIN EN 81-1: 1998+A3
Efciency Variable frequency control (VVVF) with power regeneration as an option Energy-saving LED lighting as an option Economic efciency Equipped either with a robust geared machine or with a highly efcient ge arless machine Reliability High reliability resulting from the use of robust components (e.g. solid doors) High-quality materials Design Functional, durable car design Robust wall materials and load-bearing
ooring materials, bumper rails optional Comfort Door width can be designed up to the car width for easy loading and unloading Scope of supply Wide range of door types and door dimensions from ThyssenKrupp or Meiller; further door makes can be used on request Common options available Safety components in IP54, Teil-Ex (partial explosion protection) and Ex (explosion protection) available on request Flexibility
Congurable into an elevator system from your company by deploying your preferred control system and the operating and indicator elements you wish to have Engineering ser vices At your request LiftEquip also offers engineering services in the planning of elevator systems: Conguration and selection of components, preparation of the general arrangement drawing (GAD). This enables you to circumvent capacity bottlenecks or resort to additional areas of competence.
The following are not included in the LEA ® Cargo scope of supply: Control system with control cabinet, operating and indicator elements, external control panels, built-in control panel in the car, emergency call system, car distribution box, travelling cable, shaft selector, shaft wiring, shaft lighting, inspection control, emergency stop switch , integration of the inverter, connection of the car lighting and the overload sensor, load measurement system and electrical installat ions in the machine room. Energy efciency With LEA® Cargo you can congure an elevator
system that achieves a high energy efciency class. You thereby make a signicant contribution to the reduction of ongoing operating and energy costs and lowering CO2 emissions.
Issue 09/2015
LEA® Cargo
Technical Overview s t i K Project planning (freight traction elevator with machine room above the shaft – 1:1 suspension) Rated load
Q
[kg]
1600
2000
Rope suspension
1:1
2500
2800
1600 – 2550
1600 – 2600
1:1
Speed
v
Travel height min. – max. 2)
TH
[m/s]
1) 0.63 – 1.0
[m]
2.5 – 40
Machine
Geared
Standard
Gearless
–
Open through entrance
optional
Car width
CW
[mm]
1400
1400 – 2150
Car depth
CD
[mm]
2400
1900 – 2950
CH
[mm]
Car height
1900 – 3000 2000 – 2500
800 – 1400
800 – 2150
Door width
DW
[mm]
Door height 3)
DH
[mm]
Distance, shaft wall - car (cw side)
B1
[mm]
Distance, shaft wall - car
B2
[mm]
300 – 850
Shaft headroom height min.
Min. SH
[mm]
5) CH + 1300 4) / CH + 1900
3)
Shaft pit depth min.
800 – 2550
800 – 2500
585 – 850
700 – 1000
2000 – 2500 570 – 850
1250 – 1400
300 – 1000 5) CH + 1450 4) / CH + 1900
6)
1650 6)
Min. SP
[mm]
P1 – P5
[kN]
120
159
192
227
P1 – P5
[kN]
382
474
614
724
P7 – P10 [kN]
169
210
274
309
Specied loads
Forces on the machine room oor During normal operation 7)
Unusual load
Forces in the shaft pit Max. forces in the shaft pit 1)
Speed v = 1.6 m/s available on request.
2)
The travel height decisively determines the elevator and shaft parameters. Exact planning specications depend on the conguration of the elevator system in each case. Deviating dimensions are possible on request. Our sales advisers will be glad to provide information regarding the creation of exact planning data for your specic system conguration.
Standard dimensions DW and DH in increments of 100 mm. 4) Car roof/guard rail height of 700 mm. 5) Car roof/guard rail height of 1100 mm. Shaft pit depth increases at v > 1.0 m/s. 7) These loads occur at least once a year during the annual check of the installation (safety gear test). Details on determining the shaft depth dependent on the door type, see page 7. 3) 6)
www.liftequip.com
195
LEA® Cargo
Technical Overview s t i K Project planning (freight traction elevator with machine room above the shaft – 2:1 suspension) Rated load
Q
[kg]
1600
2000
2:1
2500
Rope suspension
3000
3500
2:1
Speed
v
Travel height min. – max. 2)
TH
Machine
Geared
Gearless
[m/s]
0.63 – 1.0 1)
[m]
2.5 – 40 Standard
–
optional
Open through entrance
optional
Car width
CW
[mm]
1400
1400 – 2150
Car depth
CD
[mm]
2400
1900 – 2950
CH
[mm]
Door width
DW
[mm]
Door height
Car height 3)
1600 – 2550
1900 – 2500
1600 – 3000
1900 – 3000
2150 – 4050
2000 – 2500 800 – 1400
800 – 2150
2000 – 2800
800 – 2550
800 – 2500
800 – 3000
2000 – 2500
DH
[mm]
Distance, shaft wall - car (cw side)
B1
[mm]
Distance, shaft wall - car
B2
[mm]
300 – 850
300 – 1000
Shaft headroom height min.
Min. SH
[mm]
5) CH + 1300 4) / CH + 1900
5) CH + 1450 4) / CH + 1900
Shaft pit depth min.
Min. SP
[mm]
1250 – 1400 6)
1650 6)
During normal operation
P1 – P5
[kN]
120
159
192
227
220
Unusual load 7)
P1 – P5
[kN]
382
474
614
724
703
P7 – P10 [kN]
169
210
274
309
337
4000
4500
5000
5500
6000
3)
570 – 850
585 – 850
700 – 1000
Specied loads
Forces on the machine room oor
Forces in the shaft pit Max. forces in the shaft pit Rated load
Q
[kg]
Rope suspension
2:1
Speed
v
Travel height min. – max.
2)
TH
0.63 – 1.0
[m/s]
0.3 – 0.5 2.5 – 30
[m]
Machine
Geared
Standard
Gearless
–
Open through entrance
optional
Car width
CW
[mm]
1600 – 3000
1600 – 2750
1800 – 2500
Car depth
CD
[mm]
2400 – 4550
2400 – 5000
2550 – 4950
CH
[mm]
Door width
DW
[mm]
3)
DH
[mm]
B1
[mm]
Distance, shaft wall - car
B2
[mm]
Shaft headroom height min.
Min. SH
[mm]
Shaft pit depth min.
Min. SP
[mm]
During normal operation
P1 – P5
[kN]
241
264
290
360
380
Unusual load 7)
P1 – P5
[kN]
673
735
808
994
1037
P7 – P10 [kN]
380
417
460
570
620
Car height 3)
Door height
Distance, shaft wall - car (cw side)
2000 – 2300 4100 – 4800
4500 – 5250
2000 – 2800 800 – 3000
800 – 2750
800 – 2500 2000 – 2800
700 – 1000
850 – 1000
300 – 1000
400 – 1000
5) CH + 1450 4) / CH + 1900
5) CH + 1500 4) / CH + 1900
1650
Specied loads
Forces on the machine room oor
Forces in the shaft pit Max. forces in the shaft pit 1)
Speed v = 1.6 m/s available on request.
2)
The travel height decisively determines the elevator and shaft parameters. Exact planning specications depend on the conguration of the elevator system in each case. Deviating dimensions are possible on request. Our sales advisers will be glad to provide information regarding the creation of exact planning data for your specic system conguration.
Standard dimensions DW and DH in increments of 100 mm. 4) Car roof/guard rail height of 700 mm. 5) Car roof/guard rail height of 1100 mm. Shaft pit depth increases at v > 1.0 m/s. 7) These loads occur at least once a year during the annual check of the installation (safety gear test). Details on determining the shaft depth dependent on the door type, see page 7. 3) 6)
196
Issue 09/2015
LEA® Cargo
Planning Drawings: Elevator Shaft
With 1 entrance
s t i K
Shaf t ver tical section
MRD
D C
D S H R M
P1 to P5 *
DW B1
CW
(B2)
SW
With open through entrance
H S
DW H D
H C
FFL UFL
D C
D S
UFL FFL
FFL UFL
H T
DW B1
(B2)
CW
1
T S H
SW
UFL FFL 2
FFL UFL Key: DH DW CH CW
-
CD SW
- Car depth - Shaft width
SD MRH MRD P1.. B1 B2
-
Door height Door width Car height Car width
TH HST SH SP
-
FFL UFL -
Travel height Floor clearance Shaf t headroom height Shaft pit depth
Finished oor level Unnished oor level
Shaft depth Machine room height Machine room depth Loads in the machine room or in the shaft pit Distance, shaft wall - car (counterweight side) Distance, shaft wall - car
www.liftequip.com
P7 to P10 *
T S H
P S
SD
* The exact positions of the load point s in the machine room and in the shaft pit are entere d in the general arrangement drawing. The shaft layouts are examples and may also be shown mirr or-inverted.
197
LEA® Cargo
Planning Drawings: Doors s t i K Landing and elevator car doors fr om ThyssenKrupp S8A/K8A M2Z (min. W)
1)
0 6 2
0 0 0 2 6 s s e c e R
S8A/K8A M4TZ (min. W)
CW
(min. W)
1)
1)
0 2 3
Entrance side min. 1/2 DW +85 1)
DW = 700 - 1400 SW
5 5 s s e c e R
CW
(min. W) 1)
5 6 2
min. 1/2 DW +85 1)
Entrance side min. 1/4 DW +85 1)
DW = 800 - 2500 SW
min. 1/4 DW +85 1)
Landing and elevator car doors f rom Meiller TTS/TTK 31 EvoS 2) (min. W) 1)
0 8 3
CW
TTS/TTK 31 EvoN 2) (min. W) 1)
(min. W) 1)
0 6 3
0 3 1 s s e c e R
Entrance side 20
DW = 700 - 1400 SW
0 1 1 s s e c e R
min. 1/3 DW +70
Entrance side 20
0 0 3
0 9 s s e c e R
CW
(min. W) 1)
(min. W) 1)
5 8 2
Entrance side min. 1/4
DW = 700 - 3200
0 1 5 2 7 s s e c e R
min. 1/4
min. 1/4
DW+70 1)
DW+70 1)
SW
0 6 3
198
(min. W) 1)
Entrance side DW = 1100 - CW max. SW
(min. W) 1)
DW = 700 - 3000 SW
min. 1/4
DW+70 1)
TTS/ TTK 32 EvoN (min. W) 1)
0 6 3
0 3 1 s s e c e R
min. 1/6 DW+70 1)
1)
CW
CW
Entrance side
TTS/ TTK 32 EvoS (min. W) 1)
min. 1/3 DW +70
TTS/TTK 28 EvoN
0 1 2
DW+70 1)
DW = 700 - 1400 SW
TTS/TTK 28 EvoS (min. W) 1)
(min. W) 1)
CW
min. 1/6 DW+70 1)
0 1 1 s s e c e R
CW
(min. W) 1)
Entrance side min. 1/6 DW+70 1)
DW = 1100 - CW max. SW
min. 1/6 DW+70 1)
The higher value in each case is valid. 2) Door opening to the right pictured; version opening to the left also available. Key to the abbreviat ions used, see page 5.
Issue 09/2015
LEA® Cargo
Planning Data: Doors s t i K Determining the shaft depth Manufacturer
Door type
Shaft depth w/out open through entrance [mm]
Shaft depth w/ open through entrance [mm]
ThyssenKrupp
S8A/K8A M2Z
SD = CD + 260 + 85 – 60 (recess*)
SD = CD + 2 x 260 – 2 x 60 (recess*)
ThyssenKrupp
S8A/K8A M4TZ
SD = CD + 320 + 85 – 55 (recess*)
SD = CD + 2 x 320 – 2 x 55 (recess*)
Meiller
TTS/TTK 31 EvoS
SD = CD + 380 + 85 – 130 (recess*)
SD = CD + 2 x 380 – 2 x 130 (recess*)
Meiller
TTS/ TTK 31 EvoN
SD = CD + 360 + 85 – 110 (recess*)
SD = CD + 2 x 360 – 2 x 110 (recess*)
Meiller
TTS/TTK 28 EvoS
SD = CD + 300 + 85 – 95 (recess*)
SD = CD + 2 x 300 – 2 x 95 (recess*)
Meiller
TTS/TTK 28 EvoN
SD = CD + 285 + 85 – 75 (recess*)
SD = CD + 2 x 285 – 2 x 75 (recess*)
Meiller
TTS/ TTK 32 EvoS
SD = CD + 380 + 85 – 130 (recess*)
SD = CD + 2 x 380 – 2 x 130 (recess*)
Meiller
TTS/ TTK 32 EvoN
SD = CD + 360 + 85 – 110 (recess*)
SD = CD + 2 x 360 – 2 x 110 (recess*)
* Subtract depth for the recess(es) only if planned with recess(es).
Fire protection approval for landing doors Manufacturer
Door type
Fire protection
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
ThyssenKrupp
S8A/K8A M2Z
BS 476 [SA100]
70
120
≤90
300
90
60
60
ThyssenKrupp
S8A/K8A M2Z
EN 81-58 (E120, EW30/60) [SA104/105]
120
120
≤90
300
90
60
60
ThyssenKrupp
S8A/K8A M2Z
EN 81-58 (EI60) [SA106]
120
120
≤90
300
90
60
60
ThyssenKrupp
S8A/K8A M2Z
EN 81-58 (EI120) [SA109]
70
70
≤90
300
90
60
60
ThyssenKrupp
S8A/K8A M2Z
DIN 18091 [SA105]
120
120
≤90
300
90
60
60
ThyssenKrupp
S8A/K8A M2Z
[SA16]
ThyssenKrupp
S8A/K8A M4TZ
BS 476 [SA100]
ThyssenKrupp
S8A/K8A M4TZ
EN 81-58 (E120, EW30/60) [SA104/105]
ThyssenKrupp
S8A/K8A M4TZ
EN 81-58 (EI60) [SA106]
ThyssenKrupp
S8A/K8A M4TZ
EN 81-58 (EI120) [SA109]
ThyssenKrupp
S8A/K8A M4TZ
DIN 18091 [SA105]
ThyssenKrupp
S8A/K8A M4TZ
[SA16]
Meiller
TTS/TTK 31 EvoS
EN 81-58
50
50
≤90
500
300
130
130
Meiller
TTS/ TTK 31 EvoN
DIN 18091
120
120
≤90
500
300
110
110
Meiller
TTS/TTK 28 EvoS
EN 81-58
50
50
≤90
500
300
90
90
Meiller
TTS/TTK 28 EvoN
DIN 18091
120
120
≤90
500
300
75
75
Meiller
TTS/ TTK 32 EvoS
EN 81-58
50
50
≤90
500
300
130
130
Meiller
TTS/ TTK 32 EvoN
DIN 18091
120
120
≤90
500
300
110
110
140 120
≤90
300
90
55
55
120
120
≤90
300
90
55
55
120
120
≤90
300
90
55
55
70
70
≤90
300
90
55
55
120
120
≤90
300
90
55
55
70
140
SA – Special version; dimensions in mm. Key to the abbreviations used, see page 5. TTS/TTK 31 to right pictured, to left possible d
3-panel, side-opening telescopic sliding door
b
f
S8A/K8A M2Z
2-panel, centre-opening sliding door H D
S8A/K8A M4TZ TTS/TTK 28 g UFL e
c
FFL
4-panel, centre-opening telescopic sliding door f
TTS/TTK 32 a
DW
a
6-panel, centre-opening telescopic sliding door
www.liftequip.com
199
LEA® Cargo
Robust Elevator Car Equipment s t i K LEA® Cargo as an elevator assembly kit for carrying passengers and freight is characterised by an attractive and yet very robust
car. The horizontal projection, the choice of materials and the layout of all the elements are designed for easy, rapid loading and unloading and for a long service life.
Car operating panel / internal pushbutton box (not included in the scope of supply)
For installation ush with the car wall, in a recess for a control box or for a high operating panel Car lighting
Let in ush or very at structural shapes
Bright lighting * optionally with LED light source
200
Fluorescent tubes let into main ceiling
Halogen spotlight ceiling Pure White / stainless steel optionally LED spotlight
Indirect lighting Pure White / stainless steel
Coffered ceiling Pure White / stainless steel
SlimLED PANEL with LED light source
Mouse Grey (RAL 7005)
White Aluminium (RAL 9006)
Pure White (RAL 9016)
Stainless steel Grain 220
Stainless steel Linen
Hand-rail stainless steel l 40 mm
Bumper rail hardwood
Bulb plate stainless steel (4 mm)
Bulb plate aluminium (3 mm)
Ice rubber
Dove Grey vinyl
Wall panels Sheet steel, impact-resistant and structurally stiffened High-quality powder coating Stainless steel versions
Hand-rail and bumper rail Hand-rail stainless steel 40 mm Bumper rail to protect the car walls (can be designed in 1 to 3 rows), height of sections approx. 200 mm Bumper rail stainless steel
Flooring material Bulb plate 6 mm, primed as standard Materials made of rubber or vinyl Without ooring material – lowered by 25 mm for customer-tted ooring material
Black Stone rubber
Kayar Grey rubber
Kayar Black rubber
Issue 09/2015
LEA® Cargo
Main Components s t i K Geared machines TW130 with emergency brake system Horizontal motor position, traction sheave on the left
The range of machines from LiftEquip has
an excellent reputation and covers a nely
graduated performance range.
Gears TW63B, TW130, TW160, W263C and W332C Single-stage worm gear Type-approved protective device (optionally with emergency brake system NBS) and thus EN 81-A3 compliant (TW63B, TW130, TW160)
Flexible erection thanks to horizontal or
vertical motor position (TW63B, TW130) W332C
Traction sheave on the right
VVVF motors, type B5, with exible clutch
Use of synthetic oil for long oil change intervals Wide range of traction sheave diameters, positioned on the left or right Low-wear traction sheave thanks to hardened traction sheave grooves Different designs on the machine base frame with and without diverter pulley for 2:1 or 1:1 rope suspensions Gear in accordance with ATEX Many options available: partial explosion protection / explosion protection versions, extended shaft, etc.
Gearless machines
The SC300 and SC400 synchronous gearless machines are the workhorses of the range and are suitable for deployment in freight elevators:
High efciency
Low noise Stable, compact monoblock housing Anti-friction bearings with life-time lubrication Ideally suited for power regeneration
Type-approved safety brake in ac-
cordance with EN 81-1 Section 9.10 and protective device against unintended movement of the elevator car in accordance
with EN 81-1: 1998+A3:2009
EN 81-A3 compliant Different designs on the machine base frame with and without diverter pulley for 2:1 rope suspension Optionally with counter-pulley suitable for double rope wrap
SC300 on base frame with counter-pulley for double rope wrap
Frequency inverters
MFC 20/21 and MFC 30/31 inverters The vector-controlled frequency inverters from LiftEquip are matched to the geared (asynchronous) and gearless (synchronous) machines.
MFC 30/31
www.liftequip.com
MFR (optional)
Inverter with brake activation, power lter and power choke With travel contactor (MFC 30/31) Brake resistor in a separate housing Motor parameters stored Rapid commissioning via Plug&Play Emergency power mode possible in the event of a power failure via UPS (uninterruptible power supply) Integrated speed monitoring for compliance with EN81-A3 (for MFC 30/31) in conjunction with suitable control system Parallel interface and DCP03
Inverters with power regeneration The MFC-R and MFR frequency inverters with power regeneration capability have the optimum technologies for an energy-efcient elevator. In addition to the attributes of MFC units:
Inverter with electronic brake activation,
power lter, power choke and electronic
travel contactors Integrated power regeneration, which means no brake resistor is required Possibility for activation of a standby and
sleep mode to improve energy efciency
Possibility for remote parameterisation via parallel interface, DCP03/04 and CANopen
201
LEA® Cargo
Main Components s t i K Doors from ThyssenKrupp
The S8A/K8A door series is characterised by very high robustness, durability and an extensive range of options. In a freight elevator we recommend: 2-panel, centre-opening sliding door (M2Z) 4-panel, centre-opening telescopic sliding door (M4TZ) Safe and robust mechanical construction with powerful door drive Long service life as a result of the exclusive deployment of proven and tested materials and components
The heavy industrial doors are specically
Robust sill substructure with solid stainless steel sills up to the encompassing, concealed sill guide designed for heavyduty loading and unloading High-quality door safety lock systems and short door reversal times to prevent collision with the freight and to protect the technology against damage Ensuring a rapid and long-lasting spare parts availability Elegant and convenient door, ideally suitable for use in prestigious surroundings, such as shopping centres
S8A M2Z landing door
Doors from Meiller
designed for heavy-duty use in industrial and commercial applications. In a freight elevator subject to heavy loads or with door widths > 2500 mm we recommend: 3-panel, side-opening telescopic sliding door (TTS/K 31) 4-panel, centre-opening telescopic sliding door (TTS/K 28) 6-panel, centre-opening telescopic sliding door (TTS/K 32)
Sturdy designs of door frame, track rails, track rollers and sill Sturdy, secure lower door panel guide,
innitely variable, where necessary can be exchanged without removing the door panels
TTS 32 landing door
Reference examples
202
Issue 09/2015
LEA® Cargo
Scope of Supply and Planning Information s t i K LEA ® Cargo scope of supply
Not included in the scope of supply are:
Machine Gear with motor or gearless machine, with brake, motor cable and rotary transducer with cable Traction sheave with rope guard cover Machine base frame with diverter or guide pulley (with 2:1 suspension) Insulated elements to prevent transmission of structure-borne noise (rubber blocks) Optionally with gear: emergency brake system (NBS)
Frequency inverter MFC 20 / 30 (for geared) or MFC 21 / 31 (for gearless), without power regeneration, with regeneration resistor Optionally MFC 21-R / MFR with power regeneration (for gearless only)
Rope system Steel ropes Rope anchor points with insulation for positioning in the machine room for 2:1 suspension Compensation chain from travel height > 33 m (depending on the design) Shaft equipment Sliding bracket with mounting parts Painting/priming Steel parts mainly with powder coating (similar to RAL 7005) or priming (RAL 7031 and/or RAL 7005), layer thickness approx. 60 µm; galvanised parts remain galvanised Landing and car doors Different door makes and door types for installation in the shaft or recess Different designs: colours in RAL or stainless steel Door drive with closing force limiter Different sill designs: steel or stainless steel Optionally concealed sill guide Light curtain
Counterweight Steel frame with sheet metal cladding Guide pulley for 2:1 suspension Weight inserts: steel and Gussolith in variable proportions
Progressive safety gear Safety gear for downward travel integrated in the sling and braking device for upward travel Optional: protection in upward travel by emergency brake system (geared) or monitored service brake in acc. with EN
Guide rails Steel rails (T-section) for car and counterweight with butt straps
ded by the installation rm and/or a control system supplier.
Elevator car Car with individual dimensions Car type P1000 or P4000 with car guard rail TCS series sling (depending on rated load) Guide pulleys for 2:1 suspension Optionally vibration isolation with steel springs or rubber elements Ventilation via door gap and vents in the door recess, ventilation via openings in the car ceiling
Guides on elevator car / counterweight Moving plastic sliding guides with lubricating units Optional pulley guides
Control system with control cabinet Operating and indicator elements External control panels Built-in control panel in the car Emergency call system Car distribution box Travelling cable Shaft selector Shaft wiring and lighting Inspection control, emergency stop switch Integration of the inverter Connection of the car lighting and the overload sensor Load measurement system (occupied, full load, overload) Electrical installations in the machine room All of the above components must be provi-
81-1, 9.10 (gearless) Overspeed governor For installation in the machine room, without test groove Governor rope 6.5 mm Tensioning device for shaft pit Buffer
Polyurethane buffer (v ≤ 1.0 m/s)
Installations with enhanced safet y classes LiftEquip offers a wide range of elevator and safety components of special designs for installations in IP54, partial explosion protection (Part-Ex) and explosion protection (Ex):
Geared and gearless machines with brake system Overspeed governor Door with door lock, door drive and light curtain Elevator car lighting
This gives you the opportunity also to design installations for use in the highly demanding cement, chemical and petrochemical industries.
with pit element for installation in the shaft pit
www.liftequip.com
203
LEA® Cargo
Range of Geared Machines s t i K
The following overviews of specimen congurations show the wide performance range of our machines with matching frequency inverters. From these tables you can choose the drive technology conguration that is perfectly suited to your requirements. Naturally we can on request implement an individual conguration with your specic installation data.
1:1
Geared machines (freight traction elevator with machine room above the shaft – 1:1 suspension) Travel height
25 m
Speed
0.63 m/s
0.8 m/s
1 m/s
1.2 m/s
1.6 m/s
2 m/s
Q = 1600 kg F = 1800 kg
TW130, 52:1, TS 540
TW130, 42:1, TS 540 10563 kJ/h, 15.2 kW
TW130, 35:1, TS 540
TW130, 35:1, TS 540 14244 kJ/h, 20.5 kW
26.8 A/39.2 A
31.3 A/46.1 A 1238 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
36.9 A/49.9 A
TW130, 45:2, TS 540 18007 kJ/h, 27.5 kW 45.8 A/68.2 A 1273 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW160, 45:2, TS 640 22441 kJ/h, 27.5 kW 57.3 A/81.8 A 1343 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1
TW1301), 45:2, TS 540 TW160, 51:2, TS 640 17041 kJ/h, 18.5 kW 20881 kJ/h, 26.8 kW 38.3 A/53.3 A 52.9 A/78.8 A 1218 rpm, (NBS) 955 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1 MFC 20-60 V1
*TW160, 45:2, TS 640 23805 kJ/h, 33.5 kW
1188 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW130, 35:1, TS 540 14086 kJ/h, 15.8 kW 35 A/50.7 A 1238 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW130, 35:1, TS 540 13544 kJ/h, 18.5 kW
TW160, 41:1, TS 640 16063 kJ/h, 20.1 kW
TW160, 51:2, TS 640 23266 kJ/h, 26.8 kW
30 A/39.7 A 990 rpm, (NBS)
39.1 A/57.6 A
936 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
MFC 20-32 V1
TW160, 35:1, TS 640 18412 kJ/h, 20.5 kW 44.7A/66.8 A 1253 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
W263C, 41:2, TS 640 31384 kJ/h, 36.2 kW 73.7 A/113.2 A 1224 rpm MFC 20-105 V1
TW160, 50:1, TS 640 12777 kJ/h, 18.5 kW
TW160, 50:1, TS 640 14737 kJ/h, 15.3 kW 36.4 A/51.1 A
TW160, 41:1, TS 640 17637 kJ/h, 20.1 kW
TW160, 35:1, TS 640
W263C, 41:2, TS 540 31658 kJ/h, 42.0 kW
42.9 A/62.4 A
1194 rpm, (NBS)
1224 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
46.7 A/70 A 1253 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
W263C, 41:2, TS 540 27506 kJ/h, 31.1 kW 70.3 A/107.1 A 1160 rpm MFC 20-105 V1
TW160, 35:1, TS 640 18262 kJ/h, 23.0 kW 50.5 A/71.2 A 1045 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1
W263C, 40:1, TS 640 22661 kJ/h, 27.5 kW 57.3 A/82 A 1432 rpm MFC 20-60 V1
W263C, 41:2, TS 540
W332C, 46:2, TS 700 36143 kJ/h, 45.4 kW
1160 rpm MFC 20-105 V1
1255 rpm MFC 20-105 V1
W263C, 40:1, TS 540 20833 kJ/h, 27.5 kW 52.6 A/75.4 A 1415 rpm MFC 20-60 V1
W332C, 47:1, TS 800 26872 kJ/h, 33.5 kW 65.1 A/121 A 1347 rpm MFC 20-105 V1
W332C, 59:2, TS 700 34660 kJ/h, 42 kW 82 A/166.7 A 1288 rpm MFC 20-105 V1
*W332C, 46:2, TS 640 36445 kJ/h, 45.4 kW
W332C, 47:1, TS 640 23550 kJ/h, 33.5 kW
W332C, 47:1, TS 800 28833 kJ/h, 33.5 kW
W332C, 46:2, TS 640
58.1 A/101.9 A
69.7 A/126.6 A
1403 rpm MFC 20-60 V1
1347 rpm MFC 20-105 V1
W332C, 59:2, TS 700 37186 kJ/h, 42 kW 87.8 A/175.8 A 1288 rpm MFC 20-105 V1
Q = 1800 kg F = 2000 kg
9737 kJ/h, 10.4 kW 23.9 A/34.2 A 1159 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
1188 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW130, 52:1, TS 540
TW130, 42:1, TS 540
10891 kJ/h, 10.4 kW
11791 kJ/h, 15.2 kW 29.9 A/43 A
26.6 A/37.4 A
1159 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
Q = 2000 kg F = 2200 kg
Q = 2200 kg F = 2400 kg
Q = 2400 kg F = 2600 kg
Q = 2600 kg F = 2800 kg
Q = 2800 kg F = 3000 kg
TW130, 42:1, TS 540 11336 kJ/h, 18.5 kW 24.3 A/33.6 A
26.9 A/36.6 A 940 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
MFC 20-48 V1
TW160, 50:1, TS 640 13885 kJ/h, 18.5 kW
TW160, 41:1, TS 640 16545 kJ/h, 18.5 kW
29.2 A/39.2 A 940 rpm, (NBS)
36.1 A/46.9 A 979 rpm, (NBS)
MFC 20-32 V1
MFC 20-48 V1
W332C, 63:1,TS 640 16046 kJ/h, 26.1 kW 38.3 A/87.4 A 1184 rpm MFC 20-60 V1
W263C, 40:1, TS 540
*W332C, 63:1,TS 640 16622 kJ/h, 26.1 kW
W332C, 63:1, TS 700
18431 kJ/h, 24.9 kW 46.5 A/70.5 A 1132 rpm MFC 20-48 V1
37.9 A/87.9 A
19808 kJ/h, 33.5 KW 47.9 A/101.2 A
1184 rpm MFC 20-60 V1
1375 rpm MFC 20-60 V1
Specimen congurations, changes possible
204
40 m
12597 kJ/h, 15.8 kW
1485 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
1225 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
* 50 % load capacity compensation Machine type, gear ratio, traction sheave l [mm] Heat to be dissip. [kJ/h], motor output [kW] at rpm Req. motor current [A] / req. starting current [A] Motor speed [rpm], (NBS possible) Inverter type.
18903 kJ/h, 27.5 kW
Q F TS NBS
= = = =
59 A/87 A 1217 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1
29694 kJ/h, 34.3 kW 71.3 A/107.9 A
59.8 A/87.9 A 1343 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1
80.6 A/130.9 A 1450 rpm MFC 20-105 V1
93.6 A/176.7 A
95.3 A/173.6 A 1373 rpm MFC 20-105 V1
38059 kJ/h, 45.4 kW 97.2 A/178.3 A 1373 rpm MFC 20-105 V1
Load capacity, Car weight max., Traction sheave diameter, Emergency brake system.
Stronger brake
1)
Issue 09/2015
LEA® Cargo
Range of Geared Machines s t i K Geared machines (freight traction elevator with machine room above the shaft – 2:1 suspension)
2:1
Travel height
25 m
Speed
0.63 m/s
0.8 m/s
1 m/s
1.2 m/s
1.6 m/s
Q = 1600 kg F = 1800 kg
TW63B, 33:1, TS 590 7744 kJ/h, 10 kW 23.7 A/31.8 A 1346 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW63B, 48:2, TS 590
TW63B, 43:3, TS 450 11577 kJ/h, 12.7 kW 31.1 A/45.1 A 1217 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW130, 43:3, TS 540 14134 kJ/h, 15.6 kW
TW130, 43:3, TS 4640
36.9 A/53.4 A
46.8 A/65.6 A
1217 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
1369 rpm, (NBS)
TW63B, 48:2, TS 450
TW130, 45:2, TS 540 11736 kJ/h, 16 kW
*TW130, 45:2, TS 640 13668 kJ/h, 16 kW 34 A/48.1 A 1343 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW130, 43:3, TS 540 17425 kJ/h, 20 kW
TW1301), 43:3, TS 640
43.9 A/65.2 A
56.8 A/77.8 A
1217 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
1369 rpm, (NBS)
TW130, 45:2, TS 640 17805 kJ/h, 20.5 kW 44.6 A/60.4 A 1343 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
*TW1301), 43:3, TS 540
TW1301), 43:3, TS 540 25128 kJ/h, 33.5 kW 67 A/80.3 A 1622 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-105 V1
TW1301), 43:3, TS 540 23444 kJ/h, 32.6 kW
Q = 2000 kg F = 2200 kg
Q = 2500 kg F = 2500 kg
Q = 3000 kg F = 2800 kg
Q = 3500 kg F = 3200 kg
Q = 4000 kg F = 3500 kg
9333 kJ/h, 10 kW
Q = 5000 kg F = 4500 kg
Q = 5500 kg F = 5000 kg
Q = 6000 kg F = 5500 kg
9716 kJ/h, 12.9 kW 25.6 A/37.4 A 1243 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
28 A/38.1 A 1283 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
29.3 A/42.1 A
TW130, 35:1, TS 640 12048 kJ/h, 16 kW 30.2 A/40.8 A 1316 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW130, 45:2, TS 540 14447 kJ/h, 16 kW
TW130, 35:1, TS 640 14468 kJ/h, 16 kW 36.2 A/47 A 1316 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW130, 45:2, TS 540 17357 kJ/h, 20.5 kW 42.8 A/58.5 A 1273 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW130, 45:2, TS 540
TW130, 45:2, TS 540
TW160, 57:2, TS 640
16973 kJ/h, 18.5 kW
19171 kJ/h, 27.5 kW
38.6 A/46.4 A 1003 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
1273 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
36 A/49.4 A 1273 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
47.2 A/71.3 A 1217 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
MFC 20-48 V1
21916 kJ/h, 27.5 kW MFC 20-60 V1
TW160, 41:3, TS 640
31911 kJ/h, 42 kW 79.4 A/129 A
MFC 20-60 V1
1217 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1
1305 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-105 V1
TW160, 45:2, TS 640 26088 kJ/h, 33.5 kW 68.6 A/81.8 A 1611 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-105 V1
*W332C, 57:3, TS 800 36107 kJ/h, 45.4 kW
48.2 A/63.6 A 1361 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW160, 45:2, TS 640 23354 kJ/h, 27.5 kW 58.8 A/77.4 A 1343 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1
TW160, 35:1, TS 640
TW160, 51:2, TS 640
TW160, 45:2, TS 640
18719 kJ/h, 20.5 kW 45.8 A/59.2 A
22169 kJ/h, 26.8 kW
25900 kJ/h, 33.5 kW
55.4 A/75 A 1218 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1
64.7 A/85.7 A 1343 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-105 V1
W263C, 41:2, TS 640 34038 kJ/h, 42 kW 86.6 A/131.6 A 1468 rpm MFC 20-105 V1
W263C, 50:2, TS 540 25747 kJ/h, 33.5 kW
TW160, 35:1, TS 640
19078 kJ/h, 27.5 kW 50.9 A/61.1 A 1592 rpm, (NBS)
18859 kJ/h, 26.8 kW
17993 kJ/h, 27.5 kW
59.5 A/86.1 A
1316 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1
Q = 4500 kg F = 4000 kg
40 m
1316 rpm, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
1415 rpm MFC 20-105 V1
W263C, 41:2, TS 540 31046 kJ/h, 42 kW 78 A/120 A 1450 rpm MFC 20-105 V1
W263C, 50:2, TS 540
W263C, 41:2, TS 540 30548 kJ/h, 34.3 kW
W332C, 46:2, TS 640 37725 kJ/h, 45.4 kW
63.4 A/88.6 A 1114 rpm MFC 20-105 V1
72.9 A/101.1 A
95.8 A/177.5 A
1160 rpm MFC 20-105 V1
1373 rpm MFC 20-105 V1
W332C, 47:1, TS 800 28731 kJ/h, 33.5 kW
W332C, 59:2, TS 640
*W332C, 46:2, TS 640
34694 kJ/h, 42 kW
70.8 A/123.9 A
85 A/163.1 A
37993 kJ/h, 45.4 kW 98.7 A/176.3 A
1414 rpm MFC 20-105 V1
1409 rpm
W332C, 47:1, TS 800
W332C, 59:2, TS 640 36111 kJ/h, 45.4 kW
19722 kJ/h, 27.5 kW 49.2 A/64.3 A
24781 kJ/h, 29.9 kW
31916 kJ/h, 37 kW 74.6 A/124.8 A 1414 rpm MFC 20-105 V1
64.8 A/87.9 A
MFC 20-105 V1
97 A/175.3 A 1409 rpm
97.9 A/179.1 A 1452 rpm MFC 20-105 V1
*W332C, 57:3, TS 640
36192 kJ/h, 42 kW 86.3 A/172.4 A 1361 rpm MFC 20-105 V1 * 50 % load capacity compensation Machine type, gear ratio, traction sheave l [mm] Heat to be dissip. [kJ/h], motor output [kW] at rpm Req. motor current [A] / req. starting current [A] Motor speed [rpm], (NBS possible) Inverter type.
1373 rpm MFC 20-105 V1 Q F TS NBS
= = = =
Load capacity, Car weight max., Traction sheave diameter, Emergency brake system.
MFC 20-105 V1 Stronger brake
1)
Specimen congurations, changes possible
www.liftequip.com
205
LEA® Cargo
Range of Gearless Machines s t i K Gearless machines (freight traction elevator with machine room above the shaft – 2:1 suspension)
2:1
Without power regeneration
2:1 suspension Travel height
80 m
110 m
Speed
1 m/s
1.6 m/s
1.75 m/s
2 m/s
Q = 1600 kg F = 2300 kg
SC 300 M 000 10.7 kW, 87 rpm TS 440, MFC 21-32 V1
SC 300 M 002 TS 440, MFC 21-48 V1
SC 300 M 002 16.3 kW, 152 rpm TS 440, MFC 21-48 V1
SC 300 M 005 18.2 kW, 174 rpm TS 440, MFC 21-48 V1
Q = 2000 kg F = 2500 kg
SC 400 S 001 11.2 kW, 68 rpm TS 560, MFC 21-48 V1
SC 400 S 001
SC 400 S 001
17.2 kW, 109 rpm
18.8 kW, 119 rpm
TS 560, MFC 21-60 V1
TS 560, MFC 21-60 V1
SC 400 S 007 21.6 kW, 136 rpm TS 560, MFC 21-105 V1
Q = 2500 kg F = 2800 kg
SC 400 M 008 13.3 kW, 68 rpm TS 560, MFC 21-60 V1
SC 400 M 008
SC 400 M 012
SC 400 M 009
21.3 kW, 109 rpm
23.3 kW, 119 rpm
TS 560, MFC 21-105 V1
TS 560, MFC 21-105 V1
26.8 kW, 136 rpm TS 560, MFC 21-105 V1
14.9 kW, 139 rpm
Q = Load capacity, F = Car weight max., TS = Traction sheave diameter. COMPACT gearless with 1:1 suspension on request.
With power regeneration
2:1 suspension Travel height
80 m
Speed
1.6 m/s
1.75 m/s
2 m/s
Q = 1600 kg F = 2300 kg
SC 300 M 001 TS 440, MFC 21-50R V3
SC 300 M 001 16.7 kW, 152 rpm TS 440, MFC 21-50R V3
SC 300 M 001 18.2 kW, 174 rpm TS 440, MFC 21-50R V3
Q = 2000 kg F = 2500 kg
SC 400 S 004
SC 400 S 004
17.9 kW, 109 rpm
18.5 kW, 119 rpm
TS 560, MFC 21-100R V3
TS 560, MFC 21-100R V3
SC 400 S 004 21.3 kW, 136 rpm TS 560, MFC 21-100R V3
Q = 2500 kg F = 2800 kg
SC 400 M 011
SC 400 M 011
SC 400 M 011
21.3 kW, 109 rpm
21.3 kW, 109 rpm
21.3 kW, 109 rpm
TS 560, MFC 21-100R V3
TS 560, MFC 21-100R V3
TS 560, MFC 21-100R V3
15.3 kW, 139 rpm
110 m
Q = Load capacity, F = Car weight max., TS = Traction sheave diameter. COMPACT gearless with 1:1 suspension on request.
206
Issue 09/2015
LEA® Cargo
Options s t i K LEA ® Cargo: car equipment LEA® Cargo
Car elements Car ceiling
•
Powder-coated in Mouse Grey RAL 7005
Powder-coated in Pure White RAL 9016 Stainless steel, grain 220 Stainless steel, Linen Emergency trap in the car ceiling Car lighting
•
Let-in uorescent tubes (type C4), let in ush in the main ceiling, degree of protection IP20 Let-in uorescent tubes (type C4), let in ush in the main ceiling, degree of protection IP54 Halogen spotlight ceiling (false ceiling, type CEI2), Pure White RAL 9016 (for Q < 3000 kg) Halogen spotlight ceiling (false ceiling, type CEI2), stainless steel grain 220 (for Q < 3000 kg) Indirect lighting (false ceiling, type CEI5), without screen, Pure White RAL 9016 (for Q < 3000 kg) Indirect lighting (false ceiling, type CEI5), without screen, stainless steel grain 220 (for Q < 3000 kg) Coffered ceiling (false ceiling, type CEI4), Pure White RAL 9016 (for Q < 3000 kg) Coffered ceiling (false ceiling, type CEI4), stainless steel grain 220 (for Q < 3000 kg) Panel light SlimLED PANEL, dimensions 300 x 300 x 16 mm, mounted on the main ceiling Panel light SlimLED PANEL, dimensions 620 x 620 x 16 mm, mounted on the main ceiling Wall design / car door portal
•
Powder-coated in Mouse Grey RAL 7005
Powder-coated in Aluminium White RAL 9006 Powder-coated in Pure White RAL 9016 Grain 220 stainless steel Stainless Steel, Linen Hand-rail and bumper rail
Hand-rail stainless steel grain 220, diameter 40 mm with straight closure
Bumper rail made of wood (beech), 200 x 19 mm, surrounding or with open through entrance on both side walls: 1-row / 2-row / 3-row
/
/
Bumper rail aluminium section clad with stainless steel grain 220, 100 x 10 mm, surrounding or with open through entrance on both side walls: 1-row / 2-row / 3-row
/
/
Flooring material
Bulb plate, primed, 6 mm
•
Bulb plate, aluminium Duett W2, 3 mm Bulb plate stainless steel, 4 mm Ice / rubber Dove Grey / vinyl Black Stone / rubber Kayar Grey / rubber Kayar Black / rubber
Without ooring material, lowered by 25 mm for customer-tted ooring material Skirting
Skirting 30 x 6 mm, aluminium Skirting 30 x 6 mm, aluminium, clad with stainless steel grain 220 Skirting 50 x 5 mm, aluminium, clad with stainless steel grain 220 Skirting 100 x 10 mm, aluminium, clad with stainless steel grain 220 Accessories
Ladder panel without door / with door
• standard,
/
optional, – not available. Please contact our sales consultants regarding the availability of options.
www.liftequip.com
207
LEA® Cargo
Reducing energy consumption The optimally balanced system components and optionally available LED lighting enable the LEA® Cargo elevator system to make a decisive contribution to reducing regular operating costs and CO2 emissions.
Power regeneration The deployment of the MFR frequency inverter with integrated power regeneration can
further enhance the overall efciency of the installation. Taking account of the usage cate gory in accordance with VDI 4707, a high energy efciency class can be achieved.
Technology with a secur e future
Quality Made in Germany – quality made by "LiftEquip": on a level with international standards and appreciated worldwide.
Low-noise ride quality The deployment of our high-quality and perfectly balanced components makes the LEA ® Cargo from LiftEquip a very quiet and therefore comfortable elevator system.
Environmentally friendly production Even during the production of our LEA ® Cargo we ensure that the environment is protected.
208
Issue 09/2015
LEA® Home
Gulliver/Orion s m e t s y S
Personally and individ ully Gulliver and Orion, accord. to 2006/42/EG
Up to 5 stops, 0,15 m/s, 15 m FH Over 70 platform variants and design options
www.liftequip.com
Your Benefts
210
Installation examples
211
Design Versions
212
Car Doors/Landing Doors
213
Equipment
214
Operating and comfort features - equipment
215
209
LEA® Home
Your Benefts s m e t s y S
Gulliver
Orion
Drive system
Hydraulics
Hydraulics
Rated speed v
0.15 m/s
0.15 m/s
Can be used in indoor areas
●
●
Can be used in outdoor areas
●
○
15 m
15 m
300 kg / 400 kg
300 kg / 400 kg
Operation via domestic power supply 230V/AC
●
●
Maximum number of landings
5
5
Different platform lengths/widths
●
●
hout the need for complex work. Whether
As an option with classic, 4-side closed car
○
○
indoors or outdoors – both models can be
Door arrangement of 3 sides possible
○
○
adapted to your personal living s ituation. Select the lift according to your individual requirements and wishes. The Gulliver provides you with a very special type of transport. It not only increases your quality of living, but also upgrades
Doors in different versions (shaft and car)
○
○
Ceiling lighting, two spots
●
●
The LiftEquip home lifts, manufactured according to Machinery Directive 2006/42/ CE and EN81-41 with a speed of 0.15 m/s, are available in different versions:
The Gulliver model, a stand-alone vertical installation with a shaft and a travel height of up to 15 metres, offers you high
exibility.
The Orion model can be built into an already existing shaft.
The Gulliver can also be retrotted wit-
your domestic environment. Customized furnishing options provide an ideal supplement to your very own spatial concept.
All models t perfectly into both private surroundings as well as a commercial environment. The property becomes more comfortable and the value increases. Our positive features:
Made-to-measure solutions Increased living comfort
Retrotting of platform lift also possible
Installation in indoor and outdoor areas Well thought-out design Impressive quality
Qualities
Maximum travel height Rated load
Standby function, autom. light shutdown
●
●
Installation
Retrot solution
●
●
Customer-provided shaft required
─
●
100 mm
100 mm
Technical expert report (TÜV-certied)
●
●
Automatic closing doors
○
○
Emergency operation
●
●
Signal in case of overload
●
●
Shaft cladding
●
─
Key operated switch
○
○
Emergency phone on operator panel
●
●
Control via operator panel
●
●
Radio remote control
○
○
○
○
Shaft cladding (safety glass, sheet metal, laminate)
○
─
Ceiling lighting, four spots
○
○
Folding seat
○
○
Mirrors
○
○
Shaft pit Safety
Operation
Further equipment features
Customized selection of an extremely wide variety of equipment congurations, materials and car colours
standard; ○ optional; ─ not possible
●
210
210
Issue 09/2015
LEA® Home
Installation Examples s m e t s y S
Steel shaft (Gulliver) Feature of the Gulliver system
Interior and exterior:
Material: powder coated, galvanized sheet metal, RAL 7001 A further 200 colours as per RAL can be selected Dimensions: Minimum width 730 mm Minimum depth 1150 mm
Various shaft sizes with over 70 standard
concepts Panels: High-quality galvanized sheet metal, dif
ferent versions of safety glass, laminate Doors: installed on shaft
Interior: Panels: additional MDF wood panels
Closed shaft (Orion)
Roof: at
Exterior: Material: as above, plus surface-treated for use in outdoor areas Joints sealed with silicone Roof: inclined, rainproof
Features of the Orion system
As Gulliver, but for installation in an existing shaft.
With telescopic door (left illustration) With hinged door (right illustration)
www.liftequip.com
211
LEA® Home
Design Versions s m e t s y S
Car Car with rear wall mirror; mirror also available only above the hand-rail.
Car with glass element made of transparent safety glass. Two ceiling spots, aluminium
Four ceiling spots, PVC oor,
oor, stainless steel panel and
stainless steel panel and colour-coated wall panels.
colour-coated wall panels.
Platform
Platform with hinged door opening on left
212
Platform with hinged door opening on right in masoned shaft.
Platform with ramp (if a shaft pit cannot be implemented on site). Made of stainless steel, chequer plate.
Issue 09/2015
LEA® Home
Car Doors/Landing Doors Car doors Manually operated folding doors for a closed solution with low space requirements. Folding doors at the access areas (max. 2) made of steel, coated in RAL colour or made of stainless steel.
s m e t s y S
Automatic telescopic door for a classic lift solution.
Telescopic door on the oor made of steel or stainless steel, including special versions for use outdoors. Here, access diagonally.
Landing doors
STEEL DOOR Doors (elevator type) made of sheet metal, undercoat in RAL 7001.
GLASS DOOR Doors (elevator type) made of safety glass with aluminium frame,
Made of galvanized steel
anodized natural. Coat-
and/or coating in RAL colour at an additional charge. With standard handle, buttons and closing spring.
ing in RAL colours at an additional charge. With standard handle, buttons and closing spring.
GLASS DOOR Doors (elevator type) with safety glass with stainless steel frame, manufactured from stainless or standard steel with stainless steel cladding. With standard handle, buttons and closing spring.
SOLID GLASS DOOR Fully transparent glass door with steel frame, hasps and handle made of stainless steel. Semi-automatic with arm integrated in frame, damping device integrated in cross brace.
FIRE RESISTANT DOOR Doors (elevator type) made of sheet metal, undercoat in RAL 7001.
Certied in acc. with EN 81-58. Fire resistant doors available upon request in compliance
AUTOMATIC TELESCOPIC DOOR Doors (elevator type), manufactured completely from stainless steel, or standard steel and stainless steel cladding.
with specic national standards (as special version). With handle and intercom unit for wall mounting, closing spring.
Door handles TECHNO Matching stainless steel handles and buttons (standard).
www.liftequip.com
CLASSIC Matching handles and buttons: Bright brass, shiny brass, chrome plated, bright chrome (optional).
MODERN Matching handles and buttons: satin-nished stainless steel, glossy stainless steel (optional).
213
LEA® Home
Equipment s m e t s y S
Central cover Made of stainless steel or coated in RAL colour in acc. with RAL colour table.
Side cover Made of stainless steel or coated in RAL colour in acc. with RAL colour table. Special paint upon request.
Flooring material Made of hard-wearing PVC as standard.
Further ooring materials made of solid stone, parquet or aluminium available at an additional charge.
Standard powder coating silver-grey RAL 7001. Further colour selections in acc. with RAL colour table (optional).
214
214
Issue 09/2015
LEA® Home
Operating and Comfort Features - Equipment
Control panel Including display, control buttons with braille lettering, integrated plastic handrail and telephone unit (instead of the telephone, an intercom system can be supplied on request).
s m e t s y S
Landing pushbutton Standard: manual travel, embossed lettering Optional: automatic travel
Remote control (optional) Allows users to control the lift and the automatic doors (optional).
Ceiling lights With two ceiling spots (standard) or four ceiling spots (optional).
Hand-rails (optional) Painted or stainless steel.
Folding seat (optional) For safe and comfortable travel (max. 120 kg).
Car with mirror (optional) One side wall with mirror element (full surface or only above the hand-rail).
www.liftequip.com
215
LEA® Home
s m e t s y S
Overview of advantages: • • • • • • • •
216
Retention of mobility and independence
Retrotting possible, simple and fast installation Increased living comfort Made-to-measure solutions Installation in indoor and outdoor areas
Optimum space utilization Reliable technology
Energy-efcient
Issue 09/2015
Technical Report
Technical Report Gulliver - The Home Lift TITELSTORY / TITLE STORY
Gulliver – Der Home Lift Gulliver – the home lift Vor dem Hintergrund des demographischen Wandels, den gesetzlichen Anforderungen an behindertengerechte Zugänglichkeit von Gebäuden im öffentlichen Bereich und dem Wunsch des Einzelnen nach mehr Komfort – auch im privaten Umfeld – werden vermehrt Systeme zur Personenbeförderung im privaten und öffentlichen Bereich nachgefragt. Hier kommen sowohl Aufzüge nach Aufzugsrichtlinie als auch nach Maschinenrichtlinie – sogenannte Home Lifts – zum Einsatz.
In diesem Anwendungsfall steht die Förderleistung nicht an erster Stelle, sondern die flexible Anpassung an die Kundenanforderungen und bestehende Umgebungsbedingungen sowie einfache Installation, Inbetriebnahme und Wartung, Bedienbarkeit und Sicherheit. Diesem Trend folgend waren auf der interlift 2013 unterschiedlichste Systeme bei diversen System- und Komponentenherstellern zu sehen. Aufgrund der n ormativen Einschrän kungen bei Home Lifts mit einer Betriebsgeschwindigkeiten von max. 0,15 m/s sind deren Einsatzbedingungen auch in Bezug auf Förderhöhe und Förderleistung begrenzt. Ein wesentlicher Vorteil dieser Fördersysteme ist dabei die Flexibilität, bezogen auf die Einbauabmessungen, sowie die niedrigen Schachtgruben und Schachköpfe, was im Bereich der Nachrüstung in bestehenden
Gebäuden oft eine wesentliche Rolle spielt. Die meisten Home Lifts werden komplett mit Schachtgerüst geliefert. Durch diese Komplettlieferung aus einer Hand reduzieren sich die Schnittstellen bei Planung und Konstruktion und damit auch der Aufwand für Einbau und Inbetriebnahme. In den meisten Fällen wird nur ein 230 V Anschlus s benötigt . Mit EG Baumust erprüfung und CE-Kennzeichen kann das System einfach in Verkehr gebracht werden. Bei der Systementscheidung, ob ein Home Lift nach Maschinenrichtlinie oder ein Aufzug nach Aufzugsrichtlinie zum Einsatz kommt, müssen die Nutzungsanforderungen an die Anlage betrachtet werden. Je nach Ausführung und Ausstattung kann damit ein Home Lift von der Kostensituation auch in den Bereich eines Aufzuges nach Aufzugsrichlinie kommen. Daher L i f t E q u i p ( 3 )
Home Lift, modernes Schachtgerüst mit Glaselementen und Drehtüren home lift, modern shaft frame with glass elements and hinged doors 6 LIFT journal 2/2014
www.liftequip.com
Factors like demographic change, the legal requirements for handicappedfriendly accessibility of buildings in the public sector and the desire of individuals for greater convenience – including in their private surroundings – have led to an increased demand for personal conveyance systems in the private and public spheres. Here both lifts according to the Lifts Directive as well as according to the Machinery Directive – so-called home lifts – are in use.
t f i L e m o H e h T r e v i l l u G t r o p e R l a c i n h c e T
The pri mar y fact or here is not conv eyan ce performance, but rather flexible adjustment to customer requirements and existing environmental conditions, plus simple installation, start-up, maintenance, operability and safety. In line with this trend, all kinds of systems from various system and component manufacturers could be seen at the interlift 2013. Due to normative restrictions in home lifts with operating speeds of a maximum of 0.15 m/s, their operating conditions are also restricted with regard to conveyance height and conveyance performance. A significant advantage of these conveyance systems is their flexibility in terms of installation dimensions as well as the low shaft pits and shaft heads. The latter often play a major role in the field of retrofitting in existing buildings. Most home lifts are supplied complete with shaft frame. Thanks to this complete delivery from one source, interfaces in planning and design are reduced and as a result likewise the expense for installation and start-up. In most cases all that is needed is a 230 V connection. Such systems are easy to distribute thanks to the EC type examination and CE mark. When a system decision has to be made as to whether to use a home lift according to the Machinery Directive or a lift according to the Lifts Directive, one has to consider the usage requirements on the system. Hence, depending on the model and equipment, a home lift can also fall within the scope of a lift according to the Lifts Directive. Consequently, it is important for a component or system supplier to provide the customer / operator or installation company with expert advice to ensure that the best solution for the case in hand is found. LiftEquip provides tailor-made solutions for a high degree of residential convenience in the home lift product segment in the form of the Gulliver / Orion system from ThyssenKrupp. These systems are especially quiet and very energyefficient. They are optionally available complete with shaft frame for indoors and outdoors or for installation in an existing shaft. The illustrations
Verlagssonderveröffentlichung
217
Technical Report
Technical Report Gulliver - The Home Lift t f i L e m o H e h T r e v i l l u G t r o p e R l a c i n h c e T
TITELSTORY / TITLE STORY
Home Lift, integriert im gemauerten Schacht mit automatischen Schiebetüren home lift, integrated in masonry shaft with automatic sliding doors
Je nac h Kundenw uns ch und Anwendungsfall kann zwischen vielen Optionen gewählt werden, wie: • Individuelle Ausstattungsmöglichkeiten und Farbgestaltungen • Drehtüren wahlweise mit automatischem Türöffner • Lichtgitter oder Fahrkorbabschlusstüren • Automatische Fahrkorb- und Schachtabschlusstüren • Unterschiedliche Plattformabmessungen (Fahrkorb) und Tragfähigkeiten • Fernbedienung oder Kommandotaster sowie Ruftaster in der Haltstelle und Schüsselschalter • Notruftelefon • Schachtgerüst mit Stahlblechverkleidung oder mit Glaselementen • Unterschiedliche Beleuchtungsvarianten Im Bereich der Normung werden diese Home Lifts zukünftig in einer eigenen Norm EN 81-42 betrachtet. Die Systeme werden dort als LSPE – Low Speed Passenger Elevator – benannt. Ziel dieser Norm ist es, die Sicherheit für den Benutzer auf ein vergleichbares Niveau eines Aufzuges nach Aufzugsrichtlinie zu bringen. Das System Gulliver / Orion von LiftEquip erfüllt mit den Optionen wie Schachtabschlusstüren, Lichtgittern und Kommandotastern im Fahrkorb und anderen Ausstattungsvarianten bereits heute wesentliche Anforderungen aus der geplanten EN 81-42.
show examples for both situations with shaft frame and in the masonry shaft. Depending on the installation situation, various shaft designs are available – sketch with hinged doors - or with mechanically operated doors, shaft and lift car dimensions available. Since these systems are configured process-optimised, the complete system can be delivered at short notice. In the course of making an offer the installation situation can be checked with existing shaft sketches. A system drawing is provided with the order confirmation. Depending on the customers’ preferences, one can choose between many options, such as: • individual equipment options and colour schemes • hinged doors with automatic door opener • light grid or lift car doors • automatic lift car- and landing doors • dierent platform dimensions (lift car) and load-bearing capacities • remote control or command switch and call button at the stop and key switch • emergency call telephone • shaft frame with steel plate cladding or glass elements • dierent lighting versions In the field of standards these home lifts will in future be considered in their own standard EN81-42. The systems will be referred to there as LSPE – low speed passenger elevator. The goal of this standard is to put safety for the user on a level comparable to lifts according to the Lifts Directive. The Gulliver / Orion system from LiftEquip already meets major requirements from the planned EN 81-42 with options like lift car doors, light grids and command switches in the lift car and other equipment versions.
ist es wichtig, dass ein Komponenten- oder Systemlieferant den Kunden / Betreiber bzw. die Montagefirma kompetent berät, damit die beste Lösung für seinen Anwendungsfall gefunden wird. Volker Lenzner LiftEquip bietet im Produktbereich der Volker Lenzner Technische Leitung Home Lifts mit dem System Gulliver / Technical Director LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components Orion aus dem Hause ThyssenKrupp LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components maßgeschneiderte Lösungen für einen www.liftequip.de hohen Wohnkomfort an. Die Systeme www.liftequip.de sind besonders leise und haben eine hohe Energieeffizienz. Wahlweise lieferbar komplett mit Schachtgerüst für den Innen- und Aussenbereich oder zum Einbau in einem bestehenden Schacht. Die Bilder zeigen Beispiele für beide Situationen mit Schachtgerüst und im gemauerten Schacht. Je nach Einb ausi tuat ion steh en unte rschiedliche Schachtausführungen – Skizze mit Drehtüren – oder mit mechanisch betätigten Türen, Schacht- und Fahrkorbabmessungen zur Verfügung. Da diese Systeme prozessoptimiert konfiguriert werden, ist eine kurze Lieferzeit des kompletten Systems möglich. Im Rahmen der Angebotserstellung kann mit vorhandenen Schachtskizzen die Einbausituation überprüft werden. Bereits mit der Auftragsbestätigung wird eine Anlagenzeichung Schachtgrundrisse mit unterschiedlichen Zugangssituationen (Schacht oder Schachtgerüst) geliefert. Shaft floor plan with differing access situations (shaft or shaft frame) Verlagssonderveröffentlichung
218
LIFT journal 2/2014
7
Issue 09/2015
LEMoS
®
LEMoS
®
The Modular Modernisation Solution n o i t a s i n r e d o M
• Variable modernisation cabin • 320 - 1050 kg • Congurable in millimeter increments • Flexible adaptation of various door
manufacturers
www.liftequip.com
System advantages
220
System advantages / Elevator car P450SV/ P1000SV
221
Modernisation
222
Project planning and performance data
226
Project planning data (without dual entrance)
233
Project planning data (with dual entrance)
234
Project planning data (door mountings)
235
Technical Data
237
Elevator Car Design
238
Car Design Options
240
Lighting system
241
219
LEMoS
®
System Advantages n o i t a s i n r e d o M
Flexible degree of modernisation With LEMoS, you can individually modernise by using single components in your elevator installation or perform a complete
Optimisation possibilities The LEMoS elevator system is specially tailored to the high, individual requirements in modernisation.
modernisation. The limits are uid. What is special about this system is that you can also leave parts in your installation for which replacement would not be technically necessary or make economic sense.
Regardless of which aspects are important to you during modernisation, with LEMoS you can optimise and combine them with one another unlike with any other system.
This exibility is unique and carves out a
We will work together with you to nd the
distinct place for LEMoS! LEMoS opens the possibility of a dust-free conversion process and shortening of the conversion time. LEMoS can provide all the mechanical components that can be combined with any control systems available on the market.
optimal solution for your elevator installation, individually tailored to your requirements and wishes.
Flexibility in the drive solution At LEMoS we use cutting-edge drive solutions which are matched to the particular requirements in modernisation. The optimum solution for your installation is chosen from a wide range of gearless and geared drives to suit the application.
LEMoS with gearless drive
LEMoS with geared drive
With the exible LEMoS system, you can –
All components used by LEMoS are designed so that your modernised installation
depending on the scope of the modernised
achieves high levels of energy efciency in
components – considerably improve energy efciency compared to your existing instal-
accordance with VDI 4707.
lation.
You can thereby make a considerable contribution to the reduction of ongoing operating and energy costs and the lowering of CO2 emissions.
Energy efciency
y S c o n M e E i c L h f t e i y w g n r o e i n t a e l l e a t h t s i e n s r a u e r o c y f n I o
220
You can make signicant savings for exam ple with the use of standby operation mode or by using frequency inverters with energy recovery capability. Modern LED lighting also increases your energy savings.
Issue 09/2015
LEMoS
®
System Advantages / Elevator Car P450SV/P1000SV
System perspective The existing installation is adapted using state of the art technology to provide the very best technical solution within the framework of a modernisation.
The customers requirements with regard to his installation and compliance with all current regulations are also considered during planning, project implementation. For a comprehensive modernisation the elevator car component is of central importance. Important aspects here are:
Safety requirements in acc. with EN81-1 Requirements from the German regulation for operational safety of machinery Requirements in acc. with EN 81-70 regarding access for persons with disabilities
Energy efciency in acc. with VDI 4707
Sound insulation requirements
n o i t a s i n r e d o M
Improved comfort and design with of space utilisation Reusing as many non-value existing components as possible, such as rails, counterweight and possibly door frame, i. e. dust-free conversion and a reduction of costs to the customer. Rapid conversion and short down times
Scope of supply and performance Project planning base on the existing shaft dimensions provide the best shaft utilisation thanks to variable elevator car dimensions Modular modernisation in various stages as an option Drive technology, safety components, elevator car, doors as per customer requirements, shaft equipment (rails, bracket, counterweight)
Combination with any control systems and operating and elements available on the market
The elevator car, exible for modernisation In modernisation there are many constraints that must be taken into consideration in the complex planning of a lift modernisation. From
the customer perspective the elevator car is one of the main visible components that must satisfy the requirements with regard to size – disability friendly requirements and design.
With the P450SV and P1000SV elevator car series we offer an elevator car that is exible and adaptable to modernisation needs. The elevator car is a self-supporting construction with integrated car sling for 1:1 suspension. The shaft width and depth dimensions can be adapted in millimetre increments to the existing site conditions ensuring all available area is used. Different elevator car heights are available, together with doors of different manufacturers. As a result of planning the shaf t cross-section we can prepared the offer precisely meeting the customers needs.
Innovation Specially developed for modernisation Enlarged elevator car thanks to optimum shaft utilisation
Efciency Self-supporting elevator car without car sling with 1:1 suspension Compact and variable elevator car
Variable concept with exible width,
depth and height dimensions Integrated ventilation slots in the car front wall Flexible door mountings Fast and simple assembly (thanks to integrated positioning aids) Adaptable off-centre suspension during assembly (for subsequent alignment of the installed elevator car in the shaft)
www.liftequip.com
Largest possible available car oor area Elevator car congurable in millimetre
increments Reliability Strict quality inspection ensures high quality of all installed components Guarantee of the long term supply of spare parts Reduced down times and faults
Variability From the basic model (galvanised elevator car) to individual full equipment
specication – everything is possible Large number of interfaces (e.g. doors of different manufacturers) Different materials possible Environment
Energy-efcient production with cuttingedge manufacturing technologies Use of recyclable materials Optimised use of materials Energy-saving LED lighting
221
LEMoS
®
Modernisation – Optimised to your Requirements n o i t a s i n r Space optimisation e d o M Older elevator installations frequently have smaller car dimensions which fail to meet today's demands for comfort and legal requirements. In existing buildings you cannot however, change the shaft dimensions. With the LEMoS system, we offer you the unique possibility to make better use of the existing shaft and use the largest possible elevator car. The new, self-supporting elevator car has a compact, load-bearing structure and
can be adjusted to t the existing shaft in millimetre increments. In addition, spaceoptimised shaft equipment and doors with reduced depth can be used.
All measures serve to offer the passengers a more spacious elevator car and to improve the handling capacity of the installation. Older people and people with disabilities will, in particular, be very much appreciate the additional freedom of movement.
With the exible LEMoS system you can if you wish naturally use your existing elevator car or retain the car dimensions.
Cost optimisation Investment costs
In the development of the LEMoS system, we have placed special emphasis on the aspect of economic efciency in modernisation. This applies both to the investment for the modernisation itself as well as to the ongoing running costs.
a "less exible" new installation
Reduction in investment costs
Modernisation as complete replacement of the entire installation
The LEMoS components have such exible interfaces that all parts which are exposed to little wear and do not need to be replaced, such are for example guide rails and counterweights. This reduces the modernisation costs as well as the installation time. Parts of the shaft equipment, landing doors or door frames can frequently be re used. The LEMoS components represent the latest state of the art equipment and manufacturing techniques. They are optimised for long service life and low power consumption.
222
Services provided by the customer for adapting to t he requirements of
Demand-based component modernisation with LEMoS
The ongoing operating expenses are signi cantly reduced.
Issue 09/2015
LEMoS
®
Modernisation – Optimised to your Requirements
Budget optimisation 'Step by Step' modernisation
Scope of modernisation (degree of modernisation)
Modernisation of all required components in one step
Depending on scope, the modernisation of your elevator installation may represent a larger investment. If you prefer to spread these costs over several budget periods or years, we can prepare a modernisation plan work within your budget. This takes into account both the technical necessities as well as your budget. The modernisation of individual components then takes place over a longer period of time, spread over several stages. The down time is, of course, kept to a minimum during the work. Between the individual stages of the modernisation, you will always have available a safe and fully functional elevator installation.
n o i t a s i n r e d o M
Modular modernisation of individual components spread over a longer period of time
Period of time 1 (e.g. 1st year)
Period of time 2 Period of time 3 (e.g. 2nd year) (e.g. 3rd year)
The scope and features of the individual modernisation packets can be freely selected and can be adapted to the available budget. The matched LEMoS system
Time / budget periods
ensures that all components go together perfectly. When all measures have been completed, you get a modernised elevator that represents the latest state of the art equipment.
Optimisation of the conversion time
During extensive modernisation, down times of your elevator installation cannot be completely avoided. With the LEMoS system, we can, however, keep this to a minimum with concern for the passengers. Parts of the system which are exposed to minimal wear or which would require considerable time to replace, such as the shaft equipment (rails, bracket, counterweight), can be integrated in your modernised elevator and continue to be used due to the
Demand-based, modular modernisation with LEMoS
Conversion time = down time
Conversion time = down time
Time
high exibility of the components. Compared to a complete replacement, this eliminates time-intensive and costly measures. In addition, with the modular LEMoS system, we can prepare a phased modernisation schedule for you in which the modernisation measures are performed during times of low use.
www.liftequip.com
Modernisation as complete replacement of the entire installation
A shortened conversion time and fewer measures performed by the customer also reduce stress for the building tenants caused by noise and dirt. Less additional work is necessary for adapting the doors on the landing.
223
LEMoS
®
Modernisation according to Individual Requirements n o i t a s i n r e d o M
Control system -
Our components are tested with all the control systems available on the market
-
Energy efciency options such as standby and sleep mode can be activated in our components
Drive and control -
Very smooth running Reduction of operating costs through energy savings Increase in safety level
-
Maximum efciency
-
Energy recovery optional
Safety technology -
Increase in the safety level to the current state of the art
Fullment of the obligations of the installation operator Reliable increase in the availability of the installation
Shaft equipment -
Optimal utilisation of space in the shaft Larger dimensions of the elevator car possible Flexible components, such as counterweight, rail bracket ... Reduction of running noise Pictured: - with gearless drive in the machine room
224
Issue 09/2015
LEMoS
®
Modernisation according to Individual Requirements
Landing and car door -
-
n o i t a s i n r e d o M
Reduction of door operating times Increase in safety level Designed to accommodate disabled passengers by means of light grid Increase in installation availability Modern, attractive appearance Doors with different door mounting dimensions
Elevator car -
Maximization of car dimensions
-
possible Increase in the rated load possible Modern, attractive design Positive effect on image & increase in building value
Lighting -
-
Design possibilities through light for a relaxing atmosphere Energy- and cost-saving LED lighting Integrable emergency light function Long working life, considerably reduced maintenance expenses
Operating and indicator elements -
-
The choice can be made with all the elements combinable for the selected control system Elderly- and disabled-friendly design in acc. with EN 81-70
Pictured: - with geared drive in the machine room
www.liftequip.com
225
LEMoS
®
Project Planning and Performance Data (side counterweight) Rated load 320 kg ≤ Q ≤ 550 kg n o i t a s i n r Shaft layout with side-opening door e d o EC STM M CWD
01
3 C W
M T S W C
1
Gearless / Geared
m m 0 0 0 2 = H R M . n i M
D C D S
D D
R1 WC1 1)
DW
R2 WC2 1)
CW SW
FFL ORF
m m 0 2 3 1 + m m H m m C 0 0 = 0 5 R 1 2 2 2 H . – – n i 0 0 M 0 0 0 0 2 2 = = H H T C
Shaft layout with centre- opening door EC STM CWD 3 C W
M T S W C
H T
D C D S
FFL ORF m m 0 5 1 1 = P S . n i M
D D
R1 WC1 1)
DW
R2
CW
WC2 1)
SW
Machine room CW/2+CWD/2+85 mm
Shaft pit
m m 5 4 1 + 2 / M T S W C
P9
P7
P7
P8
SW
226
226
D S
R1 - door recess, left R2 - door recess, right 1) The larger value is valid. For the values C1 and C2 see table on Pages 17/18. Pictured load points in the machine room for gearless drive.
dia. 200R C D
Middle elevator car
CW/2+60mm 0 0 2 0 0 2 0 6 G e 1 a
PGG dia. 200
dia. 80 dia. 80
r l e s s / G e a r e d
m m D 0 S 0 6 + D S = D R M
PEC
SW
MRW = SW+800 mm
Issue 09/2015
LEMoS
®
Project Planning and Performance Data(side counterweight) Rated load 320 kg ≤ Q ≤ 550 kg
Performance data and principal dimensions with side counterweight without dual entrance (rope suspension 1:1) Rated load 1
Q
[kg]
Speed
v
[m/s]
Max. travel height
TH
[m]
320
350
375
400
425
450
500
550
1.0 40
25
Dual entrance
n o i t a s i n r e d o M
No
Number of passengers
4
(in 1 mm
Min. CW
[mm]
steps)
Max. CW
[mm]
(in 1 mm
Min. CD
[mm]
steps)
Max. CD
[mm]
Car height
CH
[mm]
Side wall clearance, side GG
WC1
[mm]
WC2
[mm]
Min. SW 2
[mm]
Car width Car depth
Shaft width
Max. SW Rear wall clearance
6
850
900
950
1000
1100
1200
1300
1350
1100
1150
1250
1350
1450
1500
1550
1650
2000 – 2250 (min. CH = DH; max. CH = DH + 150 mm) 225 (for counterweight depth 100 mm)
140 – 300 1165 1375
1425
1475
1215 1525
1625
1675
1775
[mm]
70
[mm]
155 – 295 (depending on door model and door type, see Pages 17/18)
Door packet thickness
Min. WC3 DD
Shaft depth
Min. SD
[mm]
Max. SD
[mm]
Headroom height
Min. HR
[mm]
1740 1840 1690 1890 3320 – 3570 (Min. HR = CH + 1320 mm)
Pit depth
Min. SP
[mm]
1150 / 1550 4
Clearance - rail bracket
Max. l
[mm]
3
7 850
1050
[mm]
2
5 800
1875
1300
1490
1590
2500
2450
2400
2200
1940
2040
2150
2100
2000
2000
Distance between elevator car guide rails EC STM
[mm]
CW + 40
Rope clearance dimension
RCD
[mm]
variable
Load point in machine room
PGG
[kN]
35.7
36.8
37.5
38.5
39.9
40.9
43.0
48.4
Load point in machine room
PEC
[kN]
19.2
19.9
20.3
20.8
21.5
22.1
23.2
26.1
Installation eye in machine room
E1
[kN]
Load point in the shaft pit
P7
[kN]
13.1
13.6
13.9
14.3
13.7
14.1
16.0
17.4
Load point in the shaft pit
P8
[kN]
40.5
42.2
43.8
45.3
43.1
44.8
52.3
58.7
Load point in the shaft pit
P9
[kN]
32.3
33.4
34.1
34.9
36.4
36.9
39.4
44.1
5.0
The rated load depends on the car dimensions and on the installed car door. To determine the actual rated load, see table "Rated load depending on car width and car depth" on Page 15. 2) The values for the lateral wall clearances WC1/WC2 and the resulting shaft widths have unrestricted validity only if the existing doors are retained. As soon as new doors are installed, the permissible values for the shaft width must be determined depending on the door model, the door type and the door width. See table "Dimensions of the landing doors for project planning" on Pages 17/18. 3) The horizontal, free clearance between outer edge of the elevator car and shaft rear wall must be at least 50 mm (including installation tolerances). The specied dimension also contains the installation depth of the wall panels of 20 mm, because it is referred to the car inner side. 4) The minimum pit depth is 1550 mm for CW x CD = 800 x 1100 - 1200 mm and for CW x CD = 850 x 1150 - 1200 mm. 1)
Determination of the maximum possible car dimensions with side counterweight (rope suspension 1:1) Car width
=
Shaft width
–
Wall clearance, left
–
Wall clearance, right
CW
=
SW
–
WC1
–
WC2
CW
=
SW
–
CW
=
SW
–
(C1 - R1 + IT + "air") (C1 - R1 + 25 mm + 10 mm)
Max. CW
=
SW
–
225 mm
– –
(C2 - R2 + IT + "air") (C2 - R2 + 25 mm + 10 mm) 140 mm
–
Car width
=
Car gauge between rails
–
2 x distance from elevator car to rail
CW
=
CGBR
–
2 x 20 mm
Without dual entrance Car depth
=
CD
=
CD Max. CD
Shaft depth – Door packet thickness – SD
–
DD
–
=
SD
–
(155 to 295 mm)
=
SD
–
155 mm
Rear wall clearance
– Installation tolerance, door side
WC3
–
IT
–
70 mm
–
25 mm
–
70 mm
–
25 mm
IT – installation tolerance (± 25 mm); C1 / C2 – door dimensions, space requirements of the door panels in shaft width; R1 – door recess, left; R2 – door recess, right; installation tolerances of ± 25 mm each are included in wall clearance dimensions WC1, WC2 and WC3.
www.liftequip.com
227
LEMoS
®
Project Planning and Performance Data (side counterweight) Rated load 630 kg ≤ Q ≤ 1050 kg n o i t a s i n r Shaft layout with side-opening door e d o M
R3
DW2
R4
1)
1)
(WC1)
(WC2)
01
EC STM CWD
GGT
t r o p p u s t e k c a r B
3 C W
M T S W C
2 D D
CWD Gearless / Geared
EC STM D C D S
m m 0 0 0 2 = H R M . n i M
D D C S
M T S
W C
1 D D
D D
DW
R1 WC11)
R2
R1
WC2 1)
CW
WC11)
SW
DW1
R2 WC2
CW
1)
SW FFL ORF
m m 0 2 3 1 + m m H m m C = 0 0 0 5 R 1 2 2 2 H – . – n i 0 0 M 0 0 0 0 2 2 = = H H D C
Shaft layout with centre- opening door R3
DW2
(WC1)1)
EC STM
R4 (WC2) 1)
CWD 3 C W
2 D D
EC STM M T S W C
M T S W C
D D C S
D C D S
m m 0 0 1 2 – 0 0 0 2 = H D
ORF FFL
FFL ORF
R1
DW
R2
WC11)
CW
WC2 1)
1 D D
R1 WC1 1)
DW1
R2
CW
WC2 1)
Machine room
SW
SW
Shaft pit
) t r o p m p m u s 5 t 4 e k 1 c + a r 2 b / h M t i T w S ( m W C m
P9
CW/2 + CWD/2 + 160 mm (with bracket support) CW/2 + CWD/2 + 85 mm Middle elevator car
R
dia. 200 C D
PGG
0
P7
P7
P8
SW
D S
Prerequisites for version with dual entrance:
dia. 200
Door recess dimension R1 or R2 >= 90 mm on main entrance side and R3 or R4 >= 90 mm on rear side; dual entrance is not otherwise possible. R1 - door recess, left R2 - door recess, right 1) The larger value is valid. For the values C1 and C2 see table on Pages 17/18. Pictured load points in the machine room for gearless drive.
H T
m m 0 5 1 1 = P S . n i M
CWD
D D
m m 0 0 1 2 – 0 0 0 2 = H D
CW/2+60mm 0 0 2 0 0 2 0 6 G e a 1
dia. 80 dia. 80
r l e s s / G e a r e d
m m D 0 S 0 6 + D S = D R M
PEC
SW
MRW = SW+800 mm
228
228
Issue 09/2015
LEMoS
®
Project Planning and Performance Data (side counterweight) Rated load 630 kg ≤ Q ≤ 1050 kg n o i t a s i n r e d o M
Perfo rmance data and principal dimensio ns with si de counterw eight with out / with du al entrance (rope suspensio n 1:1) Rated load 1
Q v TH
Speed Max. travel height Dual entrance Number of passengers (in 1 mm Car width
630
[kg] [m/s] [m]
750
8
Min. CW Max. CW steps) (in 1 mm Car depth Min. CD Max. CD steps) Car height CH Side wall clearance, side GG WC1 WC2 Shaft width Min. SW 3 Max. SW 3 Rear wall clearance Min. WC3 4 Door packet thickness DD Shaft depth (without dual entrance) Min. SD (without dual entrance) Max. SD Max. SD (with dual entrance) Headroom height Min. HR Min. SP Pit depth Clearance - rail bracket Max. l Distance between elevator car guide rails EC STM Rope clearance dimension RCD PGG Load point in machine room Load point in machine room PEC Installation eye in machine room E1 Load point in the shaft pit P7 Load point in the shaft pit P8 Load point in the shaft pit P9
825
1.0 40 possible Yes/No 11
10
900
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
1500 1050 1750
1150 2000
1200
900
1000
1050
12 1000 1600 1300
13
Yes 14 1100 1450
2100
2000 – 2250 (min. CH = DH; max. CH = DH + 150 mm) 255 (without bracket support); 330 (with bracket support) 2
140 – 300 1295
1395
2130
1495
2230 70 (without dual entrance)
155 – 295 (depending on door model and door type, see Pages 17/18)
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [kN] [kN] [kN] [kN] [kN] [kN]
1300 2140
1400
2390
1450
1550
2490
1700
2390
2640
2740
3320 – 3570 (min. HR = CH + 1320 mm) 1150 2750
2500
2200
CW + 40 variable
63.9 34.4
68.2 36.7
70.9
73.6
38.2
39.7
25.5 81.5 62.5
26.5 86.0 65.5
77.4 41.7
on request on request
29.0 97.0 69.0
30.5 101.5 72.5
10.0 24.0 75.0
59.0
27.5
90.5 68.0
The rated load depends on the car dimensions and on the installed car door. To determine the actual rated load, see table "Rated load depending on car width and car depth" on Pages 15/16. 2) Without dual entrance: WC1 = 255 mm (without bracket support) with min. CD >= 1520 mm, otherwise WC1 = 330 mm (with bracket support). With dual entrance: WC1 = 255 mm (without bracket support) with min. CD >= 1680 mm, otherwise WC1 = 330 mm (with bracket support). 3) The values for the lateral wall clearances WC1/WC2 and the resulting shaft widths have unrestricted validity only if the existing doors are retained. As soon as new doors are installed, the permissible values for the shaf t width must b e determined depending on the door model, the door type and the door width. See table "Dimensions of the landing doors for project planning" on Pages 17/18. 4) The horizontal, free clearance between outer 1)
edge of the elevator car and shaft rear wall must be at least 50 mm (including installation tolerances). The specied dimension also contains the installation depth of the wall panels of 20 mm, because it is referred to the car inner side.
Determination of the maximum possible car dimensions with side counterweight (rope suspension 1:1) Car width
CW CW CW Max. CW Car width CW
= = = = =
Shaft width SW SW SW SW
=
Wall clearance, left WC1
– –
– –
–
(C1 - R1 + IT + "air") (C1 - R1 + 25 mm + 10 mm)
–
255 mm
–
–
Car gauge between rails CGBR
=
–
– –
–
Wall clearance, right WC2
(C2 - R2 + IT + "Luft") (C2 - R2 + 25 mm + 10 mm) 140 mm
2 x distance from elevator car to rail 2 x 20 mm
Without dual entrance Car depth
=
CD CD Max. CD
= = =
Shaft depth SD SD SD
–
Door packet thickness
–
–
DD
–
–
(155 to 295 mm)
–
–
155 mm
–
Rear wall clearance WC3 70 mm 70 mm
– Installation tolerance, door side – – –
IT 25 mm 25 mm
With dual entrance Car depth
=
CD CD Max. CD
= = =
Shaft depth SD SD SD
IT – installation tolerance (± 25 mm); C1 / C2 – door dimensions, space requirements of the door panels in
shaft width; R1 – door recess, left; R2 – door recess, right; installation tolerances of ± 25 mm each are included in wall clearance dimensions WC1, WC2 and WC3.
– Thickness of door packet (2nd entrance)
–
Thickness of door packet (1st entrance)
–
DD (1st entrance)
–
DD (2nd entrance)
–
–
(155 to 295 mm)
–
(155 to 295 mm)
–
–
155 mm
–
155 mm
–
–
2 x installation t olerance, door sides 2 x IT 2 x 25 mm 50 mm
229
www.liftequip.com
229
LEMoS
®
Project Planning and Performance Data (rear counterweight) Rated load 320 kg ≤ Q ≤ 550 kg n o i t a s Shaft layout with side-opening doo r i n r e EC STM d o CW STM M D W C
01 m m 0 0 0 2 = H R M . n i M
3 C W
Gearless / Geared
D D C S m m 0 2 3 1 + m m H m m C 0 0 = . 0 5 R 1 2 H 2 2 . – – N I 0 0 M 0 0 0 0 2 2 = = H H D C
D D
R1
DW
WC11)
CW
R2 WC2 1) FFL ORF
SW
Shaft layout with centre- opening door EC STM CW STM
D W C
H T
3 C W
OFF ORF
D D C S
m m 0 5 1 1 = P S . n i M
D D
R1 WC11)
DW CW SW
R2 WC21)
Machine room dia. 200
Shaft pit PGG dia. 80 CW/2+60 mm
dia. 80 dia. 200
P9
PEC
P7
P7
P8
SW
230
D S
0 0 2 0 0 2 0 6 1
D C R m m D 0 S 0 5 + D S = D R M
Gearless / Geared
R1 - door recess, left R2 - door recess, right 1) The larger value is valid. For the values C1 and C2 see table on Pages 17/18. Pictured load points in the machine room for gearless drive.
=
=
SW
MRW = SW+550 mm
Issue 09/2015
LEMoS
®
Project Planning and Performance Data (rear counterweight) Rated load 320 kg ≤ Q ≤ 550 kg n o i t a s i n r e d o M
Perfo rmance data and principal dimensio ns with rear count erweight wi thou t dual entrance (rope suspension 1.1) Rated load 1
Q
[kg]
Speed
v
[m/s]
Max. travel height
TH
[m]
320
350
375
400
425
450
500
550
1.0 40
25
Dual entrance
No 4
Number of passengers (in 1 mm
Min. CW
[mm]
steps)
Max. CW
[mm]
(in 1 mm
Min. CD
[mm]
steps)
Max. CD
[mm]
Car height
CH
[mm]
Side wall clearance, side GG
WC1/WC2 [mm]
Shaft width
Min. SW 2
Car width Car depth
5
6
7
800
850
1050
1100
1200
1300
1100
1200
1300
1350
1350
1400
950
850 1450
1500
1550
2000 – 2250 (min. CH = DH; max. CH = DH + 150 mm) 140 – 300 1080
[mm] 1650
Max. SW 2 [mm]
1700
1130
1900
1800
1950
2000
Rear wall clearance
WC3 3
[mm]
225 (for counterweight 100 mm)
Door packet thickness
DD
[mm]
155 – 295 (depending on door model and door type, see Pages 17/18)
Shaft depth
Min. SD
[mm]
Max. SD
[mm]
Headroom height
Min. HR
[mm]
Pit depth
Min. SP
[mm]
Clearance - rail bracket
Max. l
[mm]
1650
1255 4 1645
1355
2045 1895 1945 3320 – 3570 (min. HR = CH + 1320 mm)
1745
1845
2095
2195
1150 / 1550 5 2500
2450
2400
2200
2150
2100
2000
2000
39.9
40.9
43.0
48.4
21.5
22.1
23.2
26.1
CW + 40
Distance between elevator car guide rails EC STM
[mm]
Rope clearance dimension
RCD
[mm]
Load point in machine room
PGG
[kN]
35.7
36.8
37.5
38.5
Load point in machine room
PEC
[kN]
19.2
19.9
20.3
20.8
Installation eye in machine room
E1
[kN]
Load point in the shaft pit
P7
[kN]
13.1
13.6
13.9
14.3
13.7
14.1
16.0
17.4
Load point in the shaft pit
P8
[kN]
40.5
42.2
43.8
45.3
43.1
44.8
52.3
58.7
Load point in the shaft pit
P9
[kN]
32.3
33.4
34.1
34.9
36.4
36.9
39.4
44.1
variable
5.0
1)
The rated load depends on the car dimensions and on the installed car door. To determine the actual rated load, see table "Rated load depending on car width and car depth" on Page 15. 2) The values for the lateral wall clearances WC1/WC2 and the resulting shaft widths have unrestricted validity only if the existing doors are retained. As soon as new doors are installed, the permissible values for the shaft width must be determined depending on the door model, the door type and the door width. See table "Dimensions of the landing doors for project planning" on Pages 17/18. 3) The horizontal, free clearance between outer edge of the elevator car and outer edge of the counterweight must be at least 50 mm (including installation tolerances). The specied dimension also contains the installation depth of the wall panels of 20 mm, because it is referred to the car inner side. 4) Smaller shaft depths are possible on request and after the project planning has been technically reviewed. 5) The minimum pit depth is 1550 mm for CW x CD = 800 x 1100 - 1200 mm and for CD = 850 to 950 mm.
Determination of the maximum possible car dimensions with rear counterweight (rope suspension 1:1) Car width
=
Shaft width
–
Wall clearance, left
–
Wall clearance, right
CW
=
SW
–
WC1
–
WC2
CW
=
SW
–
CW
=
SW
–
Max. CW
=
SW
–
Car width
=
Car gauge between rails
CW
=
CGBR
– (C1 - R1 + IT + "air") (C1 - R1 + 25 mm + 10 mm) –
140 mm
(C2 - R2 + IT + "air") (C2 - R2 + 25 mm + 10 mm) 140 mm
–
– –
2 x distance from elevator car to rail 2 x 20 mm
Without dual entrance Car depth
= Shaft depth – Door packet thickness –
Rear wall clearance
– Installation tolerance, door side
CD
=
SD
–
DD
–
WC3
–
IT
CD
=
SD
–
(155 to 295 mm)
–
225 mm
–
25 mm
Max. CD
=
SD
–
155 mm
–
225 mm
–
25 mm
IT – installation tolerance (± 25 mm); C1 / C2 – door dimensions, space requirements of the door panels in shaft width; R1 – door recess, left; R2 – door recess, right; installation tolerances of ± 25 mm each are included in wall clearance dimensions WC1, WC2 and WC3.
www.liftequip.com
231
LEMoS
®
Project Planning and Performance Data (rear counterweight) Rated load 630 kg ≤ Q ≤ 1000 kg n o i t a s Perfo rmance data and principal dimensio ns with rear count erweight wi thou t dual entrance (rope suspension 1.1) i n r e 630 750 825 900 Q [kg] d Rated load 1 o Speed 1.0 v [m/s] M Max. travel height 40 [m] TH Dual entrance Number of passengers (in 1 mm Car width
8
Min. CW Max. CW steps) (in 1 mm Car depth Min. CD Max. CD steps) Car height CH Side wall clearance, side GG WC1 WC2 Shaft width Min. SW 2 Max. SW 2 Rear wall clearance WC3 3 Door packet thickness DD Shaft depth Min. SD Max. SD Min. HR Headroom height Pit depth Min. SP Clearance - rail bracket Max. l Distance between elevator car guide rails EC STM Rope clearance dimension RCD PGG Load point in machine room Load point in machine room PEC Installation eye in machine room E1 P7 Load point in the shaft pit Load point in the shaft pit P8 Load point in the shaft pit P9
No 11
10
900
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [kN] [kN] [kN] [kN] [kN] [kN]
1500 1050 1750
1000
12 1000
13 1100
1300 2100
1450
1600 1150 2000
1200
2000 – 2250 (min. CH = DH; max. CH = DH + 150 mm) 255 (without bracket support); 330 (with bracket support) 2
140 – 300 1180
1280
2100
1380
2200 255 (for counterweight 135 mm)
155 – 295 (depending on door model and door type, see Pages 17/18) 1485 2325
1585 2575
1635
1735 2675
1885
3320 – 3570 (min. HR = CH + 1320 mm) 1150 2750
2500
CW + 40 variable
63.9
68.2 36.7
34.4 24.0 75.0
25.5 81.5 62.5
59.0
70.9
73.6
38.2 10.0 26.5 86.0 65.5
39.7 27.5
90.5 68.0
77.4 41.7
29.0 97.0 69.0
The rated load depends on the car dimensions and on the installed car door. To determine the actual rated load, see table "Rated load depending on car width and car depth" on Page 15. 2) The values for the lateral wall clearances WC1/WC2 and the resulting shaft widths have unrestricted validity only if the existing doors are retained. As soon as new doors are installed, the permissible values for the shaft width must be determined depending on the door model, the door type and the door width. See table "Dimensions of the landing doors for pro ject planning" on Pages 17/18. 3) The horizontal, free clearance between outer edge of the elevator car and outer edge of the counterweight must be at least 50 mm (including installation 1)
tolerances). The specied dimension also contains the installation depth of the wall panels of 20 mm, because it is referred to the car inner side.
Determination of the maximum possible car dimensions with rear counterweight (rope suspension 1:1) Car width
=
Shaft width
–
Wall clearance, left
–
Wall clearance, right
CW
=
SW
–
WC1
–
WC2
CW
=
SW
–
CW
=
SW
–
(C1 - R1 + IT + "air") (C1 - R1 + 25 mm + 10 mm)
Max. CW
=
SW
–
140 mm
Car width
=
Car gauge between rails
CW
=
CGBR
– –
–
(C2 - R2 + IT + "air") (C2 - R2 + 25 mm + 10 mm)
–
140 mm
–
2 x distance from elevator car to rail 2 x 20 mm
Without dual entrance Car depth
=
CD
=
SD
–
DD
–
WC3
–
IT
CD
=
SD
–
(155 to 295 mm)
–
255 mm
–
25 mm
Max. CD
=
SD
–
155 mm
–
255 mm
–
25 mm
Shaft depth – Door packet thickness –
Rear wall clearance
– Installation tolerance, door side
IT – installation tolerance (± 25 mm); C1 / C2 – door dimensions, space requirements of the door panels in shaft width; R1 – door recess, left; R2 – door recess, right; installation tolerances of ± 25 mm each are included in wall clearance dimensions WC1, WC2 and WC3.
232
Issue 09/2015
LEMoS
®
Project Planning Data (without dual entrance)
Rated load depending on c ar width and car depth Rated loads Q [kg]
Car width CW [mm] 800
850
900
950
1000
1050
1100
1150
1200
1250
1300
1350
1400
1450
1500
1550
1600
320
350
350
375
375
400
425
425
450
475
500
500
525
320
350
350
375
400
400
425
450
450
475
500
525
550
575
320
350
350
375
400
425
425
450
475
500
525
550
575
600
600
320
350
350
375
400
425
425
450
475
500
525
550
575
600
630
650
475
500
525
550
575
630
630
675
700
850
900 950 1000
] m m [ D C h t p e d r a C
1050
320
350
350
375
400
425
425
450
1100
320
350
375
400
425
425
475
475
500
550
575
600
630
650
675
700
725
1150
350
375
400
425
425
450
475
525
550
575
600
630
650
675
725
750
775
1200
350
375
400
425
450
475
500
550
575
600
630
650
700
725
750
775
800
1250
375
400
425
450
475
500
550
575
600
630
675
700
725
750
800
825
850
1300
400
425
450
475
500
525
575
600
630
675
700
725
750
800
825
850
900
1350
400
425
450
500
525
550
600
630
650
700
725
775
800
825
875
900
925
1400
425
450
475
525
550
575
630
650
700
725
750
800
825
875
900
925
975
1450
425
475
500
550
575
630
650
675
725
750
800
825
875
900
950
975
1000
1500
450
475
525
575
600
630
675
725
750
800
825
875
900
950
975
1550
475
500
550
600
630
675
700
750
775
825
850
900
925
975
1600
475
525
575
600
650
700
725
775
800
850
900
925
975
1000
1650
500
550
600
630
675
725
750
800
850
875
925
975
1000
1700
525
575
630
650
700
750
775
825
875
925
950
1000
1750
550
600
630
675
725
775
825
850
900
950
1000
1800
575
600
650
700
750
800
850
875
925
975
1850
575
630
675
725
775
825
875
925
950
1000
1900
600
650
700
750
800
850
900
850
1000
1950
630
675
725
775
825
875
925
975
2000
650
700
750
800
850
900
950
1000
2050
675
725
775
825
875
925
975
2100
675
750
800
850
900
950
1000
n o i t a s i n r e d o M
Determination of the rated loads in accordance with DIN EN 81-1:1998+A3:2009, edition 06.2010, item 8.2.1, table 1.1 for passenger elevators, with consideration given to an available area in the entrance area with closed door of 0.072 m2 (door model ThyssenKrupp K8A, door type M2T / dual panel, one-sided telescoping, side-opening, door width DW = 900 mm). When using other door models and door types, rated loads may vary from these values.
Number of persons depending on rated load Q Rated loads
Q
[kg]
100
180
225
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
[m ]
0.28
0.49
0.60
0.79
0.98
1.17
1.31
[kg]
630
675
750
8
9 1.59
Number of persons 2
Min. available area in elevator car
Rated loads
Q
Number of persons Min. available area in elevator car
2
[m ]
1.45
320
800
350
375
400
425
975
1000
450
825
900
10
11
12
13
14
1.73
1.87
2.01
2.15
2.29
500
525
1050
Determination of the number of persons in accordance with DIN EN 81-1:1998+A3:2009, edition 06.2010, item 8.2.3 (person weight 75 kg) or table 1.2.
www.liftequip.com
233
LEMoS
®
Project Planning Data (with dual entrance) n o i t a s Rated load depending on c ar width and car depth i n r e Rated loads d o Q [kg] 800 850 900 950 1000 1050 M
Car width CW [mm] 1100
1150
1200
1250
1300
1350
1400
1450
1500
1550
1600
575
600
630
630
675
700
575
600
630
650
675
700
725
850
900 950 1000 1050
575
600
630
650
700
725
750
775
575
600
630
675
700
725
750
775
800
1100 1150
575
600
630
675
700
725
750
800
825
850
575
600
630
675
700
725
775
800
825
850
575
600
630
675
700
725
775
800
825
875
900 950 975
900 925 975 1000 1050
1200 1250 1300 ] m m [ D C h t p e d r a C
1350
575
600
630
675
700
725
775
800
825
875
1400
600
630
650
700
725
775
800
825
875
575
630
650
700
725
750
800
825
875
900
900 950
900 950 975
1025 1050
1450 1500
575
600
630
675
725
750
800
825
875
900
950
975
1025
1550
600
630
675
700
750
775
825
850
900
950
975
1025
1050
1600
600
650
700
725
775
800
850
900
925
975
1000
1050
1650
630
675
725
750
800
850
875
925
975
975
1050
1700
650
700
750
775
825
875
900
950
1000
1050
1750
675
725
775
800
850
900
950
975
1025
1800
700
750
800
825
875
925
975
1025
1050
1850
725
775
825
875
900
950
1000
1050
1900
750
800
850
900
925
975
1025
1950
775
825
875
925
975
1025
1050
2000
800
850
900
950
1000
1050
2050
825
875
925
975
1025
2100
825
900
950
1000
1050
Determination of the rated loads in accordance with DIN EN 81-1:1998+A3:2009, edition 06.2010, item 8.2.1, table 1.1 for passenger elevators, with consideration given to an available area in the entrance area with closed door of 0.072 m2 (door model ThyssenKrupp K8A, door type M2T / dual panel, one-sided telescoping, side-opening, door width DW = 900 mm). When using other door models and door types, rated loads may vary from these values.
234
Issue 09/2015
LEMoS
®
Project Planning Data (door mountings)
Decision-making aid for selecting a suitable door model S8A / K8A
Door model
-
2000 C-MOD
High-quality, elegant and efcient door
-
Economical solution for many common applications
-
Compact dimensions: low installation depth and width, ideal for narrow shafts
-
Further usage of existing swing landing doors possible
-
Version with asymmetric entrance offers additional planning freedom
-
Further usage of existing swing landing doors possible
series
-
Robust and reliable, even under challenging application conditions
-
Extensive range of re protection certications and many options
Special advantages
FINELINE
Dimensions of t he landing doors for project planning T T
T T
C1 C1
TB
Dimensioned drawing for side-opening door (left-opening version shown)
Door model
Door type M2T (dual panel, one-sided telescoping, left-opening)
S8A / K8A
M2T (dual panel, one-sided telescoping, right-opening)
Door width DW [mm]
C2
M2Z (dual panel, centre-opening) S8A / K8A
M4TZ (quadruple panel, telescoping, centre-opening)
Dimensioned drawing for centre-opening door (dual panel version shown)
Space requirement of door panels (in shaft width) C 1 [mm]
700
400
750
425
800
450
850
475
900
500
C 2 [mm]
150
700
400
750
425
800
S8A / K8A
S8A / K8A
TB
C2
150
450
850
475
900
500
700
400
400
750
425
425
800
450
450
850
475
475
900
500
500
800
250
250
850
265
265
900
275
275
Door packet thickness DD [mm]
295 (incl. door frame)
295 (incl. door frame)
235 (incl. door frame)
295 (incl. door frame)
For dimensions C1 and C2 and for the dimension of door packet thickness TT, no shaft and dimensional tolerances are included in the calculation. To determine the maximum car width and maximum car depth in an existing elevator shaft, the spa ce requirements of the doors must be taken into consideration. Listed in the above table are the values for C1, C2 and DD for the various door models and door types. Furth er door designs possible on request.
www.liftequip.com
235
LEMoS
®
Project Planning Data (door mountings) n o i t a s Dimensions of t he landing doors for project planning i n r e Door width d Door model Door type o DW [mm] M 2L (dual panel, one-sided telescoping, left-opening) 2000 C-MOD
2R (dual panel, one-sided telescoping, right-opening) 2000 C-MOD
2000 C-MOD
4S (quadruple panel, telescoping centre-opening, symmetric) FINELINE
FINELINE
FINELINE
4/AS-L (quadruple panel, telescoping centre-opening, asymmetric left)
4/AS-R (quadruple panel, telescoping centre-opening, asymmetric right)
C 1 [mm]
650
390
700
415
750
440
800
465
850
490
900
515
DD [mm]
100
230 (not including depth of the door frame)
390
700
415
750
100
440 465
850
490
900
515
650
210 (DH 2000) / 235 (DH 2100) 210 (DH 2000) / 235 (DH 2100)
700
210 (DH 2000) / 235 (DH 2100) 210 (DH 2000) / 235 (DH 2100)
750
225
225
800
235
235
850
250
250
900
260
260
650
205
205
700
205
205
750
215
215
800
230
230
850
240
240
900
255
255
650
255
700
260
750
290
800
310
850
340
900
360
145
650
255
700
260
750 800
145
Door packet thickness
C 2 [mm]
650
800
4Z (quadruple panel, telescoping centre-opening)
Space requirement of door panels (in shaft width)
290 310
850
340
900
360
230 (not including depth of the door frame)
230 (not including depth of the door frame)
155 (not including depth of the door frame)
155 (not including depth of the door frame)
155 (not including depth of the door frame)
For dimensions C1 and C2 and for the dimension of door packet thickness, no shaft and dimensional tolerances are included in the calculation. To determine the maximum car width and maximum car depth in a n existing elevator shaft, the space requirements of the doors must be taken into consideration. Listed in the above table are the values for C 1, C2 and DD for the various door models and door types.
236
Issue 09/2015
LEMoS
®
Technical Data
Technical data, installed compo nents and electric al data Rated load
Q
[kg]
Speed
v
[m/s]
Max. travel height
Max. TH
[m]
320
350
375
400
500
EC 1
430 – 580
435 – 590
450 – 610
475 – 725
40
[kg]
400 – 540
410 – 550
415 – 555
420 – 560
TW 45 C
Geared
Nominal power Max. mains power
2, 3
Mains rated current 2, 3 Max. mains current
2, 3
[kW]
2.7
2.9
3.0
[kVA]
6.4
6.7
[A]
5.1
5.5
[A]
9.2
9.7
Diameter of traction sheave
DT
[mm]
Suspension ropes
n x dS
[mm]
Max. mains power
2, 3
Mains rated current
2, 3
Max. mains current
2, 3
3.2
3.4
3.6
3.9
4.3
7.0
7.3
7.6
7.9
8.6
9.4
5.8
6.1
6.5
6.8
7.6
8.3
10.1
10.5
11.0
11.4
12.4
13.6
10 x 6
12 x 6
440 7x8 PMC 145-2 M
PMC 145-2 L
[kW]
2.38
3.69
[kVA]
4.1
6.3
[A]
4.1
6.6
[A]
5.9
Gearless
Nominal power
Diameter of traction sheave
DT
[mm]
Suspension ropes
n x dS
[mm]
9.1 240
6x6
7x6
8x6
Elevator-car guide rails
T 70/B
Counterweight guides
T 50/A
Elevator-car buffer Counterweight buffer
1 x 100x80 A
n x type
2 x 100x80 A 1 x 100x80 A
n x type 630
750
825
Rated load
Q
[kg]
Speed
v
[m/s]
1.0
Max. travel height
Max. TH
[m]
40
Dual entrance
900
1000
possible
Mass of car (P 1000 SV) Drive
EC
1
[kg]
550 – 680
550 – 950
590 – 980
Yes
610 – 1000
TW 45 C
Geared
1050
630 – 1020
650 – 1050
700 – 1100
TW 63 B
Nominal power
[kW]
4.8
4.8
5.3
5.8
6.7
7.4
7.7
Max. mains power 2, 3
[kVA]
10.2
12.3
13.6
14.6
15.6
16.7
17.4
Mains rated current 2, 3
[A]
9.3
9.4
10.3
11.2
12.9
14.2
14.9
Max. mains current 2, 3
[A]
14.7
17.7
19.6 590
21
22.5
24.1
25.1
Diameter of traction sheave Suspension ropes Drive
550
No
Mass of car (P 450 SV)
Drive
450
1.0
Dual entrance Drive
425
n o i t a s i n r e d o M
DT n x dS
[mm]
440
[mm]
7x8
5 x 10
510 6 x 10
7 x 10
PMC 145 M / PMC 170 M / DAF 210 L
Gearless
PMC 170 XL / DAF 270 M
Nominal power
[kW]
4.8
5.8
Max. mains power 2, 3
[kVA]
8.8
11.9
Mains rated current 2, 3
[A]
9.3
13.1
Max. mains current 2, 3
[A]
12.7
17.1
Diameter of traction sheave
DT
[mm]
Suspension ropes
n x dS
[mm]
320 7x8
8x8
T 89/B
Elevator-car guide rails
T 50/A
Counterweight guides Elevator-car buffer Counterweight buffer
2 x 100x80 A
n x type n x type
1 x 125x80 A
2 x 125x80 A 2 x 100x80 A
Equipment features for determining the elevator car weights: Min. EC: without dual entrance, door model FINELINE, hand-rail, without mirror, plastic ooring material, 2 mm. Max. EC: with dual entrance, door model K8A, hand-rail, mirror, plastic ooring material, 2 mm. 2) For 400 V / 50 Hz. 3) The specied powers and currents are average values 1)
for orientation, are based on the actu ally installed components and increase depending on the project according to elevator control unit, the number of landings, the type and number of operating and indicator elements, the car lighting and other electrical power consumers (e.g. fans).
www.liftequip.com
237
LEMoS
®
Elevator Car Design n o i t a s i n r e d o M
Colours / materials
WVSG
WVCW
Trafc White RAL 9016 /
Galvanised steel
WVSL
WVSF
Linen / stainless steel
Leather / stainless steel
Colour RAL / powder coating
powder coating
Grain 220/stainless steel ferritic
WVSE
WVCC
WVSA Grain 220/stainless steel austenitic
Car ceiling and lighting systems
Mirrors
Half mirror BTHM Mirror, entire height BBWD
SpotLED
SlimLED
Without lighting
Trafc white RAL 9016 /
Trafc white RAL 9016 /
Trafc white RAL 9016 /
powder coating, CWFS stainless steel grain 220, CSFS
powder coating, CWSL stainless steel grain 220, CSSL
powder coating, CWNL
Flooring material
FNES Black Stone / rubber
FRKB Kayar Black / rubber
FPDG Dove Grey / vinyl
FRKG Kayar Grey / rubber
FRIC Ice / rubber
FOEO Dark Brushed Oak / PVC
Prepared for ooring material of up to 25 mm to be provided by customer
Hand rail Handrails
Stainless steel Grain 220 dia. 4 0 mm straight version Rear wall, side walls
Stainless steel Grain 220 dia. 40 mm bowed version Rear wall, side walls
Stainless steel Grain 220 dia. 40 mm bowed version, all round L-layout, U-layout
Skirt guards
Optional
238
Grain 220 stainless steel 50 mm SBSS
Aluminium 30 mm SBAA
Issue 09/2015
LEMoS
®
Elevator Car Design
Design variants VERTICAL A
VERTICAL B
VERTICAL C
Colours / materials
Galvanised steel
Trafc White /
WVSG
powder coating WVCW
Grain 220 stainless steel WVSF
WVCW
WVSF
CWFS
CWFS
CSSL
SBAA
SBAA
SBSS
without
FRKG
FRKB
without
HSRE + HSLT
HCIL
without
BTHM
BBWD
n o i t a s i n r e d o M
Wall WVSG Car ceiling with lighting systems Skirt guard Flooring material Hand rail Mirrors
The elevator car can also be supplied in galvanised sheet metal as the design for customer lining. Please specify the customer-designed equipment with weight.
VERTICAL
The elevator car is prepared for installation of a COP (car operating panel) as installation panel by the customer. On account of the selfsupporting construction no through-holes or openings may be provided in the walls (exception: cable lead-through).
www.liftequip.com
239
LEMoS
®
Car Design Options n Elevator car P450SV / P1000SV design options o i t a s i VERTICAL n Code r Colours / materials selection e d o M Walls (VERTICAL design line) Galvanised steel
Trafc White RAL 9016 / powder coating
BTHM
WVCW
Full height mirror without dots pattern
BBWD
Leather / stainless steel
WVSE
Grain 220 / stainless steel austenitic
WVSL WVSF WVSA
VERTICAL selection
Mirror on the rear wall of the car
Half mirror from height of hand-rail to cover
WVCC
Grain 220 / stainless steel ferritic
Code
WVSG
Colour / RAL powder coating
Linen / stainless steel
Colours / materials
Handrails in the elevator car
Stainless steel grain 220 l 40 mm version, straight on rear wall, rear
HSRE
on side wall, right
HSRI
on side wall, left
HSLT
Stainless steel grain 220 l 40 mm, bowed version on rear wall, rear
HBRE
on side wall, right
HBRI
on side wall, left
HBLT
Stainless steel grain 220 l 40 mm, bowed version, surrounding Car front walls
Galvanised steel
Trafc White RAL 9016 / powder coating
DPSG
DPCW
L-layout (on rear and side wall, opposite CIOP)
HCIL
U-layout (on three sides)
HCIU
Skirt guards in the elevator car
Colour / RAL powder coating
DPCC
Stainless steel grain 220 h = 50 mm without lighting
SBSS
Leather / stainless steel
DPSE
Aluminium h = 30 mm without lighting
SBAA
Linen / stainless steel
DPSL
Grain 220 / stainless steel ferritic
DPSF
Grain 220 / stainless steel austenitic
DPSA
Car ceiling and lighting
SpotLED Trafc White RAL 9016 / powder coating SpotLED grain 220 / austenitic stainless steel
SlimLED Trafc White RAL 9016 / powder coating
CWFS CSFS CWSL
SlimLED grain 220 / austenitic stainless steel
CSSL
Without lighting Trafc White RAL 9016 / powder coating
CWNL
Flooring material in the elevator car
Black Stone / rubber
FNES
Kayar Black / rubber
FRKB
Kayar Grey / rubber
FRKG
Ice / rubber
FRIC
Dove Grey / vinyl
FPDG
Dark Brushed Oak / PVC
FOEO
Without ooring material Option
240
Issue 09/2015
LEMoS
®
Lighting System
LED Lighting
Through the use of highly efcient and energy-saving LED lighting, energy
savings up to 78% over uorescent
n o i t a s i n r e d o M
lamps can be achieved.
W
White LED
W
LED strips With indirect lighting over the skirt guard, the LED lighting system offers you a special accent with soft light. Our atmospheric RGB LED lighting system offers you a broad spectrum of colored light.
RGB LED: all colors available on the skirt guard
www.liftequip.com
241
Technical Report
Technical Report Solutions for modernisation with components s t n e n o p m o c h t i w n o i t a s i n r e d o m r o f s n o i t u l o S t r o p e R l a c i h c e T
Solutions for modernization with components The elevator markets in Germany and many parts of Europe have a hig h number of existing installations, some of which are more than 25 years old. Due to the considerable age of these installations and safety-related considerations, as well as the need for necessary repairs and conversions, many of these installations have to be fundamentally renovated. It may also be necessary to modernize existing elevators as part of building renovation programmes and changes of use. In such cases, the installation is often completely replaced. The market potential in terms of modernization is therefore significantly greater than for new installations which are either in planning or have already been fitted. The majority of these installations still have a machine room, which it would then be advisable to keep in service, even in the case of modernization. Modernizations which, without a compelling reason, forgo the continued use of an existing machine room, should therefore be carefully examined in order to check that measures in place for rescuing elevator passengers, maintenance and installation inspection are not encumbered as a result. Complete replacement with an MRL system is frequently proposed as a modernization solution when suppliers are not able to offer project-related and customized solutions.
Whenever a modernization is planned, it is therefore necessary to check the current situation regarding the installation in terms of up-to-dateness, by using the available drawings and technical documents (register), and to document the actual status with photographs.
Bracket
Modernization concepts, the selection of components and schedules must always be coordinated in detail.
Access
When installations are modernized, experience shows that noise behaviour in the building can change perceptibly in connection with changes made to the elevator. It is therefore recommended that noise and passenger comfort should be measured before the conversion, in order for these measurements to then be used as comparison measurements after the modernization is completed. Because the total amount of time and resources required for modernization is not limited only to the elevator components, the surrounding area should also be included in the examination during the planning stage. The following general conditions should also be considered:
242
f astenings (masonry situa-
tion) Shaft
openings (position and size)
Existing
concrete foundations in machine room and pit (retain or remove)
Dust-free
conversion
to the building during the conversion
Transport
paths in the building for the conversion
…
This means that, in the area surrounding the modernization, it must be possible to adapt the solutions and packages flexibly to the particular application conditions of the installation. Some requirements that should be taken into consideration are detailed below. Some requirements may also arise in combination: Optimization
of the elevator car size
With an elevator car that can be flexibly configured with integrated car sling for gauge reduction, the internal car area can be optimized, given the available shaft cross section. When doors with corresponding pad
Changes
that affect structural aspects (ceiling loads, wall fastenings and pit stresses)
Further
usage of existing ceiling and wall openings
Figure 1: Shaft utilisation
46
UK
Figure 2: Elevator car with integrated car sling and flexible dimensions
LIFT-REPORT
40. Jahrg. (2014)
Heft 1
Issue 09/2015
Technical Report
Technical Report Solutions for modernisation with components thicknesses and installation dimensions are also used, in many cases this optimization makes it is possible to use a door with a width of 900 mm and a floor area which fulfil the requirements for a type of elevator that can be used by the disabled. Door
openings
When the existing door openings on the floors can continue to be used as a result of appropriate planning, this means a considerable reduction in the additional measures taken by the customer. Old hinged-door frames can be retained and the sliding doors placed behind them. By panelling the frames, the closure to the masonry on the floor can then be made dust-free.
Figure 6: DAF210 with adaptation to TW63 frame with rope guard
Figure 4: LIOP, LOP, LIP
verter is also state-of-the-art practice and energy-efficient solutions with power regeneration are used more frequently even in the lower range of performance. Machine base frames for adaptation to local conditions can also be supplied in many cases. In terms of service and maintenance, both drive concepts are comparable, since brake manufacturers can alternatively also supply brakes with manual release for gearless brakes.
Figure 3: Panelled hinged-door frame with telescopic door
Operating
and indicator elements
On the landing, LOP, LIOP, LIP panels with integrated electrics for simple cabling to the control system can be fitted as desired on the door frame or the masonry as flat attachment elements with different button designs. The requirements of EN 81-70 are then also met. Gearless
48
www.liftequip.com
Figure 7: DAF270 with adaptation to TW130 frame with rope guard
Gears can be placed either with an adapter onto the existing frame or onto the foundation. For using gearless drives in the machine room, corresponding solutions with an optional traction sheave cover are available. All solutions are designed with appropriate insulation for sound-optimized installation. When adjacent drives are replaced, solutions with a gearless system and traction sheave in the shaft are available, which are placed in the wall opening.
or geared
For the drive, a check must be made to see whether an existing gear with large traction sheave should be replaced by a gear with large traction sheave or whether a gearless system with 2:1 suspension and smaller traction sheave is used. In modernization, the use of a frequency con-
s t n e n o p m o c h t i w n o i t a s i n r e d o m r o f s n o i t u l o S t r o p e R l a c i h c e T
Figure 5: ModKit with PMC 170
Figure 8: DAF210 as a replacement for lower
Drum
drive as a special solution
Where space is very restricted, the solution with a drum drive is a possible alternative to the hydraulic or traction sheave elevator. EN 81-1 also describes the standard requirements for drum-drive elevators. Worm gears are generally used for the drive, while the use of gearless drives is limited in terms of rated load due to the required diameter of the traction sheave.
LIFT-REPORT
40. Jahrg. (2014)
Heft 1
243
Technical Report
Technical report Solutions for modernisation with components s t n e n o p m o c h t i w n o i t a s i n r e d o m r o f s n o i t u l o S t r o p e R l a c i h c e T
Installation
When replacing parts, a check must be made to see whether components such as rails, brackets and the counterweight can, in fact, be used again. If they can, a considerable amount of installation time and effort, using dowels and transporting material, can be avoided. As a result, it may also be possible to reduce the length of time required for the conversion. Modular
Figure 9: DAF270 with traction sheave in the shaft
Figure 10: Drum drive with gear TW130
LIFT-REPORT
40. Jahrg. (2014)
Heft 1
modernization
Based on an overall concept for the modernization, it is possible to implement the measures in several steps, when this is not possible in one step for budgetary reasons, for example. It is then ensured that, on completion of the entire modernization, the installation features stateof-the-art technology and no unnecessary costs are incurred through repeatedly replacing components. Energy
244
part replacement
ef ficiency
Depending of the type of use (number of runs, equipment, etc.), the focus must be placed on reducing either the travelling requirement or the standby requirement. In VDI 4707 Part 2, the process has now been defined as to how, using component characteristic values, an energy efficiency analysis can be carried out even as part of the modernization planning (forecast tool).
Structural
aspects
When the loads on an installation are increased, a change in or recalculation of the statics is always necessary. In many cases, one solution here can be to distribute the loading onto the shaft ceiling via a load distribution beam. This measure can also be helpful on occasions when, because of the installation situation, new ceiling openings have to be created. The drives are protected from vibration when placed on these beams. To further optimise the noise situation, it may be advisable in certain cases to also provide additional antivibrating elements underneath the beams. In this case, the rubber-metal connections should be designed accordingly. When individual components are replaced, all components to be changed and the different effects on the overall system during replacement must be assessed. UCM
(unintended car movement)
As part of a modernization operation, a check must always be made to see what measures must be implemented in relation to the requirements according to A3. Replacing a drive always makes it necessary to carry out an assessment according to EN 81-1:A3 (UCM) and implement the necessary measures. In this
49
Issue 09/2015
Technical Report
Technical report Solutions for modernisation with components
case, comprehensive planning is required, which, in many cases, should be combined with simultaneous replacement of the control system, since the majority of control system developers offer A3 functionality as a pre-integrated feature in their current control systems. The solution is often easier to implement than networking the different components with additional detection systems. When a control system is later replaced, these components may no longer be required. When implementing the requirements of A3, it may be easier to forgo a levelling operation with earlyopening doors and demonstrate via rope elongation that, due to the buffering during loading, relevelling is not necessary. In this case, it is sufficient if the installation is securely stopped at the landing via a safety brake, as found on the gearless system in the form of an operational
www.liftequip.com
brake, or via an emergency brake system (NBS) on the gear.
Summary In Germany and in parts of Europe, the market volume in terms of modernization is significantly greater than the market for new installations. Types of modernization may turn out to be very different according to the local situation and the particular supplier. Approaches to modernization range from the typical replacement of individual components to modular and scalable replacement solutions, through to the complete replacement of the entire elevator system. All these solution options should be viewed in terms of a project in order for a solution to be found, on the basis of a technical and economic assessment, that is customized to the requirements of both customer and operator.
In the process, flexibly adjusted car dimensions can be assessed for optimum space utilisation. In the report, the different concepts will also be assessed on the basis of examples, in order for a technical and economic assessment of the solution options to be made. In the view of the operators and in respect of safety for ser vicing personnel, continuing to use existing machine rooms is to be preferred, provided that this space is not otherwise required for reasons of building use (e.g addition).
s t n e n o p m o c h t i w n o i t a s i n r e d o m r o f s n o i t u l o S t r o p e R l a c i h c e T
In existing installations, headrooms and shaft pits are generally sufficiently large, so that measures for temporary safety spaces are not necessary. A special application where space is restricted may take the form of a solution with a drum drive.
LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components GmbH, D-73765 Neuhausen a.d.F.
245
246
Issue 09/2015
Safety
BASIC SAFETY PRACTICES FOR LIFTS
s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
Disclaimer: The present ELA “Basic Safety Practices for Lifts” booklet is intended as a tool among others to help controlling safety risks. It is for general information purposes only and should not be construed as legal advice. It is not intended as a substitute for each company’s own assessment and decision making. LiftEquip declines any and all liability for any measure taken or not taken on the basis of the present booklet.
www.liftequip.com
247
Safety
INTRODUCTION
s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
Installing, maintaining, repairing, and modernizing lis are acvies leading to exposure to specic risks. In order to migate these risks and help promote an injury-free workplace, professionals are therefore required to follow specic safety pracces and work methods. This ELA “Basic Safety Pracces” booklet gathers general and specic safety pracces which should be followed at all mes. This booklet has been designed, in the rst instance, for providers of installaon, maintenance, repair, and modernizaon services for lis. These service providers have a legal obligaon and responsibility to protect their employees against any risks related to their acvies. The booklet provides guidance in quong examples of protecon means which – when put in place adequately – will help aain the best level of protecon to, among others, contractor’s and subcontractor’s employees. It is also the company responsibly to idenfy, understand and comply will all the applicable local, regional, country and European requirements and laws. Equally, this booklet has also been designed for the employees. Indeed, the employee is responsible for following the safety pracces and for using the protecon equipment provided by his/her company. The booklet will help him/ her to understand the risks and, where needed, to require the necessary addional protecon means from his/her company. Safety pracces are generally based upon common sense. They have been set following the lessons learnt from many years of incidents, some of them very serious and leading to death. Some of the safety pracces are parcularly important: these are the VITAL rules. As clearly stated, these rules are VITAL for the preservaon of life itself. Should they not be followed, the result could be very serious or even fatal injuries.
(3)
248
Issue 09/2015
Safety
INTRODUCTION
This ELA “Basic Safety Pracces” booklet addresses most of the risks and situaons encountered in the li acvity. It provides guidelines and examples on how to protect against the risks and help starng the safety journey. However, this booklet should not be seen as an exhausve set of rules covering all the complexity of our work. It remains the responsibility of the company concerned to conduct its own risk assessment and provide the right prevenve measures. Your business as a contractor or subcontractor and your life as a worker depend on the strict applicaon of all safety pracces. Ensure their respect and respect them at all mes.
s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
Finally, in case of a doubt, should anyone feel that the situaon is not fully under control, STOP working immediately and ask for support. The Eding Team
Disclaimer: The present ELA “Basic Safety Pracces for Lis” booklet is intended as a tool among others to help controlling safety risks. It is for general informaon purposes only and should not be construed as legal advice. It is not intended as a substute for each company’s own assessment and decision making. ELA declines any and all liability for any measure taken or not taken on the basis of the present booklet. © 2015 European Li Associaon (ELA) aisbl Belgium - All rights reserved.
(4) www.liftequip.com
249
Safety
s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
N O I T C U D O R T N I
s o t s e b s A
s t c e j b o g n i l l a F
g n i l i e c n o t r u h f o k s i R
g n i p p i r t f o k s i R
t e i n h t u f t o n p e c o t a j n d o a h d s n a u r y c a f o w t k s i s i o R h
t n e m p n i o u q d r e g a z n a i h v o g n i m h d s e t u r c C e t o r p n u
d r a z a h l a c i r t c e l E
s o t s e b s A
s t c e j b o g n i l l a F
g n i p p i r t f o k s i R
t h g i r e o g w t a n i r v e h e l t s n e u r u t c o n f c e , c o r a j k a s c d i R e a r h t o y b
g n i p p i r t f o k s i R
p i l s f o k s i R
t n e m p n i o u q d r e g a z n a i h v o g n i m h d s e t u r c C e t o r p n u
p i l s f o k s i R
t n e m p n i o u q d r e g a z n a i h v o g n i m h d s e t u r c C e t o r p n u
p i l s f o k s i R
e n i h c a m m o o r o t e s n i s h e c c a c a m – r l o l / a f d f n o a k s i R
d r a z a h l a c i r t c e l E
r m a c o e r f h l t l f a o f f p o t k o s i e R h t
d r a z a h l a c i r t c e l E
e r e h t d d a m l o t r f i p l l r a f o f g o n i k d s n i a R l
: s k s i r e h t f o y r a m m u S (5)
250
Issue 09/2015
Safety
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE)
Like all professionals – remen, policemen, welders etc. – or any sportsman – fencing, maral art – wearing personal protecve equipment allows one to perform the acvity in the best safe condions. The company has the responsibility to provide this Personal Protecve Equipment to all their employees. The employee has the responsibility to wear and use them and require them to be replaced if damaged.
s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
2 types of protecve equipment are presented: n n
The personal protecve equipment which protects the body from an injury. The means of fall protecon which prevents the employee from falling from heights.
(6)
www.liftequip.com
251
Safety
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE)
s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
Glasses: n Are mandatory when there is a risk of ying objects (such as drilling, grinding…) n Recommended when using chemical products
Safety helmet required: n When there is a risk of falling objects n Are mandatory on all construcon sites Check the helmet following the manufacturer’s recommendaon! Protecve caps are: n Recommended all mes to protect against injuries in small machine room or work in the hoistway
Ear protecon: n Mandatory if noise > 85 dB(A)
Required gloves: n Heavy duty gloves when doing manual handling. n Cut protecve when performing repairs, using tools, etc. n Electrical gloves for work on potenal live equipment n Chemical gloves when using chemical products.
Fall protecon equipment are mandatory when there is a risk of fall: n Fall Arrest system allows the arrest of a fall n Fall Restraint prevents approaching the gap
Safety shoes: n An-slip, an-perforang. n Toe protecon against falling objects. n A heel to get a beer grip when climbing a ladder n Preferably providing protecon for the ankle
Working clothes: n Protect against cuts, dirt, etc. n Idenfy the company
Avoid wearing: n Metal watches, bracelets, necklaces, rings etc. when working on a live electrical equipment n Uned clothes that could be caught in unprotected moving equipment n Ties, scarves that could be caught in unprotected moving equipment Remember: n Addional safety requirements such as glasses, high visibility jacket… could be required locally!
(7)
252
Issue 09/2015
Safety
FALL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT Primary protecon means: the balustrade or guardrail A balustrade or guardrail should always have at least the following component: Top rail Mid rail Toe guard
Check the dimension in local regulaon!
Guardrail or balustrade shall be installed if a risk of fall exists as dened in the local regulaon (for example, gap>30 cm and working area >2 m): • On top of the car • On top of temporary working plaorm. • On a scaold. • On edge of a building. • In hoistway / sha opening.
Secondary protecon means: fall arrest system or fall restrain system
s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
Fall Restraint System: PREVENTS a fall
Fall Arrest System: STOPS the fall Fall Arrest System includes:
Fall Restraint includes:
→ Body harness EN 361 → Short lanyard EN 355 with shock absorber → Connectors to aach the harness EN 362
→ → → →
Body harness EN 361 OR Belt EN 358 Adjustable lanyard EN 355 Connectors to aach to harness EN362
All fall protecon equipment: • Is individual: every employee exposed shall be provided with one • Must be formally inspected 1/year by a competent person (supplier or any trained person) • Must be checked before each use
Hooking points On the top of the car, unit in service
Other situaons: the life line Example of life line:
Life line made of cord with its aachment point for harness
The car beam is generally considered as an adequate hooking point for the fall arrest system.
Retractable life line
The life line shall be xed to an adequate hooking point with the right capacity as per local regulaon. The life line shall be protected against sharp edge.
The company to list the authorized hooking points.
When working on the car: • Aach aer accessing • Detach before egressing
• • •
This is to prevent sll being aached when pung the unit back in service.
•
Use life line when working on: Temporary plaorm On a car when ropes have been removed On a car parally assembled, suspended by chain or hoisng device A ladder when working on top of the counterweight
(8) www.liftequip.com
253
Safety
FATAL & SERIOUS ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
In the Li Industry, employees are exposed to risks which – if not fully idened and adequately managed – may lead to a fatal or serious accident. The present chapter aims to help any employee and company understanding what the main risks are and help them idenfy eecve means of protecon. The list is based on li industry experience and knowledge of serious accidents but however cannot be considered as fully exhausve.
(9)
254
Issue 09/2015
Safety
FATAL & SERIOUS ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
ACCESSING THE SITE – NEW EQUIPMENT – CONTROL OF MECHANICAL ENERGY DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of being hurt by a falling object can occur when walking on a construcon site and a worker drops a tool or materials.
s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS wear a safety helmet when working on a construcon site. ALWAYS be careful of workers working above when accessing the site or the building. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Personal Protecve Equipment: • Safety helmet. Check the safety helmet following the manufacturer’s recommendaon!
(10) www.liftequip.com
255
Safety
FATAL & SERIOUS ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
ACCESS TO THE MACHINE ROOM OR THE PULLEY ROOM – TRAP ACCESS – FALL PROTECTION
s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK
Risk of falling from unsuitable access equipment if: • unsafe ladder (damaged, too short or can’t be secured to a xing point)
Risk of falling from unsuitable access equipment if: • unsafe trap (not robust enough, too heavy, no system to prevent accidental closing etc.)
PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS check condion of ladder and trap before use. NEVER use improvised access equipment. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Safe Access Equipment: • Ladder in good condion (not broken, damaged or fragile). • Ladder with non-slip feet. • Fixed ladder or hooking system to secure the ladder. • Secured and robust trap. • Handle to facilitate the access and good balance. Personal Protecve Equipment: • Boots with clean, non-slip soles. • Protecve cap. Safe procedure: • Check that the access equipments are safe. • Keep 3 points of contact when climbing up the ladder • NEVER stay posioned on the trap: it may not be robust. • ALWAYS close the trap (public and employee protecon) • If the access is not safe, inform the company.
The issue should be raised with your company who should inform the customer and/or inspecon body (if relevant) to help and nd an appropriate soluon.
(11)
256
Issue 09/2015
Safety
FATAL & SERIOUS ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
ACCESS TO THE MACHINE ROOM OR THE PULLEY ROOM – ACCESS TO ROOF – FALL PROTECTION
DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of falling from unprotected edge if: • Edge is within less than 3 m from the access path to the machine room or pulley room.
s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE : NEVER approach an unprotected edge. ALWAYS ensure that fall protecon is in place if a fall exists with 3 m from the access path to the machine room or pulley room. ALWAYS use a portable light if no proper lighng is in place. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Safe Access:
• Edge of the building protected by a compliant guardrail. Personal Protecve Equipment: • Fall protecon system and appropriate hooking point. Safe procedure: • Check that the access is safe.
If the access does not meet the criteria above, inform the company. The issue should be raised with your company who should in form the customer and/or inspecon body (if relevant) to help and nd an appropriate soluon.
(12) www.liftequip.com
257
Safety
FATAL & SERIOUS ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
WORK IN THE MACHINE ROOM – FALL PROTECTION s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of falling through unprotected hole from an open trap or when liing equipment through the trap.
PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: NEVER work in close proximity of an unprotected opening without appropriate fall protecon equipment.
If a barrier cannot be used, ALWAYS wear protecve equipment aached to a hooking point in the machine room. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Safe Access:
• Compliant guardrail around the trap. Personal Protecve Equipment • Personal fall protecon with the lanyard aached to an appropriate hooking point (such as a specially created point or an adequate beam). Safe procedure: • Install a compliant guardrail if none exists. • Idenfy the appropriate hooking point for fall protecon. • Wear personal fall protecon with the lanyard aached. • No employee shall stay within the vicinity of the fall hazard if not wearing any kind of fall protecon equipment.
If the access does not meet the criteria above, inform the company. The issue should be raised with your company who should inform the customer and/or inspecon body (if relevant) to help and nd an appropriate soluon. (13)
258
Issue 09/2015
Safety
FATAL & SERIOUS ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
WORK IN THE MACHINE ROOM – CONTROL OF ELECTRICAL ENERGY DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of being electrocuted when: • Taking measurements on electrical equipment. • Replacing or repairing an electrical component or any equipment which can be powered with 110V DC or 50V AC and more (controller, selector, machine, main line switch, juncon box, door lock…). • Working in close proximity of the energized equipment.
s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
Check if local regulaon requires a mandatory cercaon for all exposed employees!
PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE : ALWAYS lock out and tag out the equipment before performing any work on the electrical equipment, except when measuring values during fault nding. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Li Equipment Protecon: • Energized equipment is protected against accidental contact (IP2x). • Electric shock protecon devices. Personal Protecve Equipment: • Insulated gloves. • Safety glasses to avoid ashover injuries if exposed to live equipment. • Tesng device or measurement device depending on local constraint. • Locks and tools to prevent 3rd party pung the power back on. Safe procedure: Before working on the live equipment: • Switch o all the power sources of the unit (main power, car light, etc.). • Apply locks in order to prevent 3rd party switching the power back on. • Verify that the tesng device/mul-meter is working properly on a known source. • Verify that there is no power le on the equipment with the tesng device/mul-meter for every individual phase.
When replacing the main line switch: switch o, locked out and tagged out the power of the li at the main line switch of the building.
(14) www.liftequip.com
259
Safety
FATAL & SERIOUS ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
WORK IN THE MACHINE ROOM – WORK ON ROTATING / MOVING EQUIPMENT s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of crushing or amputaon when: • Working on moving equipment such as ropes, sheave, selectors etc. • Working in close proximity of unprotected equipment.
PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS lock out and tag out the equipment before performing any work on the moving/rotang equipment. NEVER get in close proximity to unprotected moving/rotang equipment. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Personal Protecve Equipment: • No e, scarf, loose clothing, etc. worn in proximity of moving equipment. Li Equipment Protecon – Check that: • Sheave, ropes are protected by a guard covering the nip points. Safe procedure: Before working on the equipment: • Switch o the power of the unit. • Apply locks in order to prevent 3rd party switching the power back and ensure the unit can’t move. • If using the emergency rescue operaon (ERO), ensure that no one gets in close proximity.
(15)
260
Issue 09/2015
Safety
FATAL & SERIOUS ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
WORK IN THE MACHINE ROOM – WORK ON THE BRAKE CONTROL OF MECHANICAL ENERGY DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK When working on the brake, the movement of the sheave is free and can lead to an uncontrolled movement of the car.
s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS check the brake condion. ALWAYS check proper adherence of ropes into the sheaves. ALWAYS secure the cam to prevent one to open the manual landing door. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Example of a safe procedur e Before working on the brake: • Check the brake condion and adherence. • Secure the cam to prevent anyone opening the manual landing door. • Land the counterweight on the buer. An addional precauon can be to block the sheave to prevent uncontrolled movement.
On drum machine: The car should be landed on its buer or if slack rope, movement shall be prevented by prevenng the drum from moving.
(16)
www.liftequip.com
261
Safety
FATAL & SERIOUS ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
WORK ON THE LANDING – SERVICE & RENOVATION – FALL PROTECTION s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK
Risk of an employee or a member of the public falling through unguarded opening when the landing door is open and the car is not behind.
PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS protect the working area at landings. ALWAYS inform the customer that the li is not available. ALWAYS verify that the landing doors are mechanically locked when closing the landing doors and before leaving site. NEVER leave the landing doors wide open when working in pit. NEVER open wide the landing doors when the car is not behind. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Safe procedure: When opening the landing doors: • Install protecve barrier if possible. • Take a stable posion to keep rm foong. • Preferably open the boom oor landing doors. • Only open a few cenmeters to prevent falling.
When working on the car from the landing: • Posion the car so that it is comfortable to work. • Switch o the unit to prevent potenal electrocuon if working on electrical equipment (juncon box, door operator…). When accessing the hoistway: • Posion the car safely: no more than 50 cm from landing. In case the car is stopped between oors (trapped passengers or renovaon): • Check the opening under the car. • Ensure the opening does not allow anyone to fall underneath.
(17)
262
Issue 09/2015
Safety
FATAL & SERIOUS ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
WORK ON THE LANDING – WORK ON MOVING / ROTATING EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of crushing or amputaon when working on moving equipment such as the car door operator, landing door panels or car doors.
s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS lock out and tag out the equipment before performing any work on the moving/rotang equipment. NEVER come in close proximity to unprotected moving/rotang equipment. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Personal Protecve Equipment: • Protecve gloves • No e, scarf, loose clothing etc. worn in proximity of moving/ rotang equipment. Safe procedure: • Switch o the power of the unit if power is not needed. • When opening/closing the landing/car doors or manipulang the car door operator, be aware of the kinec energy to control the movement and keep body parts away from nip points.
(18) www.liftequip.com
263
Safety
FATAL & SERIOUS ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
WORK ON THE LANDING – NEW EQUIPMENT – FALL PROTECTION s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of an employee or a worker of the construcon site falling through the unprotected hoistway opening.
PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS ensure voids and openings are protected by suitable guardrails in compliance with current standards. Important! When the mechanic is working in the hoistway, protecon against falling objects must be in place (see p 27). EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Hoistway protecon: • Fixed guardrails to current standards shall be installed to protect li employees and other workers.
Eecve barricade installed in front of the hoistway to prevent site workers and employees falling in the hoistway
Personal Protecve Equipment: • Fall protecon equipment if a fall hazard exists. • Suitable anchorage for lanyard at the ho istway opening. Safe procedure: In case a guardrail needs to be installed or if a ladder needs to be used in the vicinity of the opening, a personal fall protecon shall be used: • Install a specic hooking point for the lanyard at hoistway opening. • Tie o the body harness. • Protect the working area to prevent other workers falling into the hoistway opening. Before the work starts, the company should have a r isk assessment process to check that the hoistway condions is as per the installaon requirements. If the hoistway condions are not met by the General Contractor, work shall stop and company must be informed.
(19)
264
Issue 09/2015
Safety
FATAL & SERIOUS ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
ACCESS THE HOISTWAY – ACCESS THE TOP OF THE CAR – CONTROL OF THE ELEVATOR DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of being crushed in the hoistway when working on the top of the car.
s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS take control of the li before accessing the hoistway by switching o the power or acvang STOP and INSPECTION buons aer they have been checked separately. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Li safety equipment: • free space or refuge or alternave means of safety distances. • STOP buon. • Inspecon switch. Safe procedure: Before accessing the top of the car: • Switch o the power of the unit and apply lock to prevent anyone pung power back on, OR : • Send the car several oors below (minimum 2). • Open the hoistway door with the release key. • Check that the car stops when landing doors safety contact opens. • Stop the car no more than 50 cm above the oor to safely access. • Push the STOP buon, close the doors, push the call buons and check that the car did not move. • Open the doors, push the INSPECTION buon, release the STOP buon back to normal, close the doors, push the call buons and check that the car did not move. • Open the landing doors and push the STOP buon back.
Assess other potenal risks such as fall from the car top or adjacent unit running in the same hoistway, etc. This procedure may need to be customized depending upon the technology.
(20) www.liftequip.com
265
Safety
FATAL & SERIOUS ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
ACCESS THE HOISTWAY – ACCESS TO THE PIT – CONTROL OF THE ELEVATOR s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK
Risk of being crushed by the car or the counterweight when accessing and working in pit.
PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS take control of the li before accessing the hoistway by switching o the power or acvang STOP aer it has been checked. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Li safety equipment – Check presence of: • STOP buon. • Pit ladder. Safe procedure: Before accessing the pit: • Enter the pit through the boom landing door or access door • Switch o the power of the unit and apply lock to prevent anyone to put power back. OR :
• Send the car to the top oor. • Open the hoistway door with the release key before the car arri ves at the oor. • Check that the car stops when landing doors safety contact opens. • Push the STOP buon, close the landing doors and push the call buon to check if the STOP switch is eecvely working. • Prevent the landing doors from closing completely (leave no more than 15 cm opening) by using a door blocking device. A screwdriver is not an appropriate tool. If there is no pit STOP Switch: Switch o the power.
(21)
266
Issue 09/2015
Safety
FATAL & SERIOUS ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
WORK IN THE HOISTWAY – TOP OF THE CAR / INSIDE THE CAR – FALL PROTECTION s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK
Risk of falling from the top of the car
Risk of falling from inside the car when exposed to a fall hazard
PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS ensure voids and openings are protected by suitable barriers in compliance with current standards. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Equipment on the car: • Fixed balustrade to current standards on car top, see page 8. Personal Protecve Equipment: • Fall arrest or fall restraint system. • Suitable anchorage for lanyard on the top of car. Safe procedure: Before accessing the car: • Check for balustrade. • If no balustrade or it is unsuitable, wear the appropriate fall protecon aached to suitable anchorage point. ALWAYS aach the harness when on the top of car. ALWAYS detach the harness before leaving the top of car.
(22) www.liftequip.com
267
Safety
FATAL & SERIOUS ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
WORK IN A HOISTWAY – MOVING IN THE HOISTWAY – CONTROL OF THE MECHANICAL ENERGY s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK
Risk of being crushed by an equipment when moving the car in the hoistway (counterweight, Bracket, etc.).
Risk of being crushed on top of the hoistway if insucient space on the top of the hoistway.
PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: NEVER ride the li in normal speed. NEVER ride the li if there is no control (or inspecon box). EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS : Li safety equipment: • Free space or refuge or alternave means of safety distances (eg; above the top rail of the balustrade) • Control or inspecon box. • Limit switch. • Inspecon limit switch. Safe procedure: When riding the top of the car: • ALWAYS posion yourself in the center of the car when riding. • ALWAYS acvate the STOP buon aer a ride. • ALWAYS check the door lock when geng out at a dierent oor. • ALWAYS opt to ride down rather than up as it reduces the risk of being hit by the counterweight or xed equipment in the hoistway. In renovaon, if limit switches are not in place and a risk of crushing exists if the space is not sucient: • Install props under the counterweight with the right length to allow space on the top of the hoistway.
(23)
268
Issue 09/2015
Safety
FATAL & SERIOUS ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
WORK IN A HOISTWAY – ADJACENT UNITS – CONTROL OF THE ELEVATOR DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of being crushed by an adjacent running unit or any other equipment which may be moving (adjacent counterweight etc.).
s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS prevent the movement of the adjacent li by switching o its power or acvang its STOP in pit or on the top of the car. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Li safety equipment: • Full screen is in place along the enre height of the hoistway if distance with adjacent moving equipment is less than 50 cm • Screen in pit. Safe procedure if no screen is in place and there is a risk of having the body outside of the car contours: Before accessing the top of the car or the pit: The adjacent unit shall not move accidently: • Switch o the power of the adjacent unit and apply locks to prevent anyone pung power back on. OR :
• Open the hoistway door with the release key. • Check that the car stops when landing doors safety contact opens. • Push the STOP buon and close the landing doors to check it is working eecvely.
(24) www.liftequip.com
269
Safety
FATAL & SERIOUS ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
WORK IN A HOISTWAY – WORK ON THE HYDRAULIC LIFTS – CONTROL OF MECHANICAL ENERGY
s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK When working on the hydraulic system, on the pipe or cylinder, the risk of having a free fall of the car is signicant, potenally resulng in crushing hazard if the employee is working in pit.
PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS close the safety handle (if exisng). ALWAYS land the car on props or suspend the car with 2 safety means when working on the hydraulic system. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Li safety equipment: • Safety bracket that allow to mechanically secure the car.
Prop of the right capacity and installed under the car to prevent from falling in pit in case of a major hydraulic failure Handle closed and removed
Tools & equipment: • Slings or props in good condion and right weight capacity. • Safety brackets. Safe procedure: Before working on the hydraulic system, mechanical energy shall be secured: • Close the safety handle (if exisng). • Land the car on the brackets specially designed (if equipped). OR
• Install adequate capacity prop, secure it to prevent from falling. • Land the car on props from the machine room. OR
• Secure the car by 2 slings or hoisng devices. Take any measure to avoid 3rd party pung the system back on by: • Locking out and tagging out the unit. • Removing the handle o. In case work in pit is long (for example, more than 15 min), mechanical protecon as described above is imperave.
(25)
270
Issue 09/2015
Safety
FATAL & SERIOUS ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
WORK IN A HOISTWAY – WORK ON A LADDER – FALL PROTECTION DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of fall from the ladder in case: • The ladder slips if not adequately secured. • The ladder is not in good condion. The risk can occur typically when working on the top of the counterweight or deecon sheave on top of the hoistway in repair or renovaon.
s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
PROTECTION MEANS Work on ladder is allowed only for very short period of me. Otherwise, other means shall be idened (plaorm, scaold, etc). Check local regulaons! VITAL RULE: ALWAYS secure the ladder from bracing with cords or slings. ALWAYS wear fall protecon if a fall hazard exists and ALWAYS when feet are above 2 m. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Tools & equipment: • Ladder in good condion. • Fall protecon equipment. Safe procedure: Before working on the ladder: • Install a lifeline in the hoistway to prepare a proper hooking point for the body harness. • Secure the ladder so that it will not move. When working on the ladder: • Tie o the body harness to the lifeline.
(26) www.liftequip.com
271
Safety
FATAL & SERIOUS ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
WORK IN A HOISTWAY –FALLING OBJECTS (RENOVATION & NEW EQUIPMENT) – MECHANICAL ENERGY s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of injury by a falling object can occur when: • Working in the hoistway while an object falls through unprotected holes in the hoistway. • Working in the hoistway while a colleague is working above in the machine room or on the top of the car and drops a tool or equipment. • Working in the hoistway while another colleague installs a li in the adjacent hoistway not being protected by a screen or other means.
PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS wear a safety helmet when working on a construcon site or whenever a risk of falling objects exists in repair / renovaon. ALWAYS ensure that all holes into the hoistway are protected. NEVER allow stacked work. NEVER leave any tool or equipment on guide brackets or beams that could ulmately fall down. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Personal Protecve Equipment: • Safety helmet. Safe procedure: Before working in the hoistway: • Protect all holes by a xed plate or guard. • Protect the hoistway opening by guardrail and a net covering the enre opening. • Organize the acvity in the hoistway or common hoistway to eliminate stacked work.
When working in the hoistway: • Work from inside of the car as much as possible: any falling object will be stopped by the top of the car or ceiling.
(27)
272
Issue 09/2015
Safety
FATAL & SERIOUS ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
WORK IN A HOISTWAY – WORK ON ROPES (RENOVATION & NEW EQUIPMENT) DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK When working on the suspension system e.g. replacing ropes, this can lead to : • Free fall of the car. • Free fall of the counterweight.
s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS secure the car and the counterweight by 2 independent means when ropes are removed. ALWAYS trigger the safees. NEVER remove more than 50% of the ropes, if possible. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Tools & equipment: • Slings in good condion and adequate weight capacity. • Props in good condion and adequate weight capacity. Li equipment: • Safees are triggered: governor and car is blocked.
Car secured by 2 slings and counterweight secured on props
Safe procedure: Before removing the ropes: • Posion the car at the proper height. • Posion the car on the safees. • Secure the car by 2 independent means: 2 slings or hoisng devices. If one fails, the system will be secured by the other one. • Install props under the counterweight. • Secure the props from falling (onto the guide for example).
Car secured by 2 independent slings aached to rail graber
(28) www.liftequip.com
273
Safety
FATAL & SERIOUS ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
CONTROL OF HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES – HOISTING AND RIGGING ACTIVITIES s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of falling equipment if hoisng pracce is inadequate: • Car or counterweight insuciently secured. • Damaged sling or hoisng equipment. Risk of fall with the car if rigging pracce is inadequate: • Gravity center insuciently idened.
PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS ensure that the hoisng and rigging equipment is formally veried as per the local laws, are in good condion and properly rated for the load to be lied and suspended. ALWAYS protect slings from sharp edges with packing. NEVER walk / stand under suspended load. NEVER used, damaged or unknown capacity equipment. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Tools & equipment: • Cered hoisng tools: slings, shackles, hooking points shall be rated for the maximum load and in good condions. • Cered hoisng device, rated for the maximum load: ¡ To hoist material only (chain hoist). ¡ To hoist material and employee (e.g. Tirak). Safe procedure: Before liing or rigging: Check the weight of the equipment. • Use the right hooking point, shackle, sling and hoisng equipment accordingly. • Test the hooking point with specic equipment: it is usually the one that fails rst .
When liing equipment (machine, controller etc): • Idenfy the center of gravity to minimize unexpected swinging. NEVER hold the equipment with the hand: it can be crushed. Use a cord to control the movement.
(29)
274
Issue 09/2015
Safety
FATAL & SERIOUS ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
CONTROL OF HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES – SCAFFOLD DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of fall from the scaold. Risk of falling with the scaold if inadequately built. Check if cercaon is required by law for scaold and scaolder.
s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS ensure it has been built and checked by an authorized person. NEVER remove any barrier or planking. NEVER use an incomplete scaold. ALWAYS respect the maximum capacity and check if it is visibly displayed. ALWAYS ensure inspecon by an authorized person. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Tools & equipment: • Cered scaold. Safe procedure: • Check that the scaold is secured to the structure. • Ensure that there is safe access to the scaold with a xed ladder. • Ensure that the plaorm is in good condion, guardrails are in place. • NEVER climb onto the guardrails. Any defect shall be raised with the company and the scaold shall not be used. Note: Even if the primary protecon mean relies on the properly built car plaorm, it is recommended to wear a body harness and be ed o to a life line suspended in the hoistway.
(30) www.liftequip.com
275
Safety
FATAL & SERIOUS ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
CONTROL OF HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES – TEMPORARY FIXED WORKING PLATFORM s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK
Risk of fall from a temporary xed working plaorm Risk of falling with the temporary xed working plaorm if inadequately built or inadequate guardrails Check if cercaon is required by law for plaorm and plaorm installer!
PROTECTION MEANS
Safe and robust plaorm with guardrails protecng from falling
Safe metal working plaorm
VITAL RULE: ALWAYS ensure it has been built and checked by an authorized person. NEVER remove any barrier or planking. NEVER use an incomplete working plaorm. ALWAYS respect the maximum capacity and check if it is visibly displayed. ALWAYS ensure a safe xed mean of access to the plaorm. ALWAYS ensure inspecon by an authorized person. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Tools & equipment: • Cered working plaorm. • Cered shoe, adequately calibrated to capacity of the plaorm. • High quality materials. Safe procedure: • Check that the temporary xed working plaorm is robust. • ALWAYS respect the maximum capacity. • Ensure that there is safe access with a xed ladder. • NEVER climb onto the guardrails. • ALWAYS wear a body harness aached to a life line to prevent falls in case the plaorm collapses. Any defect shall be raised with the company Note: Even if the primary protecon mean relies on the properly built car plaorm, it is highly recommended to wear the body harness and be ed o to a life line suspended in the hoistway. (31)
276
Issue 09/2015
Safety
FATAL & SERIOUS ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
WORK IN A HOISTWAY – CAR USED AS A TEMPORARY MOVING PLATFORM – (RENOVATION & NEW EQUIPMENT) DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of fall from the moving plaorm. Risk of fall with the car if inadequately built.
s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: ALWAYS ensure that 2 independent safees are in place: • Ropes and governor. • Or ropes and addional safety. • Or special hoisng device authorized to li persons and an addional safety device.
Car connected to the ropes and governor in place
EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Tools & equipment: • Cered safees (governor or addional safety). • Cered hoisng device in good condion and right capacity. • Cered hooking points with the right capacity. Safe procedure: • ALWAYS respect the maximum capacity. • ALWAYS install the governor and the ropes as soon as possible and/or as per the installaon method. • ALWAYS use proper hoisng equipment. • ALWAYS install the appropriate balustrade on top of the car. • ALWAYS ensure inspecon by an authorized person. Note: Even if the primary protecon means relies on the properly built car plaorm, it is highly recommended to wear fall protecon ed o to a life line suspended in the hoistway. It is recommended to have an audio visual system xed under the car to inform other mechanics of the movement of the car when doors safees are disabled.
(32) www.liftequip.com
277
Safety
FATAL & SERIOUS ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
CONTROL OF HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES – DEFEATING A SAFETY CIRCUIT s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of being crushed when accessing/working/egressing the hoistway. Similar risks exist for members of the public in the situaon that the landing door safety has been disabled.
PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: Defeang a circuit shall be the last opon when no other alternaves exist: NEVER defeat a circuit for a long period. NEVER leave a shunt (shorng wire) in place when leaving the site. NEVER install a shunt in any hoistway equipment (lock, car lock, emergency stop etc): it is not visible and may be forgoen. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Tools & equipment: • Company approved shunts, 1 m long coloured cables to make it visible. Safe procedure: Before installing a shunt: • Remove the li from normal operaon. • Idenfy precisely the circuit to be defeated with the electrical diagram • If there is no other alternave method than shorng it, conduct a risk assessment. • ALWAYS use 1 m long coloured cable, properly authorized. • ALWAYS check the electrical diagram to be sure to place the shunt on the right circuit. • NEVER short the enre safety chain. • Install the shunt when the power is o to prevent electrocuon. If riding in the hoistway is necessary: • ALWAYS test STOP and INSPECTION before shunt is placed! Before leaving the site: • ALWAYS check all the safees aer having removed the shunt.
(33)
278
Issue 09/2015
Safety
FATAL & SERIOUS ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
CONTROL OF HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES – ASBESTOS s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK
Asbestos in brakes – risk of severe health eects if brake lining are removed without precauons.
Asbestos on hoistway walls – risk of severe health eects if put in contact or removed without precauons.
PROTECTION MEANS VITAL RULE: NEVER touch materials in the machine room or hoistway. NEVER work on equipment that contains asbestos without having the proper training and protecve equipment. ALWAYS be alert for dierent asbestos containing materials. EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Review the local regulaon to idenfy mandatory training, safety protecve tools and equipment! Safe procedure: The company must ask the customer for the record of asbestos before commencing work.
If asbestos has to be removed to perform maintenance, repair or modernizaon/replacement, it has to be done by a specialized company or by specially cered mechanics.
(34) www.liftequip.com
279
Safety
FREQUENT ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
Hopefully, fatal and serious accidents represent a minor proporon of the accidents reported by the companies. This chapter aims to present the risks that are the source of the most frequent accidents which occur. These accidents are, most of the me, not specic to li work. Although not usually fatal they can sll lead to painful injuries. Consequently, these risks must not be neglected and appropriate measures as suggested in the examples shall be taken. Again, this list is not exhausve and it is the responsibility of every company and employee to conduct a proper risk assessment and to comply with the communicated rules.
(35)
280
Issue 09/2015
Safety
FREQUENT ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
ACCESS THE HOISTWAY – ACCESS TO THE PIT DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of falling, slipping when accessing or egressing the pit if: • There is no ladder for pit > 1 m. • Ladder is not adequate. • Ladder is not used. • Floor is slippery.
s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
PROTECTION MEANS EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Li safety equipment: • Pit ladder. • Pit ladder is within reach from the landing. • Pit ladder is secured and safe. Safe procedure: Before accessing the pit: • Check the posion and condion of the ladder if any. • Block the door with the door blocking device in order to prevent the door from closing. • Ensure that the STOP buon is working properly (see p. 20) and is acvated. • In a safe and stable posion, reach for the ladder.
When egressing the pit: • Keep the STOP buon acvated. • Take the ladder and climb up safely. • Once safe on the landing, release the STOP. • Close the landing doors and verify these are mechanically closed. • Keep 3 points of contact on the ladder Use the pit ladder or a portable ladder. NEVER jump in pit! If the pit ladder is unsafe, it should be raised with your company who should inform the customer and/or inspecon body (if relevant) to help and nd an appropriate soluon.
(36) www.liftequip.com
281
Safety
FREQUENT ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
SLIP, TRIP, FALL s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK
Risk of falling on stairs when there is poor lighng or stairs are in poor condion
Risk of falling when the ground is wet, uneven, with a small step etc…
These accidents are some of the most frequent!
PROTECTION MEANS EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Protecve Personal Equipment: • An-slip shoes. • Shoes with a heel to give a beer grip on ladder. Safe procedure: • ALWAYS keep a rm foong. • ALWAYS watch for wet oor, slippery oor, icy condions… • ALWAYS be aware of the me switch. • ALWAYS use the handrail when going down the stairs, or keep points of contact where there is none (use the wall as a support). • NEVER rush, parcularly down the stairs. • NEVER use your mobile when walking or climbing down stairs.
(37)
282
Issue 09/2015
Safety
FREQUENT ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
SAFE USE OF HAND TOOLS s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK
Risk of slipping of tools if the spanner, screwdriver or bolt is in poor condion.
PROTECTION MEANS EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Tools and protecve equipment: • CE-marked and authorized by the company. • Hammer in good condion, xed head with sound handle. • Spanners in good condion, not burred or splayed. • Screwdrivers with good insulaon, not broken or worn. Safe procedure: • ALWAYS check the equipment is in good condion before use. • ALWAYS wear cut protecve gloves. • ALWAYS use the appropriate equipment (an adjustable wrench is less safe than a spanner which is less safe than a hex key). • NEVER use an electrician’s screwdriver for mechanical work. • NEVER use damaged tools. • ALWAYS use the correct sized tool for the job.
(38) www.liftequip.com
283
Safety
FREQUENT ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
SAFE USE OF ELECTRICAL PORTABLE TOOLS s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK
Risk of dust in the eye, risk of cuts, laceraon, ying parcles and re.
Risk of cuts, laceraon when using cung tools.
PROTECTION MEANS EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Tools and protecve equipment: • CE-marked and authorized by the company. • Glasses and protecve gloves. • Tool (vice-grip…) to maintain the piece rmly in place. • Grinder and drill equipped with a handle to get a rm grip. Safe procedure: • ALWAYS check the good condion of the equipment before use (overall condion, cable is not damaged, protecon in place). • ALWAYS use the drill and grinder with 2 hands. • ALWAYS wear glasses and gloves when drilling, grinding. • ALWAYS check that the grinder disk is within the limit date of use. • ALWAYS have a hot work permit if required. • NEVER use damaged tools. • NEVER hold the piece with the hand when drilling or grinding: secure it rmly in place with the correct tool. • NEVER cut upwards with angle grinder. Ear protecon should be used when drilling or grinding.
(39)
284
Issue 09/2015
Safety
FREQUENT ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
SAFE USE OF CHEMICALS s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK
Risk of loss of conscious, disease or health issues in case of use of dangerous products.
Risk of explosion if ammable product is used in close proximity to hot work or lit cigarees.
PROTECTION MEANS EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Selecon of the product: • Only use the chemicals approved by the company: usually, poisonous or toxic products are not necessary in li industry. • NEVER buy products not approved by the company. • ALWAYS check the Material Safety Data Sheet which describes the potenal dangers & safety precauons to take for each product. Tools and protecve equipment: • Gloves and glasses if a risk of splashing exists. • Suitable Respiratory Protecve Equipment. Safe procedure: • ALWAYS wear gloves to avoid product penetraon through the skin. • ALWAYS use small quanes in non-venlated areas (pit). • ALWAYS put the cap back on aer use. • NEVER smoke, grind or weld in close proximity to ammable product. • NEVER transfer a chemical product into an unidened can. • Read and follow the “precauons for use” as wrien on the container. • NEVER store volale chemicals / aerosols in non-venlated areas (pit)
(40) www.liftequip.com
285
Safety
FREQUENT ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
MANUAL HANDLING s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK Risk of back injuries when liing equipment. Risk of cuts, laceraon if the load falls down. Risk of falls or slips when handling the equipment.
PROTECTION MEANS EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS: Tools and protecve equipment: • Protecve gloves. • Handling equipment if the load is heavy (as dened in the risk assessment or as per the regulaon). Safe procedure: • ALWAYS keep the back straight and use the legs to li the load. • ALWAYS place the hands so that they don’t get crushed. • ALWAYS scan the route to idenfy possible risks of fall and slip.
(41)
286
Issue 09/2015
Safety
FREQUENT ACCIDENTS PREVENTION
Other risks that have not been developed in the present booklet but which can however be relevant: • Risk of a re. • Risk related to welding acvies. • Risk related to the specicity of the site (nuclear plant, chemical plant, explosive atmosphere etc). • Risks related to the use of vehicles. •…
s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
(42) www.liftequip.com
287
Safety
s t f i l r o f s e c i t c a r p y t e f a s c i s a B
This document was prepared by experts of the Educaon & Training Commiee and Quality, Safety, Environment and Educaon Commiee of the European Li Associaon It is illustrated by drawings which are available free of charge in high and low resoluon on the ELA website at
www.ela-aisbl.org
Make the fullest possible use of this brochure and drawings
European Li Associaon 44 Avenue Herrmann-Debroux, box 1, B-1160 Brussels Tel.: +32 (0) 2 779 50 82 – Fax: +32 (0)2 772 16 85
288
Issue 09/2015
Calendar
With us you can plan September 2015
Oktober 2015
November 2015
Dezember 2015
KW MO DI MI DO FR SA SO KW MO DI MI DO FR SA SO KW MO DI MI DO FR SA SO KW MO DI MI DO FR SA SO 36 37
7
1
2
3
4
5
8
9 10 11 12 13
40
6
41 5
6
7
1
2
3
44
8
9 10 11
4
45 2
3
9
4
5
6
7
1
49
8
50
7
1
2
3
4
5
8
9 10 11 12 13
6
38 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
42 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
46
10 11 12 13 14 15
51 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
39 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
43 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
47 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
52 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
40 28 29 30
44 26 27 28 29 30 31
48 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
53 28 29 30 31
r a d n e l a C
49 30 January 2016 CW
MON TUE WED THU FRI
53 1 4
5
6
March 2016
February 2016
7
SAT
SUN
1
2
3
8
9 10
CW
MON TUE WED THU
4
5
CW
SAT SUN
5 1
2
6
9 10 11 12 13 14
8
3
FRI
6
MON TUE WED THU
9
7
10
April 2016
7
3
FRI
4
SAT SUN
1
2
5
8
9 10 11 12 13
6
CW
MON TUE WED THU
13 14 4
5
6
7
FRI
SAT SUN
1
2
8
9 10
3
2 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
7 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
11 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
15 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
3 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
8 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
12 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
16 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
4 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
9 29
13 28 29 30 31
17 25 26 27 28 29 30
May 2016 CW
July2016
June 2016
MON TUE WED THU
FRI
17 5
6
7
MON TUE WED THU
1
22
8
23 6
7
FRI
3
SAT SUN
1
2
4
8
9 10 11 12
CW
MON TUE WED THU
26
5
27 4
5
6
7
FRI
SAT SUN
1
2
8
9 10
3
CW
MON TUE WED THU
4
5
SAT SUN
31 1
2
32
9 10 11 12 13 14
8
3
FRI
6
7
18 2
3
19
10 11 12 13 14 15
24 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
28 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
33 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
20 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
25 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
29 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
34 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
26 27 28 29 30
30 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
35 29 30 31
9
4
CW
SAT SUN
August 2016
22 30 31 September 2016 CW
MON TUE WED THU
35 36 5
6
7
October 2016
FRI
CW
SAT SUN
1
2
3
8
9 10 11
MON TUE WED THU
FRI
39
4
40 3
4
5
December 2016
November 2016
6
7
SAT SUN
CW
1
2
44
8
9
45
MON TUE WED THU
7
3
FRI
4
SAT SUN
1
2
5
8
9 10 11 12 13
6
CW
MON TUE WED THU
48 49 5
6
7
FRI
SAT SUN
1
2
3
8
9 10 11
4
37 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
41 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
46 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
50 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
38 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
42 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
47 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
51 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
39 26 27 28 29 30
43 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
48 28 29 30
52 26 27 28 29 30 31
44 31 Holiday: Neujahrstag (01.01.) Hl. Drei Könige (06.01.) Karfreitag Ostermontag 1-May Christi Himmelfahrt Pfngstmontag Fronleichnam MariäHimmelfahrt (15.08.) Tag der dt. Einheit (03.10.) Reformationstag (31.10.) Allerheiligen (01.11.) Buß- u. Bettag 1.u. 2. Weihnachtstag (25./26.12.)
BW BY1) B E BB HB HH HE MV NI NW RP SL SN ST SH TH x x x x x x x x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x x x x x x x
x
x x x x x
x x x x x
x x x x x
x x x x x
x x x x x x
x
x
x
x
x
x x x x x
x x x x x
x x x x x x
x x x x x x
x x x x x x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x x
x
x
x x x x x 2)
x x x x x
x x x x x
x x x x x 3)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
School year 2015/2016 Winter
x
x x
x x
k x
x
School holidays Germany:
x
x
BW * BY 08.02. - 12.02. * BE 01.02. - 06.02. BB 01.02. - 06.02. HB 28.01. - 29.01. HH 29.01. HE MV 01.02. - 13.02. NI 28.01. - 29.01. NW RP SL 08.02. - 13.02. ST 08.02. - 20.02. SA 01.02. - 10.02. SH TH 01.02. - 06.02.
Easter
School year 2016/2017 Pentecost
Summer
Autumn
24.03. / 29.03. - 02.04. *17.05. - 28.05. 28.07. - 10.09. 02.11. - 04.11. * 21.03. - 01.04. 17.05. - 28.05. 30.07. - 12.09. 31.10. - 04.11. 21.03. - 02.04. 06.05. / 17.05. / 18.05. * 21.07. - 02.09. 17.10. - 28.10. 23.03. - 02.04. 06.05. / 17.05. * 21.07. - 03.09. 17.10. - 28.10. 18.03. - 02.04. 06.05. / 17.05. * 23.06. - 03.08. 04.10. - 15.10. 07.03. - 18.03. 06.05. / 17.05. - 20.05. 21.07. - 31.08. 17.10. - 28.10. 29.03. - 09.04. 18.07. - 26.08. 17.10. - 29.10. 21.03. - 30.03. 14.05. - 17.05. 25.07. - 03.09. 24.10. - 28.10. 18.03. - 02.04. 06.05. / 17.05. 23.06. - 03.08. * 04.10. - 15.10. 21.03. - 02.04. 17.05. 11.07. - 23.08. 10.10. - 21.10. 18.03. - 01.04. 18.07. - 26.08. 10.10. - 21.10. 29.03. - 09.04. 18.07. - 27.08. 10.10. - 22.10. 25.03. - 02.04. 06.05. * 27.06. - 05.08. 03.10. - 15.10. 24.03. 06.05. - 14.05. 27.06. - 10.08. 04.10. - 15.10. 24.03. - 09.04. 06.05. 25.07. - 03.09. * 17.10. - 29.10. 24.03. - 02.04. 06.05. 27.06. - 10.08. 10.10. - 22.10.
Christmas 23.12. - 07.01. 24.12. - 05.01. 23.12. - 03.01. 23.12. - 03.01. 21.12. - 06.01. 27.12. - 06.01. 22.12. - 07.01. 22.12. - 02.01. 21.12. - 06.01. 23.12. - 06.01. 22.12. - 06.01. 19.12. - 31.12. 23.12. - 02.01. 19.12. - 02.01. 23.12. - 06.01. 23.12. - 31.12.
x means public holiday k means public holiday in municipalies with a predominantly Catholic populaon.
www.liftequip.com
289
Standards and Guidelines
Standards and Guidelines: s e n i l e d i u G d n a s d r a d n a t S
Legal requirements both at the European and national level constitute the framework for design, manufacture, distribution and operation of lifts. The corresponding standards and guidelines describe the technical demands on the products. The new standards take the expanded safety requirements into account, which underlie the current state of the art. EN 81-20 for passenger and freight lifts under the Lift Directive includes guidelines on the design for rope and hydraulic lifts and describes the conditions that have to be met during the installation of lifts. EN 81-50 lays down the calculations and tests that have to be conducted for components and systems. The current major changes are dominated by the new Lift Regulation AR 2014/33/EU and EN 81-20/-50. The transiti -
onal periods are presented in the illustration below.
EN 81-20 + EN 81-50 Transitio nal period in combination wi th old / new Elevator Directive 12.12.2014
20.04.2016
31.08.2017
EN 81-1/2
EN 81-20/-50
AR 95/16/EG
AR 2014/33/EU
The entire guideline family of the EN81- series is affected by the changes in the new EN 81-20/-50, which replace the previous EN 81-1 and EN 81-2. Consequently the individual standards will also be revised in the years to come
290
Issue 09/2015
Standards and Guidelines
Standards and Guidelines: s e n i l e d i u G d n a s d r a d n a t S
EN 81 Familie
EN 81-1X Grundlagen + Interpretationen
EN 81-2X Aufzüge f. den Personen- u. Lastentransport
10 System der Normenfamilie 11 Definitionen
20 Personenaufzüge
Seil Hydraulik etc.
12 Methoden für Risikobeurteilung
21 Neuaufzüge in bestehenden Gebäuden 22 Schrägaufzüge für Personentransport 28 Fern-NotrufSystem
EN 81-3X Aufzüge für den Lastentransport
30 Kleingüteraufzüge 31 Betretbare Güteraufzüge
EN 81-4X Sonderaufzüge für Personenund Lastentransport 40 Treppenlifte u. Schrägaufzüge f. Behinderte 41 Vertikale Plattformaufzüge 43 Aufzüge für Arbeitsplätze
EN 81-5X Prüfungen
50 Baumusterprüfungen Sicherheitsbau -teile
51 Baumusterprüfungen Aufzüge 58 Brandschutztüren
EN 81-6X Dokumentation für Aufzüge
EN 81-7X Sonderanwendungen
EN 81-8X Bestehende Aufzüge
60 Wartungs- und Bedienungsanl eitungen
70 Anforderung an Aufzüge f. Personen mit Behinderungen
80 Sicherheitsanpassung bestehender Aufzüge
61 Wartungs- und Bedienungs. Lastenaufzüge
71 Vandalenresistente Aufzüge
81 Modernisierung bestehender Aufzüge
68 Fernüberwachung
72 Feuerwehraufzüge
73 Verhalten von Aufzügen im Brandfall 76 Evakuierungsaufzüge für Pers. mit Behinderungen
82 Verbesserung der Zugänglichkeit besteh ender Aufzüge 83 Verbesserung der Schutzmassnahmen gegen mutwillige Zerstörung bestehender Aufzüge
77 Aufzüge i n Erdbebengebieten
Important notes on the application of the guidelines and standards • Lift planning must take the transitional periods for the application of the new standards and reference dates for distribution under the new Lift Directive into account to ensure that no retrotting is needed in the event of any building
site date postponements. • All current type approval certicates for safety components will also retain their validity under the new Lift Directive; •
• • •
they only need to be documented with a new conformity declaration under the new lift guidelines. Under the new Lift Directive protection against unintended car movement (UCM) becomes a safety component in accordance with 2014/33/EU. This does not have to be provided by a tested complete system; it can as before be the result of individual type tested components. The enhanced requirements for protected areas and crushing distances must be observed during lift planning. The strength requirements for doors and cars have been increased. If you have any questions on interpreting the standards, there is a hotline at the DAfA. The queries are answered by experts and are generally accessible via the VDMA homepage.
www.liftequip.com
291
Own Notes
Own Notes s e t o N n w O
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
292
Issue 09/2015
Own Notes
Own Notes ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
s e t o N n w O
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
www.liftequip.com
293
LiftEquip TEAM
The TEAM of LiftEquip M A E T p i u q E t f i L
Man ag i n g Di r ec t o r
Support
E-Mai l : o r d er m an ag em en t @l i f t eq u i p .d e
Thorst Thorsten en Elsässer
Matt atthias hias Bayha Bayha
Inge Arold
Managing Director
Head of Order Management
Order Management
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2928 M: + 49 (0) 173 / 752 3037 thorsten.elsaesser@ liftequip.de
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2962 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 745 6004 matthias.bayha@ liftequip.de
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2998
[email protected]
E-Mail: E-Mail: produk tservi
[email protected]
Sales Sales D-A-CH D-A-CH
Sales Sales Export
294
Or d e r m a n ag e m e n t
Volker Lenzner
Norbert Blum
An Anita ita Rank
Head of Product Service
Product Service
Sales Support
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2967 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 735 1166
[email protected]
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2473 M: + 49 (0) 173 / 709 1440
[email protected]
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2294 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 739 4988
[email protected]
Markus Bruckmeyer
Thomas Bäzner
Jochen Böhmler
Head of Sales D-A-CH
Sales D-A-CH
Sales D-A-CH
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2935 M: + 49 (0) 173 / 709 1426 markus.bruckmeyer@ liftequip.de
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2986 M: +49 (0) 172 / 735 0058 thomas.baezner@ liftequip.de
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2987 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 735 2040 joc jochen.bo .boehmler@ ler@ liftequip.de
Günter Stoll
Ewelina Czarnik
Maria Kairidou
Head of Sales Export
Sales Export
Sales Export
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2969 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 735 1839
[email protected]
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2968 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 735 1699 ewelina.czarnik@ liftequip.de
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2964 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 739 4100 maria.kairidou@ liftequip.de
E-Mail: E-Mail: vertrieb@lif tequip.de
E-Mail: E-Mail: salesexport@liftequi p.de
Issue 09/2015
LiftEquip TEAM
We're here for you Order management
Samira Jünger
Nida Koyuncu
Order Management
Order Management
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2782 M: + 49 (0) 173 / 709 1080 samira.juenger@ liftequip.de
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2963 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 218 2946
[email protected]
E-Mail: E-Mail: claim@lift equip.de
Sales Sales D-A-CH D-A-CH
Sales Sales Export
M A E T p i u q E t f i L
E-Mail: E-Mail:
[email protected]
E-Mail: E-Mail:
[email protected]
Frank Jobst
Thomas Oelschlägel
Jochen Digel
Quality Management
Scheduling
Hotline Frequency Inverter
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2940 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 739 4987
[email protected]
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2071 M: + 49 (0) 173 / 709 1436 thomas.oelschlaegel@ liftequip.de
M: + 49 (0) 172 / 735 2020
Volker Hermenau
Thomas Schmid
Rana Recber
Sales D-A-CH
Sales D-A-CH
Sales
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2975 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 739 4090 volker.hermenau@ liftequip.de
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2970 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 735 1005 thomas.schmid@ liftequip.de
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2893 rana.recber@ liftequip.de
Patrick Schoch
Waldemar Tabakow
Julian Wirtl
Sales Export
Key Account Manager
Trainee
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2966 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 739 3838 patrick.schoch@ liftequip.de
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-3063 M: + 49 (0) 173 / 709 1083 waldemar.tabakow@ liftequip.de
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2964 M: + 49 (0) 173 / 675 4018 julia julian n.wirtl irtl@ @lifte lifteq quip.d ip.de e
E-Mail: E-Mail: vertrieb@lif tequip.de
E-Mail: E-Mail: salesexport@lift equip.de
www.liftequip.com
295
7 2
6 2
5 2
4 2
3 2
2 2
1 2
0 2
9 1
8 1
7 1
6 1
5 1
4 1
3 1
2 1
1 1
0 1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components
Bernhaeuser Straße 45 D-73765 Neuhausen a.d.F. Tel.: +49 (0) 71 58 12 - 2929 Fax: +49 (0) 71 58 12 - 2971 E-Mail:
[email protected] Internet: www.liftequip.com www.liftequip.com
More than you expect ...
2.1 2.1 Dri Drive ve Uni Units ts Inquiry/Order
Customer
Inquiry
o
Ord er __________________ ___________________________ __________ _
Company
LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components
Contact person Phone
+49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax
+49 (7158) 12-2971
E-Mail
[email protected]
Date
Machine type
Gear
Controller type
VVVF inverter
MFC
Gearless
Frequency regulated regulated 20/21
MFC
30/31 Others
MFR
Suspension r
1:1
Rated load Q [kg]
3:1
4:1
___________ ___________
Car weight [kg] incl. Car sling
___________ ___________
Counterweight Counterweight [kg]
___________ ___________
Travel height [m]
___________ ___________
Compensation Compensation rope / chain
Yes
Machine located
Above
(MR) Below (MR)
Depth of machine [m] (if machine not above)
No Above
beside Below beside
Above
(HR) Below (SP)
___________ ___________ Gear Gearless
Documentation
2:1
___________ ___________
Rated speed v N [m/s]
Machine type
2-speed
TW
45 C TW 160 PMC 145-2 PMC 170 German
TW
63 B W 263 C DAF 210 DAF 270 English
French*
TW
130 W 332 C SC 300 SC 400 Russian**
Notes:
Page 1 of 2
Issue: 12/2014
2.1 2.1 Dri Drive ve Uni Units ts Inquiry/Order
Motor direction
Horizontal
Vertical
Machine in version
Left
Right
Protection class in machine room
IP21
IP54
Traction sheave diameter [mm]
_____________
Wrap angle
_____________
Groove type of traction sheave
V-groove
Rope type
Warrington
Seat
8x19
PAWO
6 8 _________
groove
Drako
250 T _________
Rope diameter [mm]
Number of ropes
___________ 2 up to 10
Groove clearance
___________ mm
Power supply [V]
400
Frequency of the mains [Hz]
Encoder
4096 1024
2048***
Encoder protocol
EnDat
Biss-C
Power supply of encoder
TTL
Special versions
Emergency braking system NBS
Surface colour (drive)
Standard
Machine base frame (RAL 7005)
50
10
13
EX
round-groove ***
Drako 300 T
16
___________ ___________
HTL
SSI
Sinus***
Brake monitoring monitoring (SA 3) sheave in shaft (SA 9) Traction sheave side (SA 11) Oil drain at side Partial explosion (SA 4) _________ No
Yes NBS
power pack NBS switchbox EN81-A3
primed RAL 7021 Special colour RAL ___________ With roller bearing distance between ropes ______________ mm bearing (flat frame) Without roller bearing With isolation
Notes:
*(Machine TW45C, TW63B, TW 130, TW160, DAF 210, DAF 270, SC300, NBS) **(Machine TW45C, TW63B, TW 130, TW160, DAF 210, DAF 270, SC300, SC400) ***( only gearless drives possible)
Page 2 of 2
Issue: 12/2014
2.1 2.1 Dri Drive ve Uni Units ts Drive with d rum Inquiry/Order Customer
Inquiry
o
Ord er __________________ ___________________________ __________ _
Company
LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components
Contact person Phone
+49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax
+49 (7158) 12-2971
E-Mail
[email protected]
Date
Machine type
Gear
Controller type
VVVF inverter
MFC
Suspension r
1:1
with drum
Frequency regulated regulated 20/21
MFC
30/31
Others
2:1
Rated load Q [kg] ___________ ___________ Rated speed v N [m/s]
0,3
m/s
0,5
Car weight [kg] incl. Car sling
___________
m/s
0,63
m/s
_____
m/s
Counterweight Counterweight [kg] ___________ ___________ Travel height [m] ___________ ___________ Machine located
Above Below
Depth of machine [m] (if machine not above) Machine type
Page 1 of 2
Above
beside Below beside
___________ ___________ Gear
TW
45 C TW 160
TW
63 W 263 C
TW
130 W 332 C
Issue: 02/2014
2.1 Drive Units Drive with d rum Inquiry/Order Documentation
German
English
French*
Motor direction
Horizontal
Vertical
Machine in version
Left
Right
Protection class in machine room
IP21
IP54
Drum diameter
360
Rope diameter [mm]
Power supply [V]
400
Frequency of the mains [Hz]
Encoder
4096 1024
Power supply of encoder
TTL
Special versions
Surface colour (drive)
Emergency braking system NBS
450
6 8 _________
50
520
10
Russian**
EX
________
13
16
___________ ___________
HTL
Brake monitoring (SA 3) Oil drain at side (SA 11) _________ Standard primed RAL 7031 (Gear) Standard primed RAL 9005 (Gearless) Special colour RAL ___________
No
Yes NBS
power pack NBS switchbox EN81-A3
Notes:
*(Machine TW45C, TW63, TW 130, TW160) **(Machine TW45C, TW63, TW 130, TW160)
Page 2 of 2
Issue: 02/2014
5.2 ModKit MO61 Enquiry/Order
Customer
Enquiry Ord er ______________________________
Company
o LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components
Contact person Phone
+49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax
+49 (7158) 12-2971
E-Mail
[email protected]
Date
1:1
2:1
ModKit MO61 (D4)
Data: Rated load Q [kg] Rated speed v N [m/s] Car weight* [kg] Headroom SK [mm] Travel height FH [m] Mass GGH [mm] Ceiling thickness s [mm] Traction sheave height n [mm] Pulley distance Y [mm] Traction sheave diameter DT [mm] Diverter pulley diameter DU [mm] Distance ceiling opening SAM (2:1) 750 – 1400 [mm] SAM (1:1) 600 – 1400 [mm] Distance ceiling opening min 200x200 [mm] Distance GG to wall min 130 [mm] *car weight with doors and car sling
Page 1 of 2
Issue: 02/2015
5.2 ModKit MO61 Enquiry/Order
Modernisationset ModKit MO61 consis ting of : __________________________________________________________________________ PMC145-2 M / 145-2L, incl. connection line (according to calculation)
Frequency inverter:
MFC
21-xx
MFC
31-xx
MFR
Machine base frame ModKit MO61, Machine base frame isolation
2 pc rope pulley with rope pulley addition (car + cw)Rope guard
Suspension rope 6 mm, Rope attachment
Brake control 2 (with MFC 31-xx integrated)
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Options: Governor
GBTK 6023 / D300, with console and final limit switch OFF
Governor
tensioning pulley
Overspeed governor rope length [mm] ____________
Notes:
Page 2 of 2
Issue: 02/2015
1.2 Car Slings TCS Enquiry/Order
Customer
o
Enquiry Ord er _____________________________
Company
LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components
Contact person Phone
+49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax
+49 (7158) 12-2971
E-Mail
[email protected]
Date
Type of car sling
TCS
25
TCS
40
TCS 60
Rated load [kg] ___________
DGB Distance between guide rails [mm] __________ Suspension
1:1
2:1
Number of buffers ________ Without buffer plate Documentation
German English Russian
Rated speed [m/s]
___________
Guide type
Sliding Roller
Guide rail surface
Short
Long
100
180
High
load 300 mm
Drawn
Processed
Oiled
Dry
Guide rail head [mm] (rubbing suface width mind 28 mm)
9
16
19
Others
Rope diameter [mm]
8
10
13
Number of ropes
___________ 2 up to 8
Location of speed governor rope
Left
behind Left front
Right
Distance guide rail–governor rope [mm]
150
250
Protection class of car
IP20
IP54
Travelling cable mounting
None
At
Car weight without car sling [kg]
________________
Total safety mass [kg]
________________
Braking system (upward direction)
Yes
No
Car isolation
Yes
No
Page 1 of 2
200
16
________ Others___
behind Right front 350
side
400
At
front
acc. to EN 81
Issue: 04/2015
1.2 1.2 Car Car Sling Sli ngs s TCS TCS Enquiry/Order
Floor material thickness [mm]
___________ ___________
Height [mm]
___________ (Distance between fixing points)
Width [mm]
___________ (DGB -110/DGB -50 if TCS 25)
Number of rope pulleys
Rope pulley axle diameter [mm]
360
Rope pulley distance at car sling [mm]
___________ ___________
Bearing type of rope pulley
Standard
1
2
None
450
High
load
Rope pulley isolation at car sling
Yes
Type of compensation compensation chain
WF100
WF150
WF200
WF300
WF350
WF400
No
540
Compensation chain
Yes
No
WF250
Notes:
Page 2 of 2
Issue: 04/2015
1.3 1.3 Cou Count nterweight erweights s GTK Enquiry/Order
Customer
Enquiry
Ord er ________________ ________________
To
Company
LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components
Contact person Phone
+49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax
+49 (7158) 12-2971
E-Mail
[email protected]
Date
Distance between guide rails [mm]
700
1050
1370
Counterweight Counterweight frame width [mm]
135
200
270
Suspension
1:1
2:1
Rated speed [m/s]
___________ ___________
Max 2.5 m/s
Guide rail surface
Drawn
Processed
Oiled
Dry
Guide rail head [mm]
5*
Guide type
Sliding Short Roller
9
___________
16
Others
Long
High
load
60
Counterweight Counterweight mass [kg]
___________ ___________
Rope diameter [mm]
Number of ropes
___________ ___________
2 up to 8
Number of buffers for counterweight counterweight
___________ ___________
Documentation
German
English
Counterweight Counterweight safety gear
Yes
CW rope pulley diameter [mm]
360
450
Compensation chain
Yes
Compensation Compensation chain type
WF100
WF150
WF200
WF300
WF350
WF400
8
10
No
13
16
_________
Without buffer buffer plate
acc. to EN 81 540
No
Panelling of counterweight frame
Yes
No
CW-panelling CW-panelling acc. to EN 81-1
Yes
No
Counterweight Counterweight fillers
Steel
Gussolith
Without
WF250
fillers
Notes:
*No safety gears possible.
Issue: 08/2008
1.4 1.4 Safet Safety y Gears Gears Enquiry/Order
Customer
Enquiry
Ord er ________________ ________________
Company
To LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components
Contact person Phone
+49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax
+49 (7158) 12-2971
E-Mail
[email protected]
Date
Safety gear operation
In downward direction (freefall) (freefall ) In upward direction acc. to EN 81
Guide rail surface
Drawn
Processed
Oiled
Dry
Operating speed [m/s]
___________ ___________
Car weight, incl. car sling [kg]
___________ ___________
Rated load [kg]
___________ ___________
Counterweight Counterweight [kg] (only required for braking upwards)
___________
Rope weight [kg] (only required for braking upwards)
___________
Compensation Compensatio n chain [kg]
___________
Travelling cable [kg]
___________ ___________
Guide rail head [mm]
9 19
10 28,6
13 35
Type of progressive safety gear (e.g. type RL 111)
___________ ___________
Type of braking system (e.g. type RL 011)
___________ ___________
Elevator standard
EN
Documentation
German
English
French
Russian
81
and/or
14 16 Others ___________ ___________
TRA
Notes:
Issue: 11/2009
1.5 Overspeed Governors (300 mm) Enquiry/Order Customer Enquiry Order _____________________________
To
Company
LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components
Contact person Phone
+49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax
+49 (7158) 12-2971
E-Mail
[email protected]
Date
Use of governors g overnors Governor type
Car
standard Remote tripping Blocking device
Counterweight
Standard
(G) with power supply (M) Rocker blockable with without power supply (O) ), EN81-A3 conform Rocker blockable without Wheel blockable without power supply, acting right (R) Wheel blockable without power supply, acting left (L)
Governor pulley type
300 mm with test groove 300 mm (1) groove (2) initiator (3) 300 mm with test groove, 1 mounted initiator groove (4) 250 mm with test groove 300 mm with test groove, 2 mounted initiators initiators (5) 212 mm at 300 mm wheel without 300 groove (6)
Governor switch type
Governor mounting type
Governor impulse generator
Non-locking, for vN ≤ 1.0 m/s (1) Non-locking, EX EX protected, for vN ≤ 1.0 m/s (2) Locking and non-locking, non-locking, manual reset (3) Locking and non-locking non-locking electrical reset, reset, 24 V (4) Locking, manual reset (5) Locking, electrical res reset, et, 24 V (6)
Without console (U) With console (K) With console and final limit limit switch (N) On console at guide rail
With mounted impulse generator, generator, vN≤1.6m/s (I) Without impulse generator generator
Rated speed [m/s]
___________ Max 2.5 m/s
Tripping speed [m/s]
For car __________________ ______________________ ____ counterweig ht _____________ For counterweight
Max 2.5 m/s Max 2.5 m/s
Documentation
German
Russian
English
French
Notes:
Page 1 of 3
Issue: 07/2012
1.5 Overspeed Governors (200 mm) Enquiry/Order Customer Enquiry Order _____________________________
To
Company
LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components
Contact person Phone
+49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax
+49 (7158) 12-2971
E-Mail
[email protected]
Date
Application Overspeed Governor
Car
OG version
standard remote tripping slump protection
OG switch versionst
OG mounting
switch non-locking type with 2 contacts, automatic reset via spring power vN ≤ 1,0 m/s, without additional additional locking type switch (3) usable (1) with 1 contact, with electrical reset, 24 V (3) switch locking type with switch locking type with 1 contact (3) and switch non-locking type with 2 contacts (1) (4)
without console, mounting directly with with the flooring (U) console for mounting on guide guide rail (MRL)
Sensors, 36 pulses/revolution pulses/revolution
Accessories
standard version version (G) rocker blockable with with voltage, 24 V (M) rocker blockable without without voltage, 12 V (O)
1 Initiator (detection of movement) movement) (1I) 2 Initiators (detection of movement and travel direction) (2I)
reinforcement of of housing for rope forces from 1800 N to 4000 N (V) tension pulley, operating of of the safety gears in download direction direction ↓ tension pulley, operating of the safety gears in down- and upward direction ↕
Rated speed [m/s]
___________ Max 1,6 m/s
Tripping speed [m/s]
Documentation
for car ______________________ _________________ _____ for counterweight counterweigh t ______________
German
English
French
Max 3,0 m/s Max 3,0 m/s
Russian
Notes:
Page 2 of 3
Issue: 07/2012
1.5 Rope Tensioning Pulleys Enquiry/Order Customer Enquiry Order _____________________________
To
Company
LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components
Contact person Phone
+49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax
+49 (7158) 12-2971
E-Mail
[email protected]
Date
car
counterweight counterweight
Travel height [m]
___________ ___________
Rated speed [m/s]
___________ Max 2.5 m/s
Car guide rail type
Car braking system
Yes
Distance guide rail - governor rope [mm] Optional
150*
200
250
300
350
400
T 70-1/A (k=9mm) (k=9mm) (k=16mm) T 125/B (k=16mm) T 140-1/B (k=19mm) (k=19mm) ___________
T 90/B (k=16mm) (k=16mm) (k=16mm) T 127-2/B (k=16mm) T 140-2/B (k=28,6mm)
No
Notes:
*Only for T70-1/A rail.
Page 3 of 3
Issue: 07/2012
1.6 Rubber- and Oil Buffers Enquiry/Order
Customer
Enquiry
Ord er ________________
To
Company
LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components
Contact person Phone
+49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax
+49 (7158) 12-2971
E-Mail
[email protected]
Date
Buffer type
Rubber buffer (vN≤1m/s) Oil buffer Retardation monitoring device
Yes
No
Rated speed [m/s] ___________ Total load, incl. travelling cable, rope weight, compensation chain [kg] (capacity + car complete)
___________ each buffer
Counterweight mass
___________ kg
Oil buffer with reduced stroke (SA 1)
Yes
Place of installation
MRL
Machine
Buffer support
Yes
No
Documentation
German
English
French
Russian
No room
Notes:
Issue: 02/2009
1.7 Roller-, Sliding Guides and Lubricators Enquiry/Order
Customer
Enquiry
Ord er ________________
Company
To LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components
Contact person Phone
+49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax
+49 (7158) 12-2971
E-Mail
[email protected]
Date
Guide type Lubricator Application for
Sliding Short
Long
Roller
60
100
Yes
Car
Counterweight
High
load 180 300 mm
No
Rated speed [m/s] ___________ Guide rail head [mm]
5 19
9 28.6
16
Notes:
Issue: 08/2008
1.8 Ropes/ Rope Attachments Enquiry/Order
Customer
Enquiry
Ord er ________________
To
Company
LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components
Contact person Phone
+49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax
+49 (7158) 12-2971
E-Mail
[email protected]
Date
Elevator rope
Warrington
Rope diameter [mm]
Rope length [m]
___________
Number of ropes
___________
Oil for rope maintenance
Yes
Rope cleaner
Yes
Number of rope attachments for the car
___________
Number of rope attachments for the counterweight
___________
Onesided integrated rope attachment and mounting parts1
Yes
8x19
6 8 __________
Drako
250 T Drako 300 T
10
13
PAWO
16
No
No
No
1) only at PAWO ropes
Governor rope
Warrington
Rope diameter [mm]
6,5
Rope length [m]
___________
6x19
8
Notes:
Issue: 08/2008
1.9 Rope Pulleys Axles, Axle Brackets Enquiry/Order
Customer
Enquiry
Ord er ________________
To
Company
LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components
Contact person Phone
+49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax
+49 (7158) 12-2971
E-Mail
[email protected]
Date
Material of rope pulley
Cast
Rope pulley diameter [mm]
360
400
450
540
640
740
Rope diameter [mm]
steel
8 16
Polyamide*
10 18
13 ___________
Number of grooves of rope pulley ___________ Groove distance RA [mm] ___________ Bearing type of rope pulley
Standard
High
Axle for Rope pulley
Yes
No
Axle bracket
Yes
No
Rope pulley load [kN]
___________
Rope speed [m/s]
___________
load
Notes:
*Possible for diameter 360 mm, 7x8, RA 14 and 450 mm, 7x10, RA 18.
Issue: 08/2008
5._ LEA MRL– Systems ®
Enquiry/Order
___ LEA
___ LEA -flex ___ LEA -comfort
®
Customer
®
®
o
Enquiry Order ____________________________
Company
LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components
Contact person Phone
+49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax
+49 (7158) 12-2971
E-Mail
[email protected]
Date
Lift d ata: Project name Rated load Q [kg]
________
Rated speed v N [m/s] ______
Mass of car* [kg] ________
Pit [mm]
________
Headroom [mm]
_________
Travel height FH [m] _____
Shaft depth ST [mm]
______
Shaft width SB [mm] _______
Gauge between rails FK [mm] _____________
Cabin width KB [mm]
_____
Cabin depth KT [mm] _______
Gauge between rails GG [mm] _____________
Cabin height KH [mm] _____ (Cabin without cladding)
Clear cabin height KH [mm]
_______
GG-Compensation x [%] _____________
Door width TB [mm] ________
Door height TH [mm] _______
__ Entrances/open through
Car floor thickness [mm] ____ Mounting in shaft of anchor Flat
pit
New
installation /
Flat
Fixing span [mm] ________ Anchor rail
Dowels
head
Replacement or
modernisation
* Weight of car with doors withoutch frame
Component set contains: Gearless (PMC / DAF) Machine frame Counterweight / fillers Suspension ropes Shaft bow
Inverter MFC Car sling Overspeed governor Governor rope Rails
Inverter MFR Car Buffers Rope attachment Doors
Options: Sliding guide Well lighting
Roller guide Pit ladder
Compensation chain Car
Notice and statements t o car equipm ent and special requests: ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ Issue: 03/2015
5.
– Cargo
®
Enquiry/Order Customer
o
Enquiry Order ____________________________
Company
LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components
Contact person Phone
+49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax
+49 (7158) 12-2971
E-Mail
[email protected]
Date
Lift Data: Project name Rated Load Q [kg] ________
Operating speed v N [m/s] ____
Mass of car* [kg]
Pit [mm]
Headroom [mm] _________
Travel height TH [m] _____
Shaft depth SD [mm] ______
Shaft width SW [mm]
Gauge between rails [mm] _________________
Car width CW [mm]
_____
Car depth CP [mm]
Car heigth CH [mm]
_____
(cabin without cladding)
Clear cabin height [mm]______ CW-compensation x [%] _____________________
Door width CW [mm] _______
Door height DH [mm]_________ ___ Access/Dual entrance
________
Car floor height [mm]
_____ _______
__
Mounting in shaft of anchor
______
Gauge between rails CW [mm] ______________
Distance between fastening [mm]__________________ Rails
Dowels
Number of Landing ___________ New
Installation /
replacement
or modernisation
**Car weight with doors but without car sling
Component Set Contains: Gear Machine base frame Counterweight / Filler Suspension rope Shaft bow Option: Guide rails Shaft lighting
Geraless Car sling Governor Governor rope Rails
Roller guides Pit ladder
Inverter MFC Car Buffer Rope attachment Doors
Compensation chain Car
Notes: ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ Issue: 03/2015
5.10 LEMoS Enquiry/Order
Customer Enquiry Ord er ____________________________ Company
o LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components
Contact person Phone
+49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax
+49 (7158) 12-2971
E-Mail
[email protected]
Date
Plant date for th e modernisation:
Project name: _______________________
Factory no.:____________________________
Year: ______________________________
Manufacturer: __________________________
Rated load Q [kg] __________
Rated speed vN [m/s] _______
Mass of car* [kg] ________
Shaft pit [mm] _____________
Headroom [mm] __________
Travel height TH [m] _____
Shaft depth SD [mm] _______
Shaft width SW [mm] _______
Gauge between rails car [mm] ___________
Car width [mm] ____________
Car depth [mm]____________
Gauge between rails CW [mm] __________________
Car height (raw car) [mm] _____ Clear car height [mm] _______
Counterweight [kg]_______
Door widht DW [mm] _________ Door heigt DH [mm] ________ Dual entrance yes no
Entrance 1 ______ doors
Entrance 2 ________ doors
Rail specification at partial replacement Guide rail
Guide blade ______ mm
Treads ___________ mm
Version
Drawn
machined
Sliding guide
Pulley guide
Car floor thickness [mm] _________________________ Fastening in well: Partial Full
Anchor
rail type ________
Distance between fastening [mm] __________________ Dowel
replacement (without CW, rails, adjustable bracket)
replacement (without control, operating- and indicator elements)
*Weight of car with integrated car sling and doors
07-2014 Page 1 of 6
5.10 LEMoS Enquiry/Order
LEMoS consisting of:
Drive:
Gear
Gearless
Inverter:
MFR (with regeneration)
MFC
Machine base frame
Machine base isolation
Car LEMoS
Counter weight
Buffer
Rope attachment
Overspeed governor
Diameter [mm]
200
300
Position governor
Back left
Back right
Front left
Front right
Note: Construction drawing w ith t ested dimensions alternatively to the indi vidual measure
Options:
Pulley guides
Governor rope
Suspension rope
Buffer support with buffer
Adjustable bracket
Counterweight filler
Car guide rail
Counterweight guide rail
Pit ladder
Compensation chain
Door typ:
ThyssenKrupp S8A/K8A
M2T,
right
M2Z,
center-opening
M4ZT,
Wittur Fineline
Sematic C-MOD
4S
left
center-opening
(4-panel, telescopic center-opening)
4/AS-L
(4-panel, center-opening)
4/AS-R
(4-panel, center-opening)
2L
(2-panel, side left opening)
2R
(2-panel, side right opening)
4Z
(4-panel, telescopic center-opening)
Other door type
_________________________________________________
Door version
Color
RAL _______________
Stainless
steel grain 220
Stainless
steel leather
special
Stainless
steel linen
___________________________________________ 07-2014 Page 2 of 6
5.10 LEMoS Enquiry/Order
Elevator Car Design (see brochu res page 20):
Walls:
Galvanised Traffic
steel
white RAL 9016/powder coating
Powder
coating RAL ___________________
Stainless
Ceiling and lighting :
steel grain 220 Spot
Stainless
LED
Traffic
steel leather
Slim
LED (single lamp)
coating
Stainless without
steel 220
lighting
Traffic
white RAL 9016
Powder
Mirror:
Half
mirror
Flooring:
Black
Stone/rubber
Kayar
Kayar
Grey/rubber
Ice/
Handrails:
Skirt guards:
one
Full
Grey/vinyl
Prepared
side
coating
height mirror Black/ rubber
rubber
Dark
Brushed Oak/PVC
for flooring material of up to 25 mm two
sides
three
sides
Stainless
steel 220, Ø 40 mm, version straight
Stainless
steel 220, Ø 40 mm, bowed version
Stainless
steel 220, Ø 40 mm, bowed version,surrounding
Aluminium, Stainless
steel linen
white RAL 9016
Powder
Dove
Stainless
30 mm
steel grain 220, 50 mm
Notes:
____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________
07-2014 Page 3 of 6
5.10 LEMoS Enquiry/Order
Shaft sit uation:
LEMoS:
Position counterweight (GW) behind Following components will remain: car rails, CW-rails, counterweight Position counterweight (GW) side, without dual entrance Following components will remain: car rails, CW-rails, counterweight
As an alternative to the measurements can also be a manhole floor plan will be made available. Dimension shaft front to car rail
A=
Dimension from car guide blade to CW rail level
B=
Centre CW rail to rear wall
C=
Car guide blade to left side wall
D1=
Car guide blade to right side wall
D2=
CW guide blade to left side wall
F1=
CW guide blade to right side wall
F2=
Dimension from CW guide blade to car rail level
G=
Dimension for collision check CW car door
J1=
Dimension for collision check CW car door
L1=
Gauge between rails for car
FKSTM=
Gauge between rails for counterweight
GGTSTM=
CW depth
GGT=
Counterweight rear
Without bracket support
Without bracket support
CW rear left
CW front left
CW rear right*
CW front right*
With bracket support CW left CW right*
*Counterweight (CW) right symmetrical (mirror image)
07-2014 Page 4 of 6
5.10 LEMoS Enquiry/Order
LEMoS:
Position Counterweight (CW) side, with dual entrance Following components will remain: car rails, CW-rails, counterweight
As an alternative to the measurements can also be a manhole floor plan will be made available. Dimension shaft front to car rail
A=
Dimension from car guide blade to CW rail level
B=
Centre CW rail to rear wall
C=
Car guide blade to left side wall
D1=
Car guide blade to right side wall
D2=
Dimension from CW guide blade to car rail level
G=
Dimension for collision check CW car door
J1=
Dimension for collision check CW car door
L1=
Dimension for collision check CW car door _DE
J3=
Dimension for collision check CW car door _DE
L2_DL=
Gauge between rails for car
FKSTM=
Gauge between rails for counterweight
GGTSTM=
CW depth
GGT=
Without bracket support CW rear left CW rear right*
Without bracket support CW front left CW front right*
With bracket support CW left CW right*
*Counterweight (CW) right symmetrical (mirror image)
07-2014 Page 5 of 6